Chandogya Upanishad

The Divine Upanishad Traditional Sanskrit
Chandogya Upanishad Banner
om apyayantu mamangani vakpranascaksuh srotramatho balamindriyani ca sarvani . sarvam brahmaupanisadam maham brahma nirakuryam ma ma brahma nirakarodanirakaranamastvanirakaranamm me'stu . tadatmani nirate ya upanisatsu dharmaste mayi santu te mayi santu .. .. om santih santih santih .. || prathamo'dhyayah || omityetadaksaramudgithamupasita | omiti hyudgayati tasyopavyakhyanam || 1.1.1 || esam bhutanam prthivi rasah prthivya apo rasah | apamosadhayo rasa osadhinam puruso rasah purusasya vagraso vaca rgrasa rcah sama rasah samna udgitho rasah || 1.1.2 || sa esa rasanamrasatamah paramah parardhyo'stamo yadudgithah || 1.1.3 || katama katamarkkatamatkatamatsama katamah katama udgitha iti vimrstam bhavati || 1.1.4 || vagevarkpranah samomityetadaksaramudgithah | tadva etanmithunam yadvakca pranascarkca sama ca || 1.1.5 || tadetanmithunamomityetasminnaksare samsrjyate yada vai mithunau samagacchata apayato vai tavanyonyasya kamam || 1.1.6 || apayita ha vai kamanam bhavati ya etadevam vidvanaksaramudgithamupaste || 1.1.7 || tadva etadanujnaksaram yaddhi kimcanujanatyomityeva tadahaiso eva samrddhiryadanujna samardhayita ha vai kamanam bhavati ya etadevam vidvanaksaramudgithamupaste || 1.1.8 || teneyam trayividya vartate omityasravayatyomiti samsatyomityudgayatyetasyaivaksarasyapacityai mahimna rasena || 1.1.9 || tenobhau kuruto yascaitadevam veda yasca na veda | nana tu vidya cavidya ca yadeva vidyaya karoti sraddhayopanisada tadeva viryavattaram bhavatiti khalvetasyaivaksarasyopavyakhyanam bhavati || 1.1.10 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.2 devasura ha vai yatra samyetire ubhaye prajapatyastaddha deva udgithamajahruranenainanabhibhavisyama iti || 1.2.1 || te ha nasikyam pranamudgithamupasamcakrire tam hasurah papmana vividhustasmattenobhayam jighrati surabhi ca durgandhi ca papmana hyesa viddhah || 1.2.2 || atha ha vacamudgithamupasamcakrire tam hasurah papmana vividhustasmattayobhayam vadati satyam canrtam ca papmana hyesa viddha || 1.2.3 || atha ha caksurudgithamupasamcakrire taddhasurah papmana vividhustasmattenobhayam pasyati darsaniyam cadarsaniyam ca papmana hyetadviddham || 1.2.4 || atha ha srotramudgithamupasamcakrire taddhasurah papmana vividhustasmattenobhayam srnoti sravaniyam casravaniyam ca papmana hyetadviddham || 1.2.5 || atha ha mana udgithamupasamcakrire taddhasurah papmana vividhustasmattenobhayamsamkalpate samkalpaniyamca casamkalpaniyam ca papmana hyetadviddham || 1.2.6 atha ha ya evayam mukhyah pranastamudgithamupasamcakrire tamhasura rtva vidadhvamsuryathasmanamakhanamrtva vidhvamsetaivam || 1.2.7 || yathasmanamakhanamrtva vidhvamsata evam haiva sa vidhvamsate ya evamvidi papam kamayate yascainamabhidasati sa eso'smakhanah || 1.2.8 || naivaitena surabhi na durgandhi vijanatyapahatapapma hyesa tena yadasnati yatpibati tenetaranprananavati etamu evantato'vittvotkramati vyadadatyevantata iti || 1.2.9 || tam hangira udgithamupasamcakra etamu evangirasam manyante'nganam yadrasah || 1.2.10 || tena tam ha brhaspatirudgithamupasamcakra etamu eva brhaspatim manyante vagghi brhati tasya esa patih || 1.2.11 || tena tam hayasya udgithamupasamcakra etamu evayasyam manyanta asyadyadayate || 1.2.12 || tena tamha bako dalbhyo vidamcakara | sa ha naimisiyanamudgata babhuva sa ha smaibhyah kamanagayati || 1.2.13 || agata ha vai kamanam bhavati ya etadevam vidvanaksaramudgithamupasta ityadhyatmam || 1.2.14 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.3 athadhidaivatam ya evasau tapati tamudgithamupasitodyanva esa prajabhya udgayati | udyamstamo bhayamapahantyapahanta ha vai bhayasya tamaso bhavati ya evam veda || 1.3.1 || samana u evayam casau cosno'yamusno'sau svara itimamacaksate svara iti pratyasvara ityamum tasmadva etamimamamum codgithamupasita || 1.3.2 || atha khalu vyanamevodgithamupasita yadvai praniti sa prano yadapaniti so'panah | atha yah pranapanayoh samdhih sa vyano yo vyanah sa vak | tasmadapranannanapananvacamabhivyaharati || 1.3.3 || ya vaksarktasmadapranannanapanannrcamabhivyaharati yarktatsama tasmadapranannanapanansama gayati yatsama sa udgithastasmadapranannanapanannudgayati || 1.3.4 || ato yanyanyani viryavanti karmani yathagnermanthanamajeh saranam drdhasya dhanusa ayamanamapranannanapanamstani karotyetasya hetorvyanamevodgithamupasita || 1.3.5 || atha khaludgithaksaranyupasitodgitha iti prana evotpranena hyuttisthati vaggirvaco ha gira ityacaksate'nnam thamanne hidamsarvamsthitam || 1.3.6 || dyaurevodantariksam gih prthivi thamaditya evodvayurgiragnistham samaveda evodyajurvedo girrgvedastham dugdhe'smai vagdoham yo vaco doho'nnavanannado bhavati ya etanyevam vidvanudgithaksaranyupasta udgitha iti || 1.3.7 || atha khalvasihsamrddhirupasarananityupasita yena samna stosyansyattatsamopadhavet || 1.3.8 || yasyamrci tamrcam yadarseyam tamrsim yam devatamabhistosyansyattam devatamupadhavet || 1.3.9 || yena cchandasa stosyansyattacchanda upadhavedyena stomena stosyamanah syattamstomamupadhavet || 1.3.10 || yam disamabhistosyansyattam disamupadhavet || 1.3.11 || atmanamantata upasrtya stuvita kamam dhyayannapramatto'bhyaso ha yadasmai sa kamah samrdhyeta yatkamah stuviteti yatkamah stuviteti || 1.3.12 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.4 omityetadaksaramudgithamupasitomiti hyudgayati tasyopavyakhyanam || 1.4.1 || deva vai mrtyorbibhyatastrayim vidyam pravisamste chandobhiracchadayanyadebhiracchadayamstacchandasam chandastvam || 1.4.2 || tanu tatra mrtyuryatha matsyamudake paripasyedevam paryapasyadrci samni yajusi | te nu viditvordhva rcah samno yajusah svarameva pravisan || 1.4.3 || yada va rcamapnotyomityevatisvaratyevamsamaivam yajuresa u svaro yadetadaksarametadamrtamabhayam tatpravisya deva amrta abhaya abhavan || 1.4.4 || sa ya etadevam vidvanaksaram pranautyetadevaksaram svaramamrtamabhayam pravisati tatpravisya yadamrta devastadamrto bhavati || 1.4.5 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.5 atha khalu ya udgithah sa pranavo yah pranavah sa udgitha ityasau va aditya udgitha esa pranava omiti hyesa svaranneti || 1.5.1 || etamu evahamabhyagasisam tasmanmama tvameko'siti ha kausitakih putramuvaca rasmimstvam paryavartayadbahavo vai te bhavisyantityadhidaivatam || 1.5.2 || athadhyatmam ya evayam mukhyah pranastamudgithamupasitomiti hyesa svaranneti || 1.5.3 || etamu evahamabhyagasisam tasmanmama tvameko'siti ha kausitakih putramuvaca pranamstvam bhumanamabhigayatadbahavo vai me bhavisyantiti || 1.5.4 || atha khalu ya udgithah sa pranavo yah pranavah sa udgitha iti hotrsadanaddhaivapi durudgithamanusamaharatityanusamaharatiti || 1.5.5 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.6 iyamevargagnih sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudha?m sama tasmadrcyadhyudhamsama giyata iyameva sagniramastatsama || 1.6.1 || antariksamevargvayuh sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudham sama tasmadrcyadhyudham sama giyate'ntariksameva sa vayuramastatsama || 1.6.2 || dyaurevargadityah sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudham sama tasmadrcyadhyudham sama giyate dyaureva sadityo'mastatsama || 1.6.3 || naksatranyevarkcandramah sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudham sama tasmadrcyadhyudham sama giyate naksatranyeva sa candrama amastatsama || 1.6.4 || atha yadetadadityasya suklam bhah saivargatha yannilam parah krsnam tatsama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudham sama tasmadrcyadhyudham sama giyate || 1.6.5 || atha yadevaitadadityasya suklam bhah saiva satha yannilam parah krsnam tadamastatsamatha ya eso'ntaraditye hiranmayah puruso drsyate hiranyasmasrurhiranyakesa apranasvatsarva eva suvarnah || 1.6.6 || tasya yatha kapyasam pundarikamevamaksini tasyoditi nama sa esa sarvebhyah papmabhya udita udeti ha vai sarvebhyah papmabhyo ya evam veda || 1.6.7 || 7. His eyes are like lotuses blossomed by the sun. He is called ut because he is above all weakness. He who knows this truth is also above all weakness. Tasya, his; yatha, like; kapyasam [kapi, which means 'he who drinks water' (i.e, the sun) + asa, which means blossomed], blossomed by the sun; pundarikam evam, like the lotus; aksini the eyes; tasya ut iti nama, his name is 'ut'; sah esah sarvebhyah papmabhyah uditah, he is above all weakness; udeti, he rises; ha vai sarvebhyah papmabhyah, above all weakness; yah, who; evam veda, knows thus. tasyarkca sama ca gesnau tasmadudgithastasmattvevodgataitasya hi gata sa esa ye camusmatparanco lokastesam ceste devakamanam cetyadhidaivatam || 1.6.8 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.7 athadhyatmam vagevarkpranah sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudham sama tasmadrcyadhyudhamsama giyate| vageva sa prano'mastatsama || 1.7.1 || caksurevargatma sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudhamsama tasmadrcyadhyudhamsama giyate | caksureva satmamastatsama || 1.7.2 || srotramevarnmanah sama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudhamsama tasmadrcyadhyudhamsama giyate | srotrameva sa mano'mastatsama || 1.7.3 || atha yadetadaksnah suklam bhah saivargatha yannilam parah krsnam tatsama tadetadetasyamrcyadhyudhamsama tasmadrcyadhyudhamsama giyate | atha yadevaitadaksnah suklam bhah saiva satha yannilam parah krsnam tadamastatsama || 1.7.4 || atha ya eso'ntaraksini puruso drsyate saivarktatsama taduktham tadyajustadbrahma tasyaitasya tadeva rupam yadamusya rupam yavamusya gesnau tau gesnau yannama tannama || 1.7.5 || sa esa ye caitasmadarvanco lokastesam ceste manusyakamanam ceti tadya ime vinayam gayantyetam te gayanti tasmatte dhanasanayah || 1.7.6 || atha ya etadevam vidvansama gayatyubhau sa gayati so'munaiva sa esa camusmatparanco lokastamscapnoti devakamamsca || 1.7.7 || athanenaiva ye caitasmadarvanco lokastamscapnoti manusyakamamsca tasmadu haivamvidudgata bruyat || 1.7.8 || kam te kamamagayanityesa hyeva kamaganasyeste ya evam vidvansama gayati sama gayati || 1.7.9 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.8 trayo hodgithe kusala babhuvuh silakah salavatyascaikitayano dalbhyah pravahano jaivaliriti te hocurudgithe vai kusalah smo hantodgithe katham vadama iti || 1.8.1 || tatheti ha samupavivisuh sa ha pravahano jaivaliruvaca bhagavantavagre vadatam brahmanayorvadatorvacam srosyamiti || 1.8.2 || sa ha silakah salavatyascaikitayanam dalbhyamuvaca hanta tva prcchaniti prccheti hovaca || 1.8.3 || ka samno gatiriti svara iti hovaca svarasya ka gatiriti prana iti hovaca pranasya ka gatirityannamiti hovacannasya ka gatirityapa iti hovaca || 1.8.4 || apam ka gatirityasau loka iti hovacamusya lokasya ka gatiriti na svargam lokamiti nayediti hovaca svargam vayam lokam samabhisamsthapayamah svargasamstavamhi sameti || 1.8.5 || tam ha silakah salavatyascaikitayanam dalbhyamuvacapratisthitam vai kila te dalbhya sama yastvetarhi bruyanmurdha te vipatisyatiti murdha te vipatediti || 1.8.6 || hantahametadbhagavato vedaniti viddhiti hovacamusya lokasya ka gatirityayam loka iti hovacasya lokasya ka gatiriti na pratistham lokamiti nayediti hovaca pratistham vayam lokam samabhisamsthapayamah pratisthasamstavam hi sameti || 1.8.7 || tam ha pravahano jaivaliruvacantavadvai kila te salavatya sama yastvetarhi bruyanmurdha te vipatisyatiti murdha te vipatediti hantahametadbhagavato vedaniti viddhiti hovaca || 1.8.8 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.9 asya lokasya ka gatirityakasa iti hovaca sarvani ha va imani bhutanyakasadeva samutpadyanta akasam pratyastam yantyakaso hyevaibhyo jyayanakasah parayanam || 1.9.1 || sa esa parovariyanudgithah sa eso'nantah parovariyo hasya bhavati parovariyaso ha lokanjayati ya etadevam vidvanparovariyamsamudgithamupaste || 1.9.2 || tam haitamatidhanva saunaka udarasandilyayoktvovaca yavatta enam prajayamudgitham vedisyante parovariyo haibhyastavadasmimlloke jivanam bhavisyati || 1.9.3 || tathamusmimlloke loka iti sa ya etamevam vidvanupaste parovariya eva hasyasmimlloke jivanam bhavati tathamusmimlloke loka iti loke loka iti || 1.9.4 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.10 matacihatesu kurusvatikya saha jayayosastirha cakrayana ibhyagrame pradranaka uvasa || 1.10.1 || sa hebhyam kulmasankhadantam bibhikse tam hovaca | neto'nye vidyante yacca ye ma ima upanihita iti || 1.10.2 || etesam me dehiti hovaca tanasmai pradadau hantanupanamityucchistam vai me pitamsyaditi hovaca || 1.10.3 || na svidete'pyucchista iti na va ajivisyamimanakhadanniti hovaca kamo ma udapanamiti || 1.10.4 || sa ha khaditvatisesanjayaya ajahara sagra eva subhiksa babhuva tanpratigrhya nidadhau || 1.10.5 || sa ha pratah samjihana uvaca yadbatannasya labhemahi labhemahi dhanamatramrajasau yaksyate sa ma sarvairartvijyairvrniteti || 1.10.6 || tam jayovaca hanta pata ima eva kulmasa iti tankhaditvamum yajnam vitatameyaya || 1.10.7 || tatrodgatrnastave stosyamananupopavivesa sa ha prastotaramuvaca || 1.10.8 || prastotarya devata prastavamanvayatta tam cedavidvanprastosyasi murdha te vipatisyatiti || 1.10.9 || evamevodgataramuvacodgatarya devatodgithamanvayatta tam cedavidvanudgasyasi murdha te vipatisyatiti || 1.10.10 || evameva pratihartaramuvaca pratihartarya devata pratiharamanvayatta tam cedavidvanpratiharisyasi murdha te vipatisyatiti te ha samaratastusnimasamcakrire || 1.10.11 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.11 atha hainam yajamana uvaca bhagavantam va aham vividisanityusastirasmi cakrayana iti hovaca || 1.11.1 || sa hovaca bhagavantam va ahamebhih sarvairartvijyaih paryaisisam bhagavato va ahamavittyanyanavrsi || 1.11.2 || bhagavamstveva me sarvairartvijyairiti tathetyatha tarhyeta eva samatisrstah stuvatam yavattvebhyo dhanam dadyastavanmama dadya iti tatheti ha yajamana uvaca || 1.11.3 || atha hainam prastotopasasada prastotarya devata prastavamanvayatta tam cedavidvanprastosyasi murdha te vipatisyatiti ma bhagavanavocatkatama sa devateti || 1.11.4 || prana iti hovaca sarvani ha va imani bhutani pranamevabhisamvisanti pranamabhyujjihate saisa devata prastavamanvayatta tam cedavidvanprastosyo murdha te vyapatisyattathoktasya mayeti || 1.11.5 || atha hainamudgatopasasadodgatarya devatodgithamanvayatta tam cedavidvanudgasyasi murdha te vipatisyatiti ma bhagavanavocatkatama sa devateti || 1.11.6 || aditya iti hovaca sarvani ha va imani bhutanyadityamuccaih santam gayanti saisa devatodgithamanvayatta tam cedavidvanudagasyo murdha te vyapatisyattathoktasya mayeti || 1.11.7 || atha hainam pratihartopasasada pratihartarya devata pratiharamanvayatta tam cedavidvanpratiharisyasi murdha te vipatisyatiti ma bhagavanavocatkatama sa devateti || 1.11.8 || annamiti hovaca sarvani ha va imani bhutanyannameva pratiharamanani jivanti saisa devata pratiharamanvayatta tam cedavidvanpratyaharisyo murdha te vyapatisyattathoktasya mayeti tathoktasya mayeti || 1.11.9 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.12 athatah sauva udgithastaddha bako dalbhyo glavo va maitreyah svadhyayamudvavraja || 1.12.1 || tasmai sva svetah pradurbabhuva tamanye svana upasametyocurannam no bhagavanagayatvasanayamava iti || 1.12.2 || tanhovacehaiva ma pratarupasamiyateti taddha bako dalbhyo glavo va maitreyah pratipalayamcakara || 1.12.3 || te ha yathaivedam bahispavamanena stosyamanah samrabdhah sarpantityevamasasrpuste ha samupavisya him cakruh || 1.12.4 || o3mada3mom3piba3mom3 devo varunah prajapatih savita2nnamiha2haradannapate3'nnamiha 2hara2haro3miti || 1.12.5 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 1 Section 1.13 ayam vava loko haukarah vayurhaikarascandrama athakarah | atmehakaro'gnirikarah || 1.13.1 || aditya ukaro nihava ekaro visve deva auhoyikarah prajapatirhimkarah pranah svaro'nnam ya vagvirat || 1.13.2 || aniruktastrayodasah stobhah samcaro humkarah || 1.13.3 || ??????????? ???????? ?? ???? ????????????????? ???? ? ????????????????????? ?????????? ?????? ? ?.??.? ? ? ??? ???????? ????? ? ? ??? ????????????? ? dugdhe'smai vagdoham yo vaco doho'nnavanannado bhavati ya etamevamsamnamupanisadam vedopanisadam vedeti || 1.13.4 || || iti trayodasah khandah || || iti prathamo'dhyayah || Chapter 2 Section 2.1 || dvitiyo'dhyayah || samastasya khalu samna upasanam sadhu yatkhalu sadhu tatsametyacaksate yadasadhu tadasameti || 2.1.1 || tadutapyahuh samnainamupagaditi sadhunainamupagadityeva tadahurasamnainamupagadityasadhunainamupagadityeva tadahuh || 2.1.2 || athotapyahuh sama no bateti yatsadhu bhavati sadhu batetyeva tadahurasama no bateti yadasadhu bhavatyasadhu batetyeva tadahuh || 2.1.3 || sa ya etadevam vidvanasadhu sametyupaste'bhyaso ha yadenam sadhavo dharma a ca gaccheyurupa ca nameyuh || 2.1.4 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.2 lokesu pancavidham samopasita prthivi himkarah | agnih prastavo'ntariksamudgitha adityah pratiharo dyaurnidhanamityurdhvesu || 2.2.1 || athavrttesu dyaurhimkara adityah prastavo'ntariksamudgitho'gnih pratiharah prthivi nidhanam || 2.2.2 || kalpante hasmai loka urdhvascavrttasca ya etadevam vidvamllokesu pancavidham samopaste || 2.2.3 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.3 vrstau pancavidham samopasita purovato himkaro megho jayate sa prastavo varsati sa udgitho vidyotate stanayati sa pratihara udgrhnati tannidhanam || 2.3.1 || varsati hasmai varsayati ha ya etadevam vidvanvrstau pancavidhamsamopaste || 2.3.2 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.4 sarvasvapsu pancavidhamsamopasita megho yatsamplavate sa himkaro yadvarsati sa prastavo yah pracyah syandante sa udgitho yah praticyah sa pratiharah samudro nidhanam || 2.4.1 || na hapsu praityapsumanbhavati ya etadevam vidvansarvasvapsu pancavidhamsamopaste || 2.4.2 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.5 rtusu pancavidham samopasita vasanto himkarah grismah prastavo varsa udgithah saratpratiharo hemanto nidhanam || 2.5.1 || kalpante hasma rtava rtumanbhavati ya etadevam vidvanrtusu pancavidham samopaste || 2.5.2 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.6 pasusu pancavidham samopasitaja himkaro'vayah prastavo gava udgitho'svah pratiharah puruso nidhanam || 2.6.1 || bhavanti hasya pasavah pasumanbhavati ya etadevam vidvanpasusu pancavidham samopaste || 2.6.2 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.7 pranesu pancavidham parovariyah samopasita prano himkaro vakprastavascaksurudgithah srotram pratiharo mano nidhanam parovariyamsi va etani || 2.7.1 || parovariyo hasya bhavati parovariyaso ha lokanjayati ya etadevam vidvanpranesu pancavidham parovariyah samopasta iti tu pancavidhasya || 2.7.2 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.8 atha saptavidhasya vaci saptavidhm samopasita yatkimca vaco humiti sa himkaro yatpreti sa prastavo yadeti sa adih || 2.8.1 || yaduditi sa udgitho yatpratiti sa pratiharo yadupeti sa upadravo yanniti tannidhanam || 2.8.2 || dugdhe'smai vagdoham yo vaco doho'nnavanannado bhavati ya etadevam vidvanvaci saptavidham samopaste || 2.8.3 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.9 atha khalvamumadityamsaptavidham samopasita sarvada samastena sama mam prati mam pratiti sarvena samastena sama || 2.9.1 || tasminnimani sarvani bhutanyanvayattaniti vidyattasya yatpurodayatsa himkarastadasya pasavo'nvayattastasmatte him kurvanti himkarabhajino hyetasya samnah || 2.9.2 || atha yatprathamodite sa prastavastadasya manusya anvayattastasmatte prastutikamah prasamsakamah prastavabhajino hyetasya samnah || 2.9.3 || atha yatsamgavavelayam sa adistadasya vayamsyanvayattani tasmattanyantarikse'narambananyadayatmanam paripatantyadibhajini hyetasya samnah || 2.9.4 || atha yatsampratimadhyamdine sa udgithastadasya deva anvayattastasmatte sattamah prajapatyanamudgithabhajino hyetasya samnah || 2.9.5 || atha yadurdhvam madhyamdinatpragaparahnatsa pratiharastadasya garbha anvayattastasmatte pratihrtanavapadyante pratiharabhajino hyetasya samnah || 2.9.6 || atha yadurdhvamaparahnatpragastamayatsa upadravastadasyaranya anvayattastasmatte purusam drstva kaksamsvabhramityupadravantyupadravabhajino hyetasya samnah || 2.9.7 || atha yatprathamastamite tannidhanam tadasya pitaro'nvayattastasmattannidadhati nidhanabhajino hyetasya samna evam khalvamumadityam saptavidham samopaste || 2.9.8 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.10 atha khalvatmasammitamatimrtyu saptavidham samopasita himkara iti tryaksaram prastava iti tryaksaram tatsamam || 2.10.1 || adiriti dvyaksaram pratihara iti caturaksaram tata ihaikam tatsamam || 2.10.2 || udgitha iti tryaksaramupadrava iti caturaksaram tribhistribhih samam bhavatyaksaramatisisyate tryaksaram tatsamam || 2.10.3 || nidhanamiti tryaksaram tatsamameva bhavati tani ha va etani dvavimsatiraksarani || 2.10.4 || ekavimsatyadityamapnotyekavimso va ito'savadityo dvavimsena paramadityajjayati tannakam tadvisokam || 2.10.5 || apnoti hadityasya jayam paro hasyadityajayajjayo bhavati ya etadevam vidvanatmasammitamatimrtyu saptavidham samopaste samopaste || 2.10.6 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.11 mano himkaro vakprastavascaksurudgithah srotram pratiharah prano nidhanametadgayatram pranesu protam || 2.11.1 || sa evametadgayatram pranesu protam veda prani bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya mahamanah syattadvratam || 2.11.2 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.12 abhimanthati sa himkaro dhumo jayate sa prastavo jvalati sa udgitho'ngara bhavanti sa pratihara upasamyati tannidhanam samsamyati tannidhanametadrathamtaramagnau protam || 2.12.1 || sa ya evametadrathamtaramagnau protam veda brahmavarcasyannado bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya na pratyannagnimacamenna nisthivettadvratam || 2.12.2 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.13 upamantrayate sa himkaro jnapayate sa prastavah striya saha sete sa udgithah prati strim saha sete sa pratiharah kalam gacchati tannidhanam param gacchati tannidhanametadvamadevyam mithune protam || 2.13.1 || sa ya evametadvamadevyam mithune protam veda mithuni bhavati mithunanmithunatprajayate sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya na kamcana pariharettadvratam || 2.13.2 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.14 udyanhimkara uditah prastavo madhyamdina udgitho'parahnah pratiharo'stam yannidhanametadbrhadaditye protam || 2.14.1 || sa ya evametadbrhadaditye protam veda tejasvyannado bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya tapantam na nindettadvratam || 2.14.2 || || iti caturdasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.15 abhrani samplavante sa himkaro megho jayate sa prastavo varsati sa udgitho vidyotate stanayati sa pratihara udgrhnati tannidhanametadvairupam parjanye protam || 2.15.1 || sa ya evametadvairupam parjanye protam veda virupamsca surupamsca pasunavarundhe sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya varsantam na nindettadvratam || 2.15.2 || || iti pancadasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.16 vasanto himkaro grismah prastavo varsa udgithah saratpratiharo hemanto nidhanametadvairajamrtusu protam || 2.16.1 || sa ya evametadvairajamrtusu protam veda virajati prajaya pasubhirbrahmavarcasena sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtyartunna nindettadvratam || 2.16.2 || || iti sodasah khandah || prthivi himkaro'ntariksam prastavo dyaurudgitho disah pratiharah samudro nidhanametah sakvaryo lokesu protah || 2.17.1 || sa ya evametah sakvaryo lokesu prota veda loki bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya lokanna nindettadvratam || 2.17.2 || || iti saptadasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.18 aja himkaro'vayah prastavo gava udgitho'svah pratiharah puruso nidhanameta revatyah pasusu protah || 2.18.1 || sa ya evameta revatyah pasusu prota veda pasumanbhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya pasunna nindettadvratam || 2.18.2 || || iti astadasah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.19 loma himkarastvakprastavo mamsamudgithosthi pratiharo majja nidhanametadyajnayajniyamangesu protam || 2.19.1 || sa ya evametadyajnayajniyamangesu protam vedangi bhavati nangena vihurchati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya samvatsaram majjno nasniyattadvratam majjno nasniyaditi va || 2.19.2 || || iti ekonavimsah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.20 agnirhimkaro vayuh prastava aditya udgitho naksatrani pratiharascandrama nidhanametadrajanam devatasu protam || 2.20.1 || sa ya evametadrajanam devatasu protam vedaitasameva devatanamsalokatamsarstitamsayujyam gacchati sarvamayureti jyogjivati mahanprajaya pasubhirbhavati mahankirtya brahmananna nindettadvratam || 2.20.2 || || iti vimsah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.21 trayi vidya himkarastraya ime lokah sa prastavo'gnirvayuradityah sa udgitho naksatrani vayamsi maricayah sa pratiharah sarpa gandharvah pitarastannidhanametatsama sarvasminprotam || 2.21.1 || sa ya evametatsama sarvasminprotam veda sarvam ha bhavati || 2.21.2 || tadesa sloko yani pancadha trini trini tebhyo na jyayah paramanyadasti || 2.21.3 || yastadveda sa veda sarvam sarva diso balimasmai haranti sarvamasmityupasita tadvratam tadvratam || 2.21.4 || || iti ekavimsah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.22 vinardi samno vrne pasavyamityagnerudgitho'niruktah prajapaterniruktah somasya mrdu slaksnam vayoh slaksnam balavadindrasya krauncam brhaspaterapadhvantam varunasya tansarvanevopaseveta varunam tveva varjayet || 2.22.1 || amrtatvam devebhya agayanityagayetsvadham pitrbhya asam manusyebhyastrnodakam pasubhyah svargam lokam yajamanayannamatmana agayanityetani manasa dhyayannapramattah stuvita || 2.22.2 || sarve svara indrasyatmanah sarva usmanah prajapateratmanah sarve sparsa mrtyoratmanastam yadi svaresupalabhetendramsaranam prapanno'bhuvam sa tva prati vaksyatityenam bruyat || 2.22.3 || atha yadyenamusmasupalabheta prajapatimsaranam prapanno'bhuvam sa tva prati peksyatityenam bruyadatha yadyenam sparsesupalabheta mrtyum saranam prapanno'bhuvam sa tva prati dhaksyatityenam bruyat || 2.22.4 || sarve svara ghosavanto balavanto vaktavya indre balam dadaniti sarva usmano'grasta anirasta vivrta vaktavyah prajapateratmanam paridadaniti sarve sparsa lesenanabhinihita vaktavya mrtyoratmanam pariharaniti || 2.22.5 || || iti dvavimsah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.23 trayo dharmaskandha yajno'dhyayanam danamiti prathamastapa eva dvitiyo brahmacaryacaryakulavasi trtiyo'tyantamatmanamacaryakule'vasadayansarva ete punyaloka bhavanti brahmasamstho'mrtatvameti || 2.23.1 || prajapatirlokanabhyatapattebhyo'bhitaptebhyastrayi vidya samprasravattamabhyatapattasya abhitaptaya etanyaksarani samprasrvanta bhurbhuvah svariti || 2.23.2 || tanyabhyatapattebhyo'bhitaptebhya ?karah samprasravattadyatha sankuna sarvani parnani samtrnnanyevamomkarena sarva vaksamtrnnomkara evedam sarvamomkara evedam sarvam || 2.23.3 || || iti trayovimsah khandah || Chapter 2 Section 2.24 brahmavadino vadanti yadvasunam pratah savanam rudranam madhyamdinam savanamadityanam ca visvesam ca devanam trtiyasavanam || 2.24.1 || kva tarhi yajamanasya loka iti sa yastam na vidyatkatham kuryadatha vidvankuryat || 2.24.2 || pura prataranuvakasyopakaranajjaghanena garhapatyasyodanmukha upavisya sa vasavam samabhigayati || 2.24.3 || lo3kadvaramapava3rnu 33 pasyema tva vayam ra 33333 hu 3 m a 33 jya 3 yo 3 a 32111 iti || 2.24.4 || atha juhoti namo'gnaye prthiviksite lokaksite lokam me yajamanaya vindaisa vai yajamanasya loka etasmi || 2.24.5 || atra yajamanah parastadayusah svahapajahi parighamityuktvottisthati tasmai vasavah pratahsavanam samprayacchanti || 2.24.6 || pura madhyamdinasya savanasyopakaranajjaghanenagnidhriyasyodanmukha upavisya sa raudramsamabhigayati || 2.24.7 || lo3kadvaramapava3rnu33 pasyema tva vayam vaira33333 hu3m a33jya 3yo3a32111iti || 2.24.8 || atha juhoti namo vayave'ntariksaksite lokaksite lokam me yajamanaya vindaisa vai yajamanasya loka etasmi || 2.24.9 || atra yajamanah parastadayusah svahapajahi parighamityuktvottisthati tasmai rudra madhyamdinamsavanamsamprayacchanti || 2.24.10 || pura trtiyasavanasyopakaranajjaghanenahavaniyasyodanmukha upavisya sa adityamsa vaisvadevam samabhigayati || 2.24.11 || lo3kadvaramapava3rnu33pasyema tva vayam svara 33333 hu3m a33 jya3 yo3a 32111 iti || 2.24.12 || adityamatha vaisvadevam lo3kadvaramapava3rnu33 pasyema tva vayamsamra33333 hu3m a33 jya3yo3a 32111 iti || 2.24.13 || atha juhoti nama adityebhyasca visvebhyasca devebhyo diviksidbhyo lokaksidbhyo lokam me yajamanaya vindata || 2.24.14 || esa vai yajamanasya loka etasmyatra yajamanah parastadayusah svahapahata parighamityuktvottisthati || 2.24.15 || tasma adityasca visve ca devastrtiyasavanam samprayacchantyesa ha vai yajnasya matram veda ya evam veda ya evam veda || 2.24.16 || || iti caturvimsah khandah || || iti dvitiyo'dhyayah || Chapter 3 Section 3.1 || trtiyo'dhyayah || asau va adityo devamadhu tasya dyaureva tirascinavamso'ntariksamapupo maricayah putrah || 3.1.1 || tasya ye pranco rasmayasta evasya pracyo madhunadyah | rca eva madhukrta rgveda eva puspam ta amrta apasta va eta rcah || 3.1.2 || etamrgvedamabhyatapamstasyabhitaptasya yasasteja indriyam viryamannadyamraso'jayata || 3.1.3 || tadvyaksarattadadityamabhito'srayattadva etadyadetadadityasya rohitamrupam || 3.1.4 || || iti prathamah khandah || Section 3.2 atha ye'sya daksina rasmayasta evasya daksina madhunadyo yajumsyeva madhukrto yajurveda eva puspam ta amrta apah || 3.2.1 || tani va etani yajumsyetam yajurvedamabhyatapamstasyabhitaptasya yasasteja indriyam viryamannadyamrasojayata || 3.2.2 || tadvyaksarattadadityamabhito'srayattadva etadyadetadadityasya suklam rupam || 3.2.3 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.3 atha ye'sya pratyanco rasmayasta evasya praticyo madhunadyah samanyeva madhukrtah samaveda eva puspam ta amrta apah || 3.3.1 || tani va etani samanyetam samavedamabhyatapamstasyabhitaptasya yasasteja indriyam viryamannadyamraso'jayata || 3.3.2 || tadvyaksarattadadityamabhito'srayattadva etadyadetadadityasya krsnamrupam || 3.3.3 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.4 atha ye'syodanco rasmayasta evasyodicyo madhunadyo'tharvangirasa eva madhukrta itihasapuranam puspam ta amrta apah || 3.4.1 || te va ete'tharvangirasa etaditihasapuranamabhyatapam stasyabhitaptasya yasasteja indriyam viryamannadyamraso'jayata || 3.4.2 || tadvyaksarattadadityamabhito'srayattadva etadyadetadadityasya param krsnamrupam || 3.4.3 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.5 atha ye'syordhva rasmayasta evasyordhva madhunadyo guhya evadesa madhukrto brahmaiva puspam ta amrta apah || 3.5.1 || te va ete guhya adesa etadbrahmabhyatapam stasyabhitaptasya yasasteja indriyam viryamannadyamraso'jayata || 3.5.2 || tadvyaksarattadadityamabhito'srayattadva etadyadetadadityasya madhye ksobhata iva || 3.5.3 || te va ete rasanamrasa veda hi rasastesamete rasastani va etanyamrtanamamrtani veda hyamrtastesametanyamrtani || 3.5.4 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.6 tadyatprathamamamrtam tadvasava upajivantyagnina mukhena na vai deva asnanti na pibantyetadevamrtam drstva trpyanti || 3.6.1 || ta etadeva rupamabhisamvisantyetasmadrupadudyanti || 3.6.2 || sa ya etadevamamrtam veda vasunamevaiko bhutvagninaiva mukhenaitadevamrtam drstva trpyati sa ya etadeva rupamabhisamvisatyetasmadrupadudeti || 3.6.3 || sa yavadadityah purastadudeta pascadastameta vasunameva tavadadhipatyamsvarajyam paryeta || 3.6.4 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.7 atha yaddvitiyamamrtam tadrudra upajivantindrena mukhena na vai deva asnanti na pibantyetadevamrtam drstva trpyanti || 3.7.1 || ta etadeva rupamabhisamvisantyetasmadrupadudyanti || 3.7.2 || sa ya etadevamamrtam veda rudranamevaiko bhutvendrenaiva mukhenaitadevamrtam drstva trpyati sa etadeva rupamabhisamvisatyetasmadrupadudeti || 3.7.3 || sa yavadadityah purastadudeta pascadastameta dvistavaddaksinata udetottarato'stameta rudranameva tavadadhipatyamsvarajyam paryeta || 3.7.4 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.8 atha yattrtiyamamrtam tadaditya upajivanti varunena mukhena na vai deva asnanti na pibantyetadevamrtam drstva trpyanti || 3.8.1 || ta etadeva rupamabhisamvisantyetasmadrupadudyanti || 3.8.2 || sa ya etadevamamrtam vedadityanamevaiko bhutva varunenaiva mukhenaitadevamrtam drstva trpyati sa etadeva rupamabhisamvisatyetasmadrupadudeti || 3.8.3 || sa yavadadityo daksinata udetottarato'stameta dvistavatpascadudeta purastadastametadityanameva tavadadhipatyamsvarajyam paryeta || 3.8.4 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.9 atha yaccaturthamamrtam tanmaruta upajivanti somena mukhena na vai deva asnanti na pibantyetadevamrtam drstva trpyanti || 3.9.1 || ta etadeva rupamabhisamvisantyetasmadrupadudyanti || 3.9.2 || sa ya etadevamamrtam veda marutamevaiko bhutva somenaiva mukhenaitadevamrtam drstva trpyati sa etadeva rupamabhisamvisatyetasmadrupadudeti || 3.9.3 || sa yavadadityah pascadudeta purastadastameta dvistavaduttarata udeta daksinato'stameta marutameva tavadadhipatymsvarajyam paryeta || 3.9.4 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.10 atha yatpancamamamrtam tatsadhya upajivanti brahmana mukhena na vai deva asnanti na pibantyetadevamrtam drstva trpyanti || 3.10.1 || ta etadeva rupamabhisamvisantyetasmadrupadudyanti || 3.10.2 || sa ya etadevamamrtam veda sadhyanamevaiko bhutva brahmanaiva mukhenaitadevamrtam drstva trpyati sa etadeva rupamabhisamvisatyetasmadrupadudeti || 3.10.3 || sa yavadaditya uttarata udeta daksinato'stameta dvistavadurdhvam udetarvagastameta sadhyanameva tavadadhipatyamsvarajyam paryeta || 3.10.4 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.11 atha tata urdhva udetya naivodeta nastametaikala eva madhye sthata tadesa slokah || 3.11.1 || na vai tatra na nimloca nodiyaya kadacana | devastenahamsatyena ma viradhisi brahmaneti || 3.11.2 || na ha va asma udeti na nimlocati sakrddiva haivasmai bhavati ya etamevam brahmopanisadam veda || 3.11.3 || taddhaitadbrahma prajapataya uvaca prajapatirmanave manuh prajabhyastaddhaitaduddalakayarunaye jyesthaya putraya pita brahma provaca || 3.11.4 || idam vava tajjyesthaya putraya pita brahma prabruyatpranayyaya vantevasine || 3.11.5 || nanyasmai kasmaicana yadyapyasma imamadbhih parigrhitam dhanasya purnam dadyadetadeva tato bhuya ityetadeva tato bhuya iti || 3.11.6 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.12 gayatri va idam sarvam bhutam yadidam kim ca vagvai gayatri vagva idam sarvam bhutam gayati ca trayate ca || 3.12.1 || ya vai sa gayatriyam vava sa yeyam prthivyasyam hidam sarvam bhutam pratisthitametameva natisiyate || 3.12.2 || ya vai sa prthiviyam vava sa yadidamasminpuruse sariramasminhime pranah pratisthita etadeva natisiyante || 3.12.3 || yadvai tatpuruse sariramidam vava tadyadidamasminnantah puruse hrdayamasminhime pranah pratisthita etadeva natisiyante || 3.12.4 || saisa catuspada sadvidha gayatri tadetadrcabhyanuktam || 3.12.5 || tavanasya mahima tato jyayamsca purusah | pado'sya sarva bhutani tripadasyamrtam diviti || 3.12.6 || yadvai tadbrahmetidam vava tadyoyam bahirdha purusadakaso yo vai sa bahirdha purusadakasah || 3.12.7 || ayam vava sa yo'yamantah purusa akaso yo vai so'ntah purusa akasah || 3.12.8 || ayam vava sa yo'yamantarhrdaya akasastadetatpurnamapravarti purnamapravartinimsriyam labhate ya evam veda || 3.12.9 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.13 tasya ha va etasya hrdayasya panca devasusayah sa yo'sya pransusih sa pranastaccaksuh sa adityastadetattejo'nnadyamityupasita tejasvyannado bhavati ya evam veda || 3.13.1 || atha yo'sya daksinah susih sa vyanastacchrotram sa candramastadetacchrisca yasascetyupasita srimanyasasvi bhavati ya evam veda || 3.13.2 || atha yo'sya pratyansusih so'panah sa vakso'gnistadetadbrahmavarcasamannadyamityupasita brahmavarcasyannado bhavati ya evam veda || 3.13.3 || atha yo'syodansusih sa samanastanmanah sa parjanyastadetatkirtisca vyustiscetyupasita kirtimanvyustimanbhavati ya evam veda || 3.13.4 || atha yo'syordhvah susih sa udanah sa vayuh sa akasastadetadojasca mahascetyupasitaujasvi mahasvanbhavati ya evam veda || 3.13.5 || te va ete panca brahmapurusah svargasya lokasya dvarapah sa ya etanevam panca brahmapurusansvargasya lokasya dvarapanvedasya kule viro jayate pratipadyate svargam lokam ya etanevam panca brahmapurusansvargasya lokasya dvarapanveda || 3.13.6 || atha yadatah paro divo jyotirdipyate visvatah prsthesu sarvatah prsthesvanuttamesuttamesu lokesvidam vava tadyadidamasminnantah puruse jyotih || 3.13.7 || tasyaisa drstiryatritadasmincharire samsparsenosnimanam vijanati tasyaisa srutiryatraitatkarnavapigrhya ninadamiva nadathurivagneriva jvalata upasrnoti tadetaddrstam ca srutam cetyupasita caksusyah sruto bhavati ya evam veda ya evam veda || 3.13.8 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.14 sarvam khalvidam brahma tajjalaniti santa upasita | atha khalu kratumayah puruso yathakraturasmimlloke puruso bhavati tathetah pretya bhavati sa kratum kurvita || 3.14.1 || manomayah pranasariro bharupah satyasamkalpa akasatma sarvakarma sarvakamah sarvagandhah sarvarasah sarvamidamabhyatto'vakyanadarah || 3.14.2 || esa ma atmantarhrdaye'niyanvriherva yavadva sarsapadva syamakadva syamakatanduladvaisa ma atmantarhrdaye jyayanprthivya jyayanantariksajjyayandivo jyayanebhyo lokebhyah || 3.14.3 || sarvakarma sarvakamah sarvagandhah sarvarasah sarvamidamabhyatto'vakyanadara esa ma atmantarhrdaya etadbrahmaitamitah pretyabhisambhavitasmiti yasya syadaddha na vicikitsastiti ha smaha sandilyah sandilyah || 3.14.4 || || iti caturdasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.15 antariksodarah koso bhumibudhno na jiryati diso hyasya sraktayo dyaurasyottaram bilam sa esa koso vasudhanastasminvisvamidam sritam || 3.15.1 || tasya praci digjuhurnama sahamana nama daksina rajni nama pratici subhuta namodici tasam vayurvatsah sa ya etamevam vayum disam vatsam veda na putrarodam roditi so'hametamevam vayum disam vatsam veda ma putrarodamrudam || 3.15.2 || aristam kosam prapadye'munamunamuna pranam prapadye'munamunamuna bhuh prapadye'munamunamuna bhuvah prapadye'munamunamuna svah prapadye'munamunamuna || 3.15.3 || sa yadavocam pranam prapadya iti prano va idam sarvam bhutam yadidam kimca tameva tatprapatsi || 3.15.4 || atha yadavocam bhuh prapadya iti prthivim prapadye'ntariksam prapadye divam prapadya ityeva tadavocam || 3.15.5 || atha yadavocam bhuvah prapadya ityagnim prapadye vayum prapadya adityam prapadya ityeva tadavocam || 3.15.6 || atha yadavocamsvah prapadya ityrgvedam prapadye yajurvedam prapadye samavedam prapadya ityeva tadavocam tadavocam || 3.15.7 || || iti pancadasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.16 puruso vava yajnastasya yani caturvimsati varsani tatpratahsavanam caturvimsatyaksara gayatri gayatram pratahsavanam tadasya vasavo'nvayattah prana vava vasava ete hidamsarvam vasayanti || 3.16.1 || tam cedetasminvayasi kimcidupatapetsa bruyatprana vasava idam me pratahsavanam madhyamdinamsavanamanusamtanuteti maham prananam vasunam madhye yajno vilopsiyetyuddhaiva tata etyagado ha bhavati || 3.16.2 || atha yani catuscatvarimsadvarsani tanmadhyamdinam savanam catuscatvarimsadaksara tristuptraistubham madhyamdinamsavanam tadasya rudra anvayattah prana vava rudra ete hidamsarvamrodayanti || 3.16.3 || tam cedetasminvayasi kimcidupatapetsa bruyatprana rudra idam me madhyamdinamsavanam trtiyasavanamanusamtanuteti maham prananamrudranam madhye yajno vilopsiyetyuddhaiva tata etyagado ha bhavati || 3.16.4 || atha yanyastacatvarimsadvarsani tattrtiyasavanamastacatvarimsadaksara jagati jagatam trtiyasavanam tadasyaditya anvayattah prana vavaditya ete hidamsarvamadadate || 3.16.5 || tam cedetasminvayasi kimcidupatapetsa bruyatprana aditya idam me trtiyasavanamayuranusamtanuteti maham prananamadityanam madhye yajno vilopsiyetyuddhaiva tata etyagado haiva bhavati || 3.16.6 || etaddha sma vai tadvidvanaha mahidasa aitareyah sa kim ma etadupatapasi yo'hamanena na presyamiti sa ha sodasam varsasatamajivatpra ha sodasam varsasatam jivati ya evam veda || 3.16.7 || || iti sodasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.17 sa yadasisisati yatpipasati yanna ramate ta asya diksah || 3.17.1 || atha yadasnati yatpibati yadramate tadupasadaireti || 3.17.2 || atha yaddhasati yajjaksati yanmaithunam carati stutasastraireva tadeti || 3.17.3 || atha yattapo danamarjavamahimsa satyavacanamiti ta asya daksinah || 3.17.4 || tasmadahuh sosyatyasosteti punarutpadanamevasya tanmaranamevavabhrthah || 3.17.5 || taddhaitadghor angirasah krsnaya devakiputrayoktvovacapipasa eva sa babhuva so'ntavelayametattrayam pratipadyetaksitamasyacyutamasi pranasamsitamasiti tatraite dve rcau bhavatah || 3.17.6 || aditpratnasya retasah jyotih pasyanti vasaram; Paro yadidhyate divi || 3.17.7 || udvayam tamasaspari jyotih pasyanta uttaramsvah pasyanta uttaram devam devatra suryamaganma jyotiruttamamiti jyotiruttamamiti || 3.17.8 || || iti saptadasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.18 mano brahmetyupasitetyadhyatmamathadhidaivatamakaso brahmetyubhayamadistam bhavatyadhyatmam cadhidaivatam ca || 3.18.1 || tadetaccatuspadbrahma vakpadah pranah padascaksuh padah srotram pada ityadhyatmamathadhidaivatamagnih pado vayuh pada adityah pado disah pada ityubhayamevadistam bhavatyadhyatmam caivadhidaivatam ca || 3.18.2 || vageva brahmanascaturthah padah so'gnina jyotisa bhati ca tapati ca bhati ca tapati ca kirtya yasasa brahmavarcasena ya evam veda || 3.18.3 || prana eva brahmanascaturthah padah sa vayuna jyotisa bhati ca tapati c bhati ca tapati ca kirtya yasasa brahmavarcasena ya evam veda || 3.18.4 || caksureva brahmanascaturthah padah sa adityena jyotisa bhati ca tapati ca bhati ca tapati ca kirtya yasasa brahmavarcasena ya evam veda || 3.18.5 || srotrameva brahmanascaturthah padah sa digbhirjyotisa bhati ca tapati ca bhati ca tapati ca kirtya yasasa brahmavarcasena ya evam veda ya evam veda || 3.18.6 || || iti astadasah khandah || Chapter 3 Section 3.19 adityo brahmetyadesastasyopavyakhyanamasadevedamagra asit | tatsadasittatsamabhavattadandam niravartata tatsamvatsarasya matramasayata tannirabhidyata te andakapale rajatam ca suvarnam cabhavatam || 3.19.1 || tadyadrajatam seyam prthivi yatsuvarnam sa dyauryajjarayu te parvata yadulbam samegho niharo ya dhamanayasta nadyo yadvasteyamudakam sa samudrah || 3.19.2 || atha yattadajayata so'savadityastam jayamanam ghosa ululavo'nudatisthantsarvani ca bhutani sarve ca kamastasmattasyodayam prati pratyayanam prati ghosa ululavo'nuttisthanti sarvani ca bhutani sarve ca kamah || 3.19.3 || sa ya etamevam vidvanadityam brahmetyupaste'bhyaso ha yadenam sadhavo ghosa a ca gaccheyurupa ca nimrederannimrederan || 3.19.4 || || iti ekonavimsah khandah || || iti trtiyo'dhyayah || Chapter 4 Section 4.1 || caturtho'dhyayah || janasrutirha pautrayanah sraddhadeyo bahudayi bahupakya asa sa ha sarvata avasathanmapayamcakre sarvata eva me'nnamatsyantiti || 4.1.1 || atha hamsa nisayamatipetustaddhaivam ham soham samabhyuvada ho ho'yi bhallaksa bhallaksa janasruteh pautrayanasya samam diva jyotiratatam tanma prasanksi stattva ma pradhaksiriti || 4.1.2 || tamu ha parah pratyuvaca kamvara enametatsantam sayugvanamiva raikvamattheti yo nu katham sayugva raikva iti || 4.1.3 || yatha krtayavijitayadhareyah samyantyevamenam sarvam tadabhisamaiti yatkimca prajah sadhu kurvanti yastadveda yatsa veda sa mayaitadukta iti || 4.1.4 || tadu ha janasrutih pautrayana upasusrava sa ha samjihana eva ksattaramuvacangare ha sayugvanamiva raikvamattheti yo nu katham sayugva raikva iti || 4.1.5 || yatha krtayavijitayadhareyah samyantyevamenam sarvam tadabhisamaiti yatkimca prajah sadhu kurvanti yastadveda yatsa veda sa mayaitadukta iti || 4.1.6 || sa ha ksattanvisya navidamiti pratyeyaya tam hovaca yatrare brahmanasyanvesana tadenamarccheti || 4.1.7 || so'dhastacchakatasya pamanam kasamanamupopavivesa tam habhyuvada tvam nu bhagavah sayugva raikva ityaham hyara3 iti ha pratijajne sa ha ksattavidamiti pratyeyaya || 4.1.8 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.2 tadu ha janasrutih pautrayanah satsatani gavam niskamasvatariratham tadadaya praticakrame tam habhyuvada || 4.2.1 || raikvemani satsatani gavamayam nisko'yamasvatariratho'nu ma etam bhagavo devatam sadhi yam devatamupassa iti || 4.2.2 || tamu ha parah pratyuvacaha haretva sudra tavaiva saha gobhirastviti tadu ha punareva janasrutih pautrayanah sahasram gavam niskamasvatariratham duhitaram tadadaya praticakrame || 4.2.3 || tam habhyuvada raikvedam sahasram gavamayam nisko'yamasvatariratha iyam jayayam gramo yasminnasse'nveva ma bhagavah sadhiti || 4.2.4 || tasya ha mukhamupodgrhnannuvacajaharemah sudranenaiva mukhenalapayisyatha iti te haite raikvaparna nama mahavrsesu yatrasma uvasa sa tasmai hovaca || 4.2.5 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.3 vayurvava samvargo yada va agnirudvayati vayumevapyeti yada suryo'stameti vayumevapyeti yada candro'stameti vayumevapyeti || 4.3.1 || yadapa ucchusyanti vayumevapiyanti vayurhyevaitansarvansamvrnkta ityadhidaivatam || 4.3.2 || athadhyatmam prano vava samvargah sa yada svapiti pranameva vagapyeti pranam caksuh pranam srotram pranam manah prano hyevaitansarvansamvrnkta iti || 4.3.3 || tau va etau dvau samvargau vayureva devesu pranah pranesu || 4.3.4 || atha ha saunakam ca kapeyamabhipratarinam ca kaksasenim parivisyamanau brahmacari bibhikse tasma u ha na dadatuh || 4.3.5 || sa hovaca mahatmanascaturo deva ekah kah sa jagara bhuvanasya gopastam kapeya nabhipasyanti martya abhipratarinbahudha vasantam yasmai va etadannam tasma etanna dattamiti || 4.3.6 || tadu ha saunakah kapeyah pratimanvanah pratyeyayatma devanam janita prajanam hiranyadamstro babhaso'nasurirmahantamasya mahimanamahuranadyamano yadanannamattiti vai vayam brahmacarinnedamupasmahe dattasmai bhiksamiti || 4.3.7 || tasma u ha daduste va ete pancanye pancanye dasa santastatkrtam tasmatsarvasu diksvannameva dasa krtam saisa viradannadi tayedam sarvam drstam sarvamasyedam drstam bhavatyannado bhavati ya evam veda ya evam veda || 4.3.8 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.4 satyakamo ha jabalo jabalam mataramamantrayamcakre brahmacaryam bhavati vivatsyami kimgotro nvahamasmiti || 4.4.1 || sa hainamuvaca nahametadveda tata yadgotrastvamasi bahvaham caranti paricarini yauvane tvamalabhe sahametanna veda yadgotrastvamasi jabala tu namahamasmi satyakamo nama tvamasi sa satyakama eva jabalo bravitha iti || 4.4.2 || sa ha haridrumatam gautamametyovaca brahmacaryam bhagavati vatsyamyupeyam bhagavantamiti || 4.4.3 || tam hovaca kimgotro nu somyasiti sa hovaca nahametadveda bho yadgotro'hamasmyaprccham mataram sa ma pratyabravidbahvaham caranti paricarini yauvane tvamalabhe sahametanna veda yadgotrastvamasi jabala tu namahamasmi satyakamo nama tvamasiti so'ham satyakamo jabalo'smi bho iti || 4.4.4 || tam hovaca naitadabrahmano vivaktumarhati samidham somyaharopa tva nesye na satyadaga iti tamupaniya krsanamabalanam catuhsata ga nirakrtyovacemah somyanusamvrajeti ta abhiprasthapayannuvaca nasahasrenavarteyeti sa ha varsaganam provasa ta yada sahasram sampeduh || 4.4.5 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.5 atha hainamrsabho'bhyuvada satyakama3 iti bhagava iti ha pratisusrava praptah somya sahasram smah prapaya na acaryakulam || 4.5.1 || brahmanasca te padam bravaniti bravitu me bhagavaniti tasmai hovaca praci dikkala pratici dikkala daksina dikkalodici dikkalaisa vai somya catuskalah pado brahmanah prakasavannama || 4.5.2 || sa ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmanah prakasavanityupaste prakasavanasmimlloke bhavati prakasavato ha lokanjayati ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmanah prakasavanityupaste || 4.5.3 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.6 agniste padam vakteti sa ha svobhute ga abhiprasthapayamcakara ta yatrabhi sayam babhuvustatragnimupasamadhaya ga uparudhya samidhamadhaya pascadagneh pranupopavivesa || 4.6.1 || tamagnirabhyuvada satyakama3 iti bhagava iti ha pratisusrava || 4.6.2 || brahmanah somya te padam bravaniti bravitu me bhagavaniti tasmai hovaca prthivi kalantariksam kala dyauh kala samudrah kalaisa vai somya catuskalah pado brahmano'nantavannama || 4.6.3 || sa ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmano'nantavanityupaste'nantavanasmimlloke bhavatyanantavato ha lokanjayati ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmano'nantavanityupaste || 4.6.4 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.7 hamsaste padam vakteti sa ha svobhute ga abhiprasthapayamcakara ta yatrabhi sayam babhuvustatragnimupasamadhaya ga uparudhya samidhamadhaya pascadagneh pranupopavivesa || 4.7.1 || tamhamsa upanipatyabhyuvada satyakama3 iti bhagava iti ha pratisusrava || 4.7.2 || brahmanah somya te padam bravaniti bravitu me bhagavaniti tasmai hovacagnih kala suryah kala candrah kala vidyutkalaisa vai somya catuskalah pado brahmano jyotismannama || 4.7.3 || sa ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmano jyotismanityupaste jyotismanasmimlloke bhavati jyotismato ha lokanjayati ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmano jyotismanityupaste || 4.7.4 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.8 madguste padam vakteti sa ha svobhute ga abhiprasthapayamcakara ta yatrabhi sayam babhuvustatragnimupasamadhaya ga uparudhya samidhamadhaya pascadagneh pranupopavivesa || 4.8.1 || tam madgurupanipatyabhyuvada satyakama3 iti bhagava iti ha pratisusrava || 4.8.2 || brahmanah somya te padam bravaniti bravitu me bhagavaniti tasmai hovaca pranah kala caksuh kala srotram kala manah kalaisa vai somya catuskalah pado brahmana ayatanavannama || 4.8.3 || sa yai etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmana ayatanavanityupasta ayatanavanasmimlloke bhavatyayatanavato ha lokanjayati ya etamevam vidvamscatuskalam padam brahmana ayatanavanityupaste || 4.8.4 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.9 prapa hacaryakulam tamacaryo'bhyuvada satyakama3 iti bhagava iti ha pratisusrava || 4.9.1 || brahmavidiva vai somya bhasi ko nu tvanusasasetyanye manusyebhya iti ha pratijajne bhagavamstveva me kame bruyat || 4.9.2 || srutamhyeva me bhagavaddrsebhya acaryaddhaiva vidya vidita sadhistham prapatiti tasmai haitadevovacatra ha na kimcana viyayeti viyayeti || 4.9.3 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.10 upakosalo ha vai kamalayanah satyakame jabale brahmacaryamuvasa tasya ha dvadasa varsanyagninparicacara sa ha smanyanantevasinah samavartayamstam ha smaiva na samavartayati || 4.10.1 || tam jayovaca tapto brahmacari kusalamagninparicacarinma tvagnayah paripravocanprabruhyasma iti tasmai haprocyaiva pravasamcakre || 4.10.2 || sa ha vyadhinanasitum dadhre tamacaryajayovaca brahmacarinnasana kim nu nasnasiti sa hovaca bahava ime'sminpuruse kama nanatyaya vyadhibhih pratipurno'smi nasisyamiti || 4.10.3 || atha hagnayah samudire tapto brahmacari kusalam nah paryacariddhantasmai prabravameti tasmai hocuh prano brahma kam brahma kham brahmeti || 4.10.4 || sa hovaca vijanamyaham yatprano brahma kam ca tu kham ca na vijanamiti te hocuryadvava kam tadeva kham yadeva kham tadeva kamiti pranam ca hasmai tadakasam cocuh || 4.10.5 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.11 atha hainam garhapatyo'nusasasa prthivyagnirannamaditya iti ya esa aditye puruso drsyate so'hamasmi sa evahamasmiti || 4.11.1 || sa ya etamevam vidvanupaste'pahate papakrtyam loki bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati nasyavarapurusah ksiyanta upa vayam tam bhunjamo'smimsca loke'musmimsca ya etamevam vidvanupaste || 4.11.2 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.12 atha hainamanvaharyapacano'nusasasapo diso naksatrani candrama iti ya esa candramasi puruso drsyate so'hamasmi sa evahamasmiti || 4.12.1 || sa ya etamevam vidvanupaste'pahate papakrtyam loki bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati nasyavarapurusah ksiyanta upa vayam tam bhunjamo'smimsca loke'musmimsca ya etamevam vidvanupaste || 4.12.2 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.13 atha hainamahavaniyo'nusasasa prana akaso dyaurvidyuditi ya esa vidyuti puruso drsyate so'hamasmi sa evahamasmiti || 4.13.1 || sa ya etamevam vidvanupaste'pahate papakrtyam loki bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjivati nasyavarapurusah ksiyanta upa vayam tam bhunjamo'smimsca loke'musmimsca ya etamevam vidvanupaste || 4.13.2 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.14 te hocurupakosalaisa somya te'smadvidyatmavidya cacaryastu te gatim vaktetyajagama hasyacaryastamacaryo'bhyuvadopakosala3 iti || 4.14.1 || bhagava iti ha pratisusrava brahmavida iva somya te mukham bhati ko nu tvanusasaseti ko nu manusisyadbho itihapeva nihnuta ime nunamidrsa anyadrsa itihagninabhyude kim nu somya kila te'vocanniti || 4.14.2 || idamiti ha pratijajne lokanvava kila somya te'vocannaham tu te tadvaksyami yatha puskarapalasa apo na slisyanta evamevamvidi papam karma na slisyata iti bravitu me bhagavaniti tasmai hovaca || 4.14.3 || || iti caturdasah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.15 ya eso'ksini puruso drsyata esa atmeti hovacaitadamrtamabhayametadbrahmeti tadyadyapyasminsarpirvodakam va sincati vartmani eva gacchati || 4.15.1 || etam samyadvama ityacaksata etam hi sarvani vamanyabhisamyanti sarvanyenam vamanyabhisamyanti ya evam veda || 4.15.2 || esa u eva vamaniresa hi sarvani vamani nayati sarvani vamani nayati ya evam veda || 4.15.3 || esa u eva bhamaniresa hi sarvesu lokesu bhati sarvesu lokesu bhati ya evam veda || 4.15.4 || atha yadu caivasminchavyam kurvanti yadi ca narcisamevabhisambhavantyarciso'harahna apuryamanapaksamapuryamanapaksadyansadudanneti masamstanmasebhyah samvatsaram samvatsaradadityamadityaccandramasam candramaso vidyutam tat puruso'manavah sa enanbrahma gamayatyesa devapatho brahmapatha etena pratipadyamana imam manavamavartam navartante navartante || 4.15.5 || || iti pancadasah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.16 esa ha vai yajno yo'yam pavate esa ha yannidam sarvam punati yadesa yannidam sarvam punati tasmadesa eva yajnastasya manasca vakca vartani || 4.16.1 || tayoranyataram manasa samskaroti brahma vaca hotadhvaryurudgatanyataramsa yatraupakrte prataranuvake pura paridhaniyaya brahma vyavadati || 4.16.2 || anyatarameva vartanim samskaroti hiyate'nyatara sa yathaikapadvrajanratho vaikena cakrena vartamano risyatyevamasya yajnorisyati yajnam risyantam yajamano'nurisyati sa istva papiyanbhavati || 4.16.3 || atha yatropakrte prataranuvake na pura paridhaniyaya brahma vyavadatyubhe eva vartani samskurvanti na hiyate'nyatara || 4.16.4 || sa yathobhayapadvrajanratho vobhabhyam cakrabhyam vartamanah pratitisthatyevamasya yajnah pratitisthati yajnam pratitisthantam yajamano'nupratitisthati sa istva sreyanbhavati || 4.16.5 || || iti sodasah khandah || Chapter 4 Section 4.17 prajapatirlokanabhyatapattesam tapyamananam rasanpravrhadagnim prthivya vayumantariksatadityam divah || 4.17.1 || sa etastisro devata abhyatapattasam tapyamananam rasanpravrhadagnerrco vayoryajumsi samanyadityat || 4.17.2 || sa etam trayim vidyamabhyatapattasyastapyamanaya rasanpravrhadbhurityrgbhyo bhuvariti yajurbhyah svariti samabhyah || 4.17.3 || tadyadrkto risyedbhuh svaheti garhapatye juhuyadrcameva tadrasenarcam viryenarcam yajnasya viristam samdadhati || 4.17.4 || sa yadi yajusto risyedbhuvah svaheti daksinagnau juhuyadyajusameva tadrasena yajusam viryena yajusam yajnasya viristam samdadhati || 4.17.5 || atha yadi samato risyetsvah svahetyahavaniye juhuyatsamnameva tadrasena samnam viryena samnam yajnasya viristam samdadhati || 4.17.6 || tadyatha lavanena suvarnam samdadhyatsuvarnena rajatam rajatena trapu trapuna sisam sisena loham lohena daru daru carmana || 4.17.7 || evamesam lokanamasam devatanamasyastrayya vidyaya viryena yajnasya viristam samdadhati bhesajakrto ha va esa yajno yatraivamvidbrahma bhavati || 4.17.8 || esa ha va udakpravano yajno yatraivamvidbrahma bhavatyevamvidam ha va esa brahmanamanugatha yato yata avartate tattadgacchati || 4.17.9 || manavo brahmaivaika rtvikkurunasvabhiraksatyevamviddha vai brahma yajnam yajamanam sarvamscartvijo'bhiraksati tasmadevamvidameva brahmanam kurvita nanevamvidam nanevamvidam || 4.17.10 || || iti caturtho'dhyayah || Chapter 5 Section 5.1 || pancamo'dhyayah || yo ha vai jyestham ca srestham ca veda jyesthasca ha vai sresthasca bhavati prano vava jyesthasca sresthasca || 5.1.1 || yo ha vai vasistham veda vasistho ha svanam bhavati vagvava vasisthah || 5.1.2 || yo ha vai pratistham veda prati ha tisthatyasmimsca loke'musmimsca caksurvava pratistha || 5.1.3 || yo ha vai sampadam veda samhasmai kamah padyante daivasca manusasca srotram vava sampat || 5.1.4 || yo ha va ayatanam vedayatanam ha svanam bhavati mano ha va ayatanam || 5.1.5 || atha ha prana ahamsreyasi vyudire'hamsreyanasmyaham sreyanasmiti || 5.1.6 || te ha pranah prajapatim pitarametyocurbhagavanko nah srestha iti tanhovaca yasminva utkrante sariram papisthataramiva drsyeta sa vah srestha iti || 5.1.7 || sa ha vaguccakrama sa samvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca kathamasakatarte majjivitumiti yatha kala avadantah pranantah pranena pasyantascaksusa srnvantah srotrena dhyayanto manasaivamiti pravivesa ha vak || 5.1.8 || caksurhoccakrama tatsamvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca kathamasakatarte majjivitumiti yathandha apasyantah pranantah pranena vadanto vaca srnvantah srotrena dhyayanto manasaivamiti pravivesa ha caksuh || 5.1.9 || srotram hoccakrama tatsamvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca kathamasakatarte majjivitumiti yatha badhira asrnvantah pranantah pranena vadanto vaca pasyantascaksusa dhyayanto manasaivamiti pravivesa ha srotram || 5.1.10 || mano hoccakrama tatsamvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca kathamasakatarte majjivitumiti yatha bala amanasah pranantah pranena vadanto vaca pasyantascaksusa srnvantah srotrenaivamiti pravivesa ha manah || 5.1.11 || atha ha prana uccikramisansa yatha suhayah padvisasankunsamkhidedevamitaranpranansamakhidattam habhisametyocurbhagavannedhi tvam nah srestho'si motkramiriti || 5.1.12 || atha hainam vaguvaca yadaham vasistho'smi tvam tadvasistho'sityatha hainam caksuruvaca yadaham pratisthasmi tvam tatpratisthasiti || 5.1.13 || atha hainamsrotramuvaca yadaham sampadasmi tvam tatsampadasityatha hainam mana uvaca yadahamayatanamasmi tvam tadayatanamasiti || 5.1.14 || na vai vaco na caksumsi na srotrani na manamsityacaksate prana ityevacaksate prano hyevaitani sarvani bhavati || 5.1.15 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.2 sa hovaca kim me'nnam bhavisyatiti yatkimcididama svabhya a sakunibhya iti hocustadva etadanasyannamano ha vai nama pratyaksam na ha va evamvidi kimcananannam bhavatiti || 5.2.1 || sa hovaca kim me vaso bhavisyatityapa iti hocustasmadva etadasisyantah purastaccoparistaccadbhih paridadhati lambhuko ha vaso bhavatyanagno ha bhavati || 5.2.2 || taddhaitatsatyakamo jabalo gosrutaye vaiyaghrapadyayoktvovaca yadyapyenacchuskaya sthanave bruyajjayerannevasminchakhah praroheyuh palasaniti || 5.2.3 || atha yadi mahajjigamisedamavasyayam diksitva paurnamasyam ratrau sarvausadhasya mantham dadhimadhunorupamathya jyesthaya sresthaya svahetyagnavajyasya hutva manthe sampatamavanayet || 5.2.4 || vasisthaya svahetyagnavajyasya hutva manthe sampatamavanayetpratisthayai svahetyagnavajyasya hutva manthe sampatamavanayetsampade svahetyagnavajyasya hutva manthe sampatamavanayedayatanaya svahetyagnavajyasya hutva manthe sampatamavanayet || 5.2.5 || atha pratisrpyanjalau manthamadhaya japatyamo namasyama hi te sarvamidam sa hi jyesthah srestho rajadhipatih sa ma jyaisthyam sraisthyam rajyamadhipatyam gamayatvahamevedam sarvamasaniti || 5.2.6 || atha khalvetayarca paccha acamati tatsaviturvrnimaha ityacamati vayam devasya bhojanamityacamati srestham sarvadhatamamityacamati turam bhagasya dhimahiti sarvam pibati nirnijya kamsam camasam va pascadagneh samvisati carmani va sthandile va vacamyamo'prasahah sa yadi striyam pasyetsamrddham karmeti vidyat || 5.2.7 || tadesa sloko yada karmasu kamyesu striyam svapnesu pasyanti samrddhim tatra janiyattasminsvapnanidarsane tasminsvapnanidarsane || 5.2.8 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.3 svetaketurharuneyah pancalanam samitimeyaya tam ha pravahano jaivaliruvaca kumaranu tvasisatpitetyanu hi bhagava iti || 5.3.1 || vettha yadito'dhi prajah prayantiti na bhagava iti vettha yatha punaravartanta3 iti na bhagava iti vettha pathordevayanasya pitryanasya ca vyavartana3 iti na bhagava iti || 5.3.2 || vettha yathasau loko na sampuryata3 iti na bhagava iti vettha yatha pancamyamahutavapah purusavacaso bhavantiti naiva bhagava iti || 5.3.3 || athanu kimanusistho'vocatha yo himani na vidyatkatham so'nusisto bruviteti sa hayastah piturardhameyaya tam hovacananusisya vava kila ma bhagavanabravidanu tvasisamiti || 5.3.4 || panca ma rajanyabandhuh prasnanapraksittesam naikamcanasakam vivaktumiti sa hovaca yatha ma tvam tadaitanavado yathahamesam naikamcana veda yadyahamimanavedisyam katham te navaksyamiti || 5.3.5 || sa ha gautamo rajno'rdhameyaya tasmai ha praptayarham cakara sa ha pratah sabhaga udeyaya tam hovaca manusasya bhagavangautama vittasya varam vrnitha iti sa hovaca tavaiva rajanmanusam vittam yameva kumarasyante vacamabhasathastameva me bruhiti sa ha krcchri babhuva || 5.3.6 || tam ha ciram vasetyajnapayamcakara tam hovaca yatha ma tvam gautamavado yatheyam na praktvattah pura vidya brahmanangacchati tasmadu sarvesu lokesu ksatrasyaiva prasasanamabhuditi tasmai hovaca || 5.3.7 || Chapter 5 Section 5.4 iti trtiyah khandah || asau vava loko gautamagnistasyaditya eva samidrasmayo dhumo'hararciscandrama angara naksatrani visphulingah || 5.4.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devah sraddham juhvati tasya ahuteh somo raja sambhavati || 5.4.2 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.5 parjanyo vava gautamagnistasya vayureva samidabhram dhumo vidyudarcirasanirangarahradanayo visphulingah || 5.5.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devah somam rajanam juhvati tasya ahutervarsam sambhavati || 5.5.2 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.6 prthivi vava gautamagnistasyah samvatsara eva samidakaso dhumo ratrirarcirdiso'ngara avantaradiso visphulingah || 5.6.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau deva varsam juhvati tasya ahuterannam sambhavati || 5.6.2 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.7 puruso vava gautamagnistasya vageva samitprano dhumo jihvarciscaksurangarah srotram visphulingah || 5.7.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau deva annam juhvati tasya ahute retah sambhavati || 5.7.2 || || iti sapatamah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.8 yosa vava gautamagnistasya upastha eva samidyadupamantrayate sa dhumo yonirarciryadantah karoti te'ngara abhinanda visphulingah || 5.8.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau deva reto juhvati tasya ahutergarbhah sambhavati || 5.8.2 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.9 iti tu pancamyamahutavapah purusavacaso bhavantiti sa ulbavrto garbho dasa va nava va masanantah sayitva yavadvatha jayate || 5.9.1 || sa jato yavadayusam jivati tam pretam distamito'gnaya eva haranti yata eveto yatah sambhuto bhavati || 5.9.2 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.10 tadya ittham viduh| ye ceme'ranye sraddha tapa ityupasate te'rcisamabhisambhavantyarciso'harahna apuryamanapaksamapuryamanapaksadyansadudanneti masamstan || 5.10.1 || masebhyah samvatsaram samvatsaradadityamadityaccandramasam candramaso vidyutam tatpuruso'manavah sa enanbrahma gamayatyesa devayanah pantha iti || 5.10.2 || atha ya ime grama istapurte dattamityupasate te dhumamabhisambhavanti dhumadratrim ratreraparapaksamaparapaksadyansaddaksinaiti masamstannaite samvatsaramabhiprapnuvanti || 5.10.3 || masebhyah pitrlokam pitrlokadakasamakasaccandramasamesa somo raja taddevanamannam tam deva bhaksayanti || 5.10.4 || tasminyavatsampatamusitvathaitamevadhvanam punarnivartante yathetamakasamakasadvayum vayurbhutva dhumo bhavati dhumo bhutvabhram bhavati || 5.10.5 || abhram bhutva megho bhavati megho bhutva pravarsati ta iha vrihiyava osadhivanaspatayastilamasa iti jayante'to vai khalu durnisprapataram yo yo hyannamatti yo retah sincati tadbhuya eva bhavati || 5.10.6 || tadya iha ramaniyacarana abhyaso ha yatte ramaniyam yonimapadyeranbrahmanayonim va ksatriyayonim va vaisyayonim vatha ya iha kapuyacarana abhyaso ha yatte kapuyam yonimapadyeransvayonim va sukarayonim va candalayonim va || 5.10.7 || athaitayoh pathorna katarenacana tanimani ksudranyasakrdavartini bhutani bhavanti jayasva mriyasvetyetattrtiyamsthanam tenasau loko na sampuryate tasmajjugupseta tadesa slokah || 5.10.8 || steno hiranyasya suram pibamsca gurostalpamavasanbrahmaha caite patanti catvarah pancamascacaramstairiti || 5.10.9 || atha ha ya etanevam pancagninveda na saha tairapyacaranpapmana lipyate suddhah putah punyaloko bhavati ya evam veda ya evam veda || 5.10.10 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.11 pracinasala aupamanyavah satyayajnah paulusirindradyumno bhallaveyo janah sarkaraksyo budila asvatarasviste haite mahasala mahasrotriyah sametya mimamsam cakruh ko na atma kim brahmeti || 5.11.1 || te ha sampadayamcakruruddalako vai bhagavanto'yamarunih sampratimamatmanam vaisvanaramadhyeti tam hantabhyagacchameti tam habhyajagmuh || 5.11.2 || sa ha sampadayamcakara praksyanti mamime mahasala mahasrotriyastebhyo na sarvamiva pratipatsye hantahamanyamabhyanusasaniti || 5.11.3 || tanhovacasvapatirvai bhagavanto'yam kaikeyah sampratimamatmanam vaisvanaramadhyeti tamhantabhyagacchameti tamhabhyajagmuh || 5.11.4 || tebhyo ha praptebhyah prthagarhani karayamcakara sa ha pratah samjihana uvaca na me steno janapade na kardaryo na madyapo nanahitagnirnavidvanna svairi svairini kuto yaksyamano vai bhagavanto'hamasmi yavadekaikasma rtvije dhanam dasyami tavadbhagavadbhyo dasyami vasantu bhagavanta iti || 5.11.5 || te hocuryena haivarthena purusascarettamhaiva vadedatmanamevemam vaisvanaram sampratyadhyesi tameva no bruhiti || 5.11.6 || tanhovaca pratarvah prativaktasmiti te ha samitpanayah purvahne praticakramire tanhanupaniyaivaitaduvaca || 5.11.7 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.12 aupamanyava kam tvamatmanamupassa iti divameva bhagavo rajanniti hovacaisa vai suteja atma vaisvanaro yam tvamatmanamupasse tasmattava sutam prasutamasutam kule drsyate || 5.12.1 || atsyannam pasyasi priyamattyannam pasyati priyam bhavatyasya brahmavarcasam kule ya etamevamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste mudha tvesa atmana iti hovaca murdha te vyapatisyadyanmam nagamisya iti || 5.12.2 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.13 atha hovaca satyayajnam paulusim pracinayogya kam tvamatmanamupassa ityadityameva bhagavo rajanniti hovacaisa vai visvarupa atma vaisvanaro yam tvamatmanamupasse tasmattava bahu visvarupam kule drsyate || 5.13.1 || pravrtto'svatariratho dasinisko'tsyannam pasyasi priyamattyannam pasyati priyam bhavatyasya brahmavarcasam kule ya etamevamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste caksusetadatmana iti hovacandho'bhavisyo yanmam nagamisya iti || 5.13.2 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.14 atha hovacendradyumnam bhallaveyam vaiyaghrapadya kam tvamatmanamupassa iti vayumeva bhagavo rajanniti hovacaisa vai prthagvartmatma vaisvanaro yam tvamatmanamupasse tasmattvam prthagbalaya ayanti prthagrathasrenayo'nuyanti || 5.14.1 || atsyannam pasyasi priyamattyannam pasyati priyam bhavatyasya brahmavarcasam kule ya etamevamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste pranastvesa atmana iti hovaca pranasta udakramisyadyanmam nagamisya iti || 5.14.2 || || iti caturdasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.15 atha hovaca janamsarkaraksya kam tvamatmanamupassa ityakasameva bhagavo rajanniti hovacaisa vai bahula atma vaisvanaro yam tvamatmanamupasse tasmattvam bahulo'si prajaya ca dhanena ca || 5.15.1 || atsyannam pasyasi priyamattyannam pasyati priyam bhavatyasya brahmavarcasam kule ya etamevamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste samdehastvesa atmana iti hovaca samdehaste vyasiryadyanmam nagamisya iti || 5.15.2 || || iti pancadasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.16 atha hovaca budilamasvatarasvim vaiyaghrapadya kam tvamatmanamupassa ityapa eva bhagavo rajanniti hovacaisa vai rayiratma vaisvanaro yam tvamatmanamupasse tasmattvamrayimanpustimanasi || 5.16.1 || atsyannam pasyasi priyamattyannam pasyati priyam bhavatyasya brahmavarcasam kule ya etamevamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste bastistvesa atmana iti hovaca bastiste vyabhetsyadyanmam nagamisya iti || 5.16.2 || || iti sodasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.17 atha hovacoddalakamarunim gautama kam tvamatmanamupassa iti prthivimeva bhagavo rajanniti hovacaisa vai pratisthatma vaisvanaro yam tvamatmanamupasse tasmattvam pratisthito'si prajaya ca pasubhisca || 5.17.1 || atsyannam pasyasi priyamattyannam pasyati priyam bhavatyasya brahmavarcasam kule ya etamevamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste padau tvetavatmana iti hovaca padau te vyamlasyetam yanmam nagamisya iti || 5.17.2 || || iti saptadasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.18 tanhovacaite vai khalu yuyam prthagivemamatmanam vaisvanaram vidvamso'nnamattha yastvetamevam pradesamatramabhivimanamatmanam vaisvanaramupaste sa sarvesu lokesu sarvesu bhutesu sarvesvatmasvannamatti || 5.18.1 || tasya ha va etasyatmano vaisvanarasya murdhaiva sutejascaksurvisvarupah pranah prthagvartmatma samdeho bahulo bastireva rayih prthivyeva padavura eva vedirlomani barhirhrdayam garhapatyo mano'nvaharyapacana asyamahavaniyah || 5.18.2 || || iti astadasah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.19 tadyadbhaktam prathamamagacchettaddhomiyam sa yam prathamamahutim juhuyattam juhuyatpranaya svaheti pranastrpyati || 5.19.1 || prane trpyati caksustrpyati caksusi trpyatyadityastrpyatyaditye trpyati dyaustrpyati divi trpyantyam yatkimca dyauscadityascadhitisthatastattrpyati tasyanutrptim trpyati prajaya pasubhirannadyena tejasa brahmavarcaseneti || 5.19.2 || || iti ekonavimsah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.20 atha yam dvitiyam juhuyattam juhuyadvyanaya svaheti vyanastrpyati || 5.20.1 || vyane trpyati srotram trpyati srotre trpyati candramastrpyati candramasi trpyati disastrpyanti diksu trpyantisu yatkimca disasca candramascadhitisthanti tattrpyati tasyanu trptim trpyati prajaya pasubhirannadyena tejasa brahmavarcaseneti || 5.20.2 || || iti vimsah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.21 atha yam trtiyam juhuyattam juhuyadapanaya svahetyapanastrpyati || 5.21.1 || apane trpyati vaktrpyati vaci trpyantyamagnistrpyatyagnau trpyati prthivi trpyati prthivyam trpyantyam yatkimca prthivi cagniscadhitisthatastattrpyati tasyanu trptim trpyati prajaya pasubhirannadyena tejasa brahmavarcaseneti || 5.21.2 || || iti ekavimsah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.22 atha yam caturthim juhuyattam juhuyatsamanaya svaheti samanastrpyati || 5.22.1 || samane trpyati manastrpyati manasi trpyati parjanyastrpyati parjanye trpyati vidyuttrpyati vidyuti trpyantyam yatkimca vidyucca parjanyascadhitisthatastattrpyati tasyanu trptim trpyati prajaya pasubhirannadyena tejasa brahmavarcaseneti || 5.22.2 || || iti dvavimsah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.23 atha yam pancamim juhuyattam juhuyadudanaya svahetyudanastrpyati || 5.23.1 || udane trpyati tvaktrpyati tvaci trpyantyam vayustrpyati vayau trpyatyakasastrpyatyakase trpyati yatkimca vayuscakasascadhitisthatastattrpyati tasyanu trptim trpyati prajaya pasubhirannadyena tejasa brahmavarcasena || 5.23.2 || || iti trayovimsah khandah || Chapter 5 Section 5.24 sa ya idamavidvagnihotram juhoti yathangaranapohya bhasmani juhuyattadrktatsyat || 5.24.1 || atha ya etadevam vidvanagnihotram juhoti tasya sarvesu lokesu sarvesu bhutesu sarvesvatmasu hutam bhavati || 5.24.2 || tadyathesikatulamagnau protam praduyetaivamhasya sarve papmanah praduyante ya etadevam vidvanagnihotram juhoti || 5.24.3 || tasmadu haivamvidyadyapi candalayocchistam prayacchedatmani haivasya tadvaisvanare hutam syaditi tadesa slokah || 5.24.4 || yatheha ksudhita bala mataram paryupasata evam sarvani bhutanyagnihotramupasata ityagnihotramupasata iti || 5.24.5 || || iti caturvimsah khandah || || iti pancamo'dhyayah || Chapter 6 Section 6.1 || sastho'dhyayah || svetaketurharuneya asa tam ha pitovaca svetaketo vasa brahmacaryam na vai somyasmatkulino'nanucya brahmabandhuriva bhavatiti || 6.1.1 || sa ha dvadasavarsa upetya caturvimsativarsah sarvanvedanadhitya mahamana anucanamani stabdha eyaya tamha pitovaca || 6.1.2 || svetaketo yannu somyedam mahamana anucanamani stabdho'syuta tamadesamapraksyah yenasrutam srutam bhavatyamatam matamavijnatam vijnatamiti katham nu bhagavah sa adeso bhavatiti || 6.1.3 || yatha somyaikena mrtpindena sarvam mrnmayam vijnatam syadvacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam mrttiketyeva satyam || 6.1.4 || yatha somyaikena lohamanina sarvam lohamayam vijnatam syadvacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam lohamityeva satyam || 6.1.5 || yatha somyikena nakhanikrntanena sarvam karsnayasam vijnatam syadvacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam krsnayasamityeva satyamevamsomya sa adeso bhavatiti || 6.1.6 || na vai nunam bhagavantasta etadavedisuryaddhyetadavedisyankatham me navaksyanniti bhagavamstveva me tadbravitviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.1.7 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.2 sadeva somyedamagra asidekamevadvitiyam | taddhaika ahurasadevedamagra asidekamevadvitiyam tasmadasatah sajjayata || 6.2.1 || kutastu khalu somyaivamsyaditi hovaca kathamasatah sajjayeteti| sattveva somyedamagra asidekamevadvitiyam || 6.2.2 || tadaiksata bahu syam prajayeyeti tattejo'srjata tatteja aiksata bahu syam prajayeyeti tadapo'srjata | tasmadyatra kvaca socati svedate va purusastejasa eva tadadhyapo jayante || 6.2.3 || ta apa aiksanta bahvyah syama prajayemahiti ta annamasrjanta tasmadyatra kva ca varsati tadeva bhuyisthamannam bhavatyadbhya eva tadadhyannadyam jayate || 6.2.4 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.3 tesam khalvesam bhutanam trinyeva bijani bhavantyandajam jivajamudbhijjamiti || 6.3.1 || seyam devataiksata hantahamimastisro devata anena jivenatmananupravisya namarupe vyakaravaniti || 6.3.2 || tasam trivrtam trivrtamekaikam karavaniti seyam devatemastisro devata anenaiva jivenatmananupravisya namarupe vyakarot || 6.3.3 || tasam trivrtam trivrtamekaikamakarodyatha tu khalu somyemastisro devatastrivrttrivrdekaika bhavati tanme vijanihiti || 6.3.4 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.4 yadagne rohitamrupam tejasastadrupam yacchuklam tadapam yatkrsnam tadannasyapagadagneragnitvam vacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam trini rupanityeva satyam || 6.4.1 || yadadityasya rohitamrupam tejasastadrupam yacchuklam tadapam yatkrsnam tadannasyapagadadityadadityatvam vacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam trini rupanityeva satyam || 6.4.2 || yacchandramaso rohitamrupam tejasastadrupam yacchuklam tadapam yatkrsnam tadannasyapagaccandraccandratvam vacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam trini rupanityeva satyam || 6.4.3 || yadvidyuto rohitamrupam tejasastadrupam yacchuklam tadapam yatkrsnam tadannasyapagadvidyuto vidyuttvam vacarambhanam vikaro namadheyam trini rupanityeva satyam || 6.4.4 || etaddha sma vai tadvidvamsa ahuh purve mahasala mahasrotriya na no'dya kascanasrutamamatamavijnatamudaharisyatiti hyebhyo vidamcakruh || 6.4.5 || yadu rohitamivabhuditi tejasastadrupamiti tadvidamcakruryadu suklamivabhudityapamrupamiti tadvidamcakruryadu krsnamivabhudityannasya rupamiti tadvidamcakruh || 6.4.6 || yadvavijnatamivabhudityetasameva devatanamsamasa iti tadvidamcakruryatha tu khalu somyemastisro devatah purusam prapya trivrttrivrdekaika bhavati tanme vijanihiti || 6.4.7 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.5 annamasitam tredha vidhiyate tasya yah sthavistho dhatustatpurisam bhavati yo madhyamastanmamsam yo'nisthastanmanah || 6.5.1 || apah pitastredha vidhiyante tasam yah sthavistho dhatustanmutram bhavati yo madhyamastallohitam yo'nisthah sa pranah || 6.5.2 || tejo'sitam tredha vidhiyate tasya yah sthavistho dhatustadasthi bhavati yo madhyamah sa majja yo'nisthah sa vak || 6.5.3 || annamayamhi somya manah apomayah pranastejomayi vagiti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.5.4 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.6 dadhnah somya mathyamanasya yo'nima sa urdhvah samudisati tatsarpirbhavati || 6.6.1 || evameva khalu somyannasyasyamanasya yo'nima sa urdhvah samudisati tanmano bhavati || 6.6.2 || apamsomya piyamananam yo'nima sa urdhvah samudisati sa prano bhavati || 6.6.3 || tejasah somyasyamanasya yo'nima sa urdhvah samudisati sa vagbhavati || 6.6.4 || annamayam hi somya mana apomayah pranastejomayi vagiti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.6.6 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.7 sodasakalah somya purusah pancadasahani masih kamamapah pibapomayah prano napibato vicchetsyata iti || 6.7.1 || sa ha pancadasahani nasatha hainamupasasada kim bravimi bho ityrcah somya yajumsi samaniti sa hovaca na vai ma pratibhanti bho iti || 6.7.2 || tam hovaca yatha somya mahato'bhya hitasyaiko'ngarah khadyotamatrah parisistah syattena tato'pi na bahu dahedevamsomya te sodasanam kalanameka kalatisista syattayaitarhi vedannanubhavasyasanatha me vijnasyasiti || 6.7.3 || sa hasatha hainamupasasada tam ha yatkimca papraccha sarvamha pratipede || 6.7.4 || tam hovaca yatha somya mahato'bhyahitasyaikamangaram khadyotamatram parisistam tam trnairupasamadhaya prajvalayettena tato'pi bahu dahet || 6.7.5 || evam somya te sodasanam kalanameka kalatisistabhutsannenopasamahita prajvali tayaitarhi vedananubhavasyannamayamhi somya mana apomayah pranastejomayi vagiti taddhasya vijajnaviti vijajnaviti || 6.7.6 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.8 uddalako harunih svetaketum putramuvaca svapnantam me somya vijanihiti yatraitatpurusah svapiti nama sata somya tada sampanno bhavati svamapito bhavati tasmadenam svapitityacaksate svamhyapito bhavati || 6.8.1 || sa yatha sakunih sutrena prabaddho disam disam patitvanyatrayatanamalabdhva bandhanamevopasrayata evameva khalu somya tanmano disam disam patitvanyatrayatanamalabdhva pranamevopasrayate pranabandhanam hi somya mana iti || 6.8.2 || asanapipase me somya vijanihiti yatraitatpuruso'sisisati namapa eva tadasitam nayante tadyatha gonayo'svanayah purusanaya ityevam tadapa acaksate'sanayeti tatritacchungamutpatitam somya vijanihi nedamamulam bhavisyatiti || 6.8.3 || tasya kva mulam syadanyatrannadevameva khalu somyannena sungenapo mulamanvicchadbhih somya sungena tejo mulamanviccha tejasa somya sungena sanmulamanviccha sanmulah somyemah sarvah prajah sadayatanah satpratisthah || 6.8.4 || atha yatraitatpurusah pipasati nama teja eva tatpitam nayate tadyatha gonayo'svanayah purusanaya ityevam tatteja acasta udanyeti tatraitadeva sungamutpatitam somya vijanihi nedamamulam bhavisyatiti || 6.8.5 || tasya kva mulam syadanyatradbhy'dbhih somya sungena tejo mulamanviccha tejasa somya sungena sanmulamanviccha sanmulah somyemah sarvah prajah sadayatanah satpratistha yatha tu khalu somyemastisro devatah purusam prapya trivrttrivrdekaika bhavati taduktam purastadeva bhavatyasya somya purusasya prayato vanmanasi sampadyate manah prane pranastejasi tejah parasyam devatayam || 6.8.6 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.8.7 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.9 yatha somya madhu madhukrto nististhanti nanatyayanam vrksanamrasansamavaharamekatamrasam gamayanti || 6.9.1 || te yatha tatra na vivekam labhante'musyaham vrksasya raso'smyamusyaham vrksasya raso'smityevameva khalu somyemah sarvah prajah sati sampadya na viduh sati sampadyamaha iti || 6.9.2 || ta iha vyaghro va simho va vrko va varaho va kito va patango va damso va masako va yadyadbhavanti tadabhavanti || 6.9.3 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.9.4 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.10 imah somya nadyah purastatpracyah syandante pascatpraticyastah samudratsamudramevapiyanti sa samudra eva bhavati ta yatha tatra na viduriyamahamasmiyamahamasmiti || 6.10.1 || evameva khalu somyemah sarvah prajah sata agamya na viduh sata agacchamaha iti ta iha vyaghro va simho va vrko va varaho va kito va patango va damso va masako va yadyadbhavanti tadabhavanti || 6.10.2 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.10.3 || || iti dasamah khandah || asya somya mahato vrksasya yo mule'bhyahanyajjivansravedyo madhye'bhyahanyajjivansravedyo'gre'bhyahanyajjivansravetsa esa jivenatmananuprabhutah pepiyamano modamanastisthati || 6.11.1 || asya yadekam sakham jivo jahatyatha sa susyati dvitiyam jahatyatha sa susyati trtiyam jahatyatha sa susyati sarvam jahati sarvah susyati || 6.11.2 || evameva khalu somya viddhiti hovaca jivapetam vava kiledam mriyate na jivo mriyate iti sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.11.3 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.12 nyagrodhaphalamata aharetidam bhagava iti bhinddhiti bhinnam bhagava iti kimatra pasyasityanvya ivema dhana bhagava ityasamangaikam bhinddhiti bhinna bhagava iti kimatra pasyasiti na kimcana bhagava iti || 6.12.1 || tam hovaca yam vai somyaitamanimanam na nibhalayasa etasya vai somyaiso'nimna evam mahanyagrodhastisthati sraddhatsva somyeti || 6.12.2 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidadm sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.12.3 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.13 lavanametadudake'vadhayatha ma pratarupasidatha iti sa ha tatha cakara tam hovaca yaddosa lavanamudake'vadha anga tadahareti taddhavamrsya na viveda || 6.13.1 || yatha vilinamevangasyantadacameti kathamiti lavanamiti madhyadacameti kathamiti lavanamityantadacameti kathamiti lavanamityabhiprasyaitadatha mopasidatha iti taddha tatha cakara tacchasvatsamvartate tam hovacatra vava kila tatsomya na nibhalayase'traiva kileti || 6.13.2 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.13.3 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.14 yatha somya purusam gandharebhyo'bhinaddhaksamaniya tam tato'tijane visrjetsa yatha tatra pranvodanvadharanva pratyanva pradhmayitabhinaddhaksa anito'bhinaddhakso visrstah || 6.14.1 || tasya yathabhinahanam pramucya prabruyadetam disam gandhara etam disam vrajeti sa gramadgramam prcchanpandito medhavi gandharanevopasampadyetaivamevehacaryavanpuruso veda tasya tavadeva ciram yavanna vimoksye'tha sampatsya iti || 6.14.2 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.14.3 || || iti caturdasah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.15 purusam somyotopatapinam jnatayah paryupasate janasi mam janasi mamiti tasya yavanna vanmanasi sampadyate manah prane pranastejasi tejah parasyam devatayam tavajjanati || 6.15.1 || atha yadasya vanmanasi sampadyate manah prane pranastejasi tejah parasyam devatayamatha na janati || 6.15.2 || sa ya eso'nimaitadatmyamidam sarvam tat satyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti bhuya eva ma bhagavanvijnapayatviti tatha somyeti hovaca || 6.15.3 || || iti pancadasah khandah || Chapter 6 Section 6.16 purusam somyota hastagrhitamanayantyapaharsitsteyamakarsitparasumasmai tapateti sa yadi tasya karta bhavati tata evanrtamatmanam kurute so'nrtabhisamdho'nrtenatmanamantardhaya parasum taptam pratigrhnati sa dahyate'tha hanyate || 6.16.1 || Similarly, if we do not have Self-knowledge, we will continue to bum in this world. We will be born again and again. But if we have attained Self-knowledge, we will be liberated. Truth will set us free. atha yadi tasyakarta bhavati tateva satyamatmanam kurute sa satyabhisandhah satyenatmanamantardhaya parasum taptam pratigrhnati sana dahyate'tha mucyate || 6.16.2 || sa yatha tatra nadahyetaitadatmyamidam sarvam tatsatyam sa atma tattvamasi svetaketo iti taddhasya vijajnaviti vijajnaviti || 6.16.3 || || iti sodasah khandah || || iti sastho'dhyayah || Chapter 7 Section 7.1 || saptamo'dhyayah || adhihi bhagava iti hopasasada sanatkumaram naradastam hovaca yadvettha tena mopasida tatasta urdhvam vaksyamiti sa hovaca || 7.1.1 || rgvedam bhagavo'dhyemi yajurvedam samavedamatharvanam caturthamitihasapuranam pancamam vedanam vedam pitryam rasim daivam nidhim vakovakyamekayanam devavidyam brahmavidyam bhutavidyam ksatravidyam naksatravidyam sarpadevajanavidyametadbhagavo'dhyemi || 7.1.2 || so'ham bhagavo mantravidevasmi natmavicchrutam hyeva me bhagavaddrsebhyastarati sokamatmaviditi so'ham bhagavah socami tam ma bhagavanchokasya param tarayatviti tam hovaca yadvai kimcaitadadhyagistha namaivaitat || 7.1.3 || nama va rgvedo yajurvedah samaveda atharvanascaturtha itihasapuranah pancamo vedanam vedah pitryo rasirdaivo nidhirvakovakyamekayanam devavidya brahmavidya bhutavidya ksatravidya naksatravidya sarpadevajanavidya namaivaitannamopassveti || 7.1.4 || sa yo nama brahmetyupaste yavannamno gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo nama brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo namno bhuya iti namno vava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.1.5 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.2 vagvava namno bhuyasi vagva rgvedam vijnapayati yajurvedam samavedamatharvanam caturthamitihasapuranam pancamam vedanam vedam pitryamrasim daivam nidhim vakovakyamekayanam devavidyam brahmavidyam bhutavidyam ksatravidyam sarpadevajanavidyam divam ca prthivim ca vayum cakasam capasca tejasca devamsca manusyamsca pasumsca vayamsi ca trnavanaspatinsvapadanyakitapatangapipilakam dharmam cadharmam ca satyam canrtam ca sadhu casadhu ca hrdayajnam cahrdayajnam ca yadvai vannabhavisyanna dharmo nadharmo vyajnapayisyanna satyam nanrtam na sadhu nasadhu na hrdayajno nahrdayajno vagevaitatsarvam vijnapayati vacamupassveti || 7.2.1 || sa yo vacam brahmetyupaste yavadvaco gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo vacam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo vaco bhuya iti vaco vava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.2.2 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.3 mano vava vaco bhuyo yatha vai dve vamalake dve va kole dvau vaksau mustiranubhavatyevam vacam ca nama ca mano'nubhavati sa yada manasa manasyati mantranadhiyiyetyathadhite karmani kurviyetyatha kurute putramsca pasumsceccheyetyathecchata imam ca lokamamum ceccheyetyathecchate mano hyatma mano hi loko mano hi brahma mana upassveti || 7.3.1 || sa yo mano brahmetyupaste yavanmanaso gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo mano brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo manaso bhuya iti manaso vava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.3.2 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.4 samkalpo vava manaso bhuyanyada vai samkalpayate'tha manasyatyatha vacamirayati tamu namnirayati namni mantra ekam bhavanti mantresu karmani || 7.4.1 || tani ha va etani samkalpaikayanani samkalpatmakani samkalpe pratisthitani samaklpatam dyavaprthivi samakalpetam vayuscakasam ca samakalpantapasca tejasca tesam sam klptyai varsam samkalpate varsasya samklptya annam samkalpate'nnasya sam klptyai pranah samkalpante prananam sam klptyai mantrah samkalpante mantranam sam klptyai karmani samkalpante karmanam samklptyai lokah samkalpate lokasya sam klptyai sarvam samkalpate sa esa samkalpah samkalpamupassveti || 7.4.2 || sa yah samkalpam brahmetyupaste samklptanvai sa lokandhruvandhruvah pratisthitan pratisthito'vyathamananavyathamano'bhisidhyati yavatsamkalpasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yah samkalpam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavah samkalpadbhuya iti samkalpadvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.4.3 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.5 cittam vava sam kalpadbhuyo yada vai cetayate'tha samkalpayate'tha manasyatyatha vacamirayati tamu namnirayati namni mantra ekam bhavanti mantresu karmani || 7.5.1 || tani ha va etani cittaikayanani cittatmani citte pratisthitani tasmadyadyapi bahuvidacitto bhavati nayamastityevainamahuryadayam veda yadva ayam vidvannetthamacittah syadityatha yadyalpaviccittavanbhavati tasma evota susrusante cittamhyevaisamekayanam cittamatma cittam pratistha cittamupassveti || 7.5.2 || sa yascittam brahmetyupaste cittanvai sa lokandhruvandhruvah pratisthitanpratisthito'vyathamananavyathamano'bhisidhyati yavaccittasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yascittam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavascittadbhuya iti cittadvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.5.3 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.6 dhyanam vava cittadbhuyo dhyayativa prthivi dhyayativantariksam dhyayativa dyaurdhyayantivapo dhyayantiva parvata devamanusyastasmadya iha manusyanam mahattam prapnuvanti dhyanapadamsa ivaiva te bhavantyatha ye'lpah kalahinah pisuna upavadinaste'tha ye prabhavo dhyanapadamsa ivaiva te bhavanti dhyanamupassveti || 7.6.1 || sa yo dhyanam brahmetyupaste yavaddhyanasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo dhyanam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo dhyanadbhuya iti dhyanadvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.6.2 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.7 vijnanam vava dhyanadbhuyah vijnanena va rgvedam vijanati yajurvedam samavedamatharvanam caturthamitihasapuranam pancamam vedanam vedam pitryamrasim daivam nidhim vakovakyamekayanam devavidyam brahmavidyam bhutavidyam ksatravidyam naksatravidyamsarpadevajanavidyam divam ca prthivim ca vayum cakasam capasca tejasca devamsca manusyamsca pasumsca vayamsi ca trnavanaspatinchvapadanyakitapatangapipilakam dharmam cadharmam ca satyam canrtam ca sadhu casadhu ca hrdayajnam cahrdayajnam cannam ca rasam cemam ca lokamamum ca vijnanenaiva vijanati vijnanamupassveti || 7.7.1 || sa yo vijnanam brahmetyupaste vijnanavato vai sa lokanjnanavato'bhisidhyati yavadvijnanasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo vijnanam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo vijnanadbhuya iti vijnanadvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.7.2 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.8 balam vava vijnanadbhuyo'pi ha satam vijnanavatameko balavanakampayate sa yada bali bhavatyathotthata bhavatyuttisthanparicarita bhavati paricarannupasatta bhavatyupasidandrasta bhavati srota bhavati manta bhavati boddha bhavati karta bhavati vijnata bhavati balena vai prthivi tisthati balenantariksam balena dyaurbalena parvata balena devamanusya balena pasavasca vayamsi ca trnavanaspatayah svapadanyakitapatangapipilakam balena lokastisthati balamupassveti || 7.8.1 || sa yo balam brahmetyupaste yavadbalasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo balam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo baladbhuya iti baladvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.8.2 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.9 annam vava baladbhuyastasmadyadyapi dasa ratrirnasniyadyadyu ha jivedathavadrastasrotamantaboddhakartavijnata bhavatyathannasyayai drasta bhavati srota bhavati manta bhavati boddha bhavati karta bhavati vijnata bhavatyannamupassveti || 7.9.1 || sa yo'nnam brahmetyupaste'nnavato vai sa lokanpanavato'bhisidhyati yavadannasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo'nnam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo'nnadbhuya ityannadvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.9.2 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.10 apo vavannadbhuyastasmadyada suvrstirna bhavati vyadhiyante prana annam kaniyo bhavisyatityatha yada suvrstirbhavatyanandinah prana bhavantyannam bahu bhavisyatityapa evema murta yeyam prthivi yadantariksam yaddyauryatparvata yaddevamanusyayatpasavasca vayamsi ca trnavanaspatayah svapadanyakitapatangapipilakamapa evema murta apa upassveti || 7.10.1 || sa yo'po brahmetyupasta apnoti sarvankamamstrptimanbhavati yavadapam gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yo'po brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavo'dbhyo bhuya ityadbhyo vava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.10.2 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.11 tejo vavadbhyo bhuyastadva etadvayumagrhyakasamabhitapati tadahurnisocati nitapati varsisyati va iti teja eva tatpurvam darsayitvathapah srjate tadetadurdhvabhisca tirascibhisca vidyudbhirahradascaranti tasmadahurvidyotate stanayati varsisyati va iti teja eva tatpurvam darsayitvathapah srjate teja upassveti || 7.11.1 || sa yastejo brahmetyupaste tejasvi vai sa tejasvato lokanbhasvato'pahatatamaskanabhisidhyati yavattejaso gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yastejo brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavastejaso bhuya iti tejaso vava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.11.2 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.12 akaso vava tejaso bhuyanakase vai suryacandramasavubhau vidyunnaksatranyagnirakasenahvayatyakasena srnotyakasena pratisrnotyakase ramata akase na ramata akase jayata akasamabhijayata akasamupassveti || 7.12.1 || sa ya akasam brahmetyupasta akasavato vai sa lokanprakasavato'sambadhanurugayavato'bhisidhyati yavadakasasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati ya akasam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagava akasadbhuya iti akasadvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.12.2 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.13 smaro vavakasadbhuyastasmadyadyapi bahava asiranna smaranto naiva te kamcana srnuyurna manviranna vijaniranyada vava te smareyuratha srnuyuratha manvirannatha vijaniransmarena vai putranvijanati smarena pasunsmaramupassveti || 7.13.1 || sa yah smaram brahmetyupaste yavatsmarasya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati yah smaram brahmetyupaste'sti bhagavah smaradbhuya iti smaradvava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.13.2 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.14 asa vava smaradbhuyasyaseddho vai smaro mantranadhite karmani kurute putramsca pasumscecchata imam ca lokamamum cecchata asamupassveti || 7.14.1 || sa ya asam brahmetyupasta asayasya sarve kamah samrdhyantyamogha hasyasiso bhavanti yavadasaya gatam tatrasya yathakamacaro bhavati ya asam brahmetyupaste'sti bhagava asaya bhuya ityasaya vava bhuyo'stiti tanme bhagavanbravitviti || 7.14.2 || || iti caturdasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.15 prano va asaya bhuyanyatha va ara nabhau samarpita evamasminprane sarvamsamarpitam pranah pranena yati pranah pranam dadati pranaya dadati prano ha pita prano mata prano bhrata pranah svasa prana acaryah prano brahmanah || 7.15.1 || sa yadi pitaram va mataram va bhrataram va svasaram vacaryam va brahmanam va kimcidbhrsamiva pratyaha dhiktvastvityevainamahuh pitrha vai tvamasi matrha vai tvamasi bhratrha vai tvamasi svasrha vai tvamasyacaryaha vai tvamasi brahmanaha vai tvamasiti || 7.15.2 || atha yadyapyenanutkrantaprananchulena samasam vyatisamdahennaivainam bruyuh pitrhasiti na matrhasiti na bhratrhasiti na svasrhasiti nacaryahasiti na brahmanahasiti || 7.15.3 || prano hyevaitani sarvani bhavati sa va esa evam pasyannevam manvana evam vijanannativadi bhavati tam cedbruyurativadyasityativadyasmiti bruyannapahnuvita || 7.15.4 || || iti pancadasah khandah || Section 7.16 esa tu va ativadati yah satyenativadati so'ham bhagavah satyenativadaniti satyam tveva vijijnasitavyamiti satyam bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.16.1 || || iti sodasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.17 yada vai vijanatyatha satyam vadati navijanansatyam vadati vijananneva satyam vadati vijnanam tveva vijijnasitavyamiti vijnanam bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.17.1 || || iti saptadasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.18 yada vai manute'tha vijanati namatva vijanati matvaiva vijanati matistveva vijijnasitavyeti matim bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.18.1 || || iti astadasah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.19 yada vai sraddadhatyatha manute nasraddadhanmanute sraddadhadeva manute sraddha tveva vijijnasitavyeti sraddham bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.19.1 || || iti ekonavimsatitamah khandah || yada vai nististhatyatha sraddadhati nanististhanchraddadhati nististhanneva sraddadhati nistha tveva vijijnasitavyeti nistham bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.20.1 || || iti vimsatitamah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.21 yada vai karotyatha nististhati nakrtva nististhati krtvaiva nististhati krtistveva vijijnasitavyeti krtim bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.21.1 || || iti ekavimsah khandah || yada vai sukham labhate'tha karoti nasukham labdhva karoti sukhameva labdhva karoti sukham tveva vijijnasitavyamiti sukham bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.22.1 || || iti dvavimsah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.23 yo vai bhuma tatsukham nalpe sukhamasti bhumaiva sukham bhuma tveva vijijnasitavya iti bhumanam bhagavo vijijnasa iti || 7.23.1 || || iti trayovimsah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.24 yatra nanyatpasyati nanyacchrnoti nanyadvijanati sa bhumatha yatranyatpasyatyanyacchrnotyanyadvijanati tadalpam yo vai bhuma tadamrtamatha yadalpam tanmartym sa bhagavah kasminpratisthita iti sve mahimni yadi va na mahimniti || 7.24.1 || goasvamiha mahimetyacaksate hastihiranyam dasabharyam ksetranyayatananiti nahamevam bravimi bravimiti hovacanyohyanyasminpratisthita iti || 7.24.2 || || iti caturvimsah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.25 sa evadhastatsa uparistatsa pascatsa purastatsa daksinatah sa uttaratah sa evedam sarvamityathato'hamkaradesa evahamevadhastadahamuparistadaham pascadaham purastadaham daksinato'hamuttarato'hamevedam sarvamiti || 7.25.1 || athata atmadesa evatmaivadhastadatmoparistadatma pascadatma purastadatma daksinata atmottarata atmaivedam sarvamiti sa va esa evam pasyannevam manvana evam vijanannatmaratiratmakrida atmamithuna atmanandah sa svaradbhavati tasya sarvesu lokesu kamacaro bhavati atha ye'nyathato viduranyarajanaste ksayyaloka bhavanti tesam sarvesu lokesvakamacaro bhavati || 7.25.2 || || iti pancavimsah khandah || Chapter 7 Section 7.26 tasya ha va etasyaivam pasyata evam manvanasyaivam vijanata atmatah prana atmata asatmatah smara atmata akasa atmatasteja atmata apa atmata avirbhavatirobhavavatmato'nnamatmato balamatmato vijnanamatmato dhyanamatmatascittamatmatah samkalpa atmato mana atmato vagatmato namatmato mantra atmatah karmanyatmata evedamsarvamiti || 7.26.1 || tadesa sloko na pasyo mrtyum pasyati na rogam nota duhkhatam sarvam ha pasyah pasyati sarvamapnoti sarvasa iti sa ekadha bhavati tridha bhavati pancadha saptadha navadha caiva punascaikadasah smrtah satam ca dasa caikasca sahasrani ca vimsatiraharasuddhau sattvasuddhau dhruva smrtih smrtilambhe sarvagranthinam vipramoksastasmai mrditakasayaya tamasasparam darsayati bhagavansanatkumarastam skanda ityacaksate tam skanda ityacaksate || 7.26.2 || || iti sadvimsah khandah || || iti saptamo'dhyayah || Chapter 8 Section 8.1 || astamo'dhyayah || atha yadidamasminbrahmapure daharam pundarikam vesma daharo'sminnantarakasastasminyadantastadanvestavyam tadvava vijijnasitavyamiti || 8.1.1 || tam cedbruyuryadidamasminbrahmapure daharam pundarikam vesma daharo'sminnantarakasah kim tadatra vidyate yadanvestavyam yadvava vijijnasitavyamiti sa bruyat || 8.1.2 || yavanva ayamakasastavaneso'ntarhrdaya akasa ubhe asmindyavaprthivi antareva samahite ubhavagnisca vayusca suryacandramasavubhau vidyunnaksatrani yaccasyehasti yacca nasti sarvam tadasminsamahitamiti || 8.1.3 || tam cedbruyurasmimscedidam brahmapure sarvam samahitam sarvani ca bhutani sarve ca kama yadaitajjara vapnoti pradhvamsate va kim tato'tisisyata iti || 8.1.4 || sa bruyatnasya jarayaitajjiryati na vadhenasya hanyata etatsatyam brahmapuramasmikamah samahitah esa atmapahatapapma vijaro vimrtyurvisoko vijighatso'pipasah satyakamah satyasamkalpo yatha hyeveha praja anvavisanti yathanusasanam yam yamantamabhikama bhavanti yam janapadam yam ksetrabhagam tam tamevopajivanti || tadyatheha karmajito lokah ksiyata evamevamutra punyajito lokah ksiyate tadya ihatmanamanuvidya vrajantyetamsca satyankamamstesam sarvesu lokesvakamacaro bhavatyatha ya ihatmanamanivudya vrajantyetamsca satyankamamstesam sarvesu lokesu kamacaro bhavati || 8.1.6 || || iti prathamah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.2 sa yadi pitrlokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya pitarah samuttisthanti tena pitrlokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.1 || atha yadi matrlokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya matarah samuttisthanti tena matrlokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.2 || atha yadi bhratrlokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya bhratarah samuttisthanti tena bhratrlokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.3 || atha yadi svasrlokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya svasarah samuttisthanti tena svasrlokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.4 || atha yadi sakhilokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya sakhayah samuttisthanti tena sakhilokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.5 || atha yadi gandhamalyalokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya gandhamalye samuttisthatastena gandhamalyalokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.6 || atha yadyannapanalokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasyannapane samuttisthatastenannapanalokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.7 || atha yadi gitavaditralokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya gitavaditre samuttisthatastena gitavaditralokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.8 || atha yadi strilokakamo bhavati samkalpadevasya striyah samuttisthanti tena strilokena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.9 || yam yamantamabhikamo bhavati yam kamam kamayate so'sya samkalpadeva samuttisthati tena sampanno mahiyate || 8.2.10 || || iti dvitiyah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.3 ta ime satyah kama anrtapidhanastesam satyanam satamanrtamapidhanam yo yo hyasyetah praiti na tamiha darsanaya labhate || 8.3.1 || atha ye casyeha jiva ye ca preta yaccanyadicchanna labhate sarvam tadatra gatva vindate'tra hyasyaite satyah kama anrtapidhanastadyathapi hiranyanidhim nihitamaksetrajna uparyupari sancaranto na vindeyurevamevemah sarvah praja aharahargacchantya etam brahmalokam na vindantyanrtena hi pratyudhah || 8.3.2 || sa va esa atma hrdi tasyaitadeva niruktam hrdyayamiti tasmaddhrdayamaharaharva evamvitsvargam lokameti || 8.3.3 || atha ya esa samprasado'smacchariratsamutthaya param jyotirupasampadya svena rupenabhinispadyata esa atmeti hovacaitadamrtamabhayametadbrahmeti tasya ha va etasya brahmano nama satyamiti || 8.3.4 || tani ha va etani trinyaksarani satiyamiti tadyatsattadamrtamatha yatti tanmartyamatha yadyam tenobhe yacchati yadanenobhe yacchati tasmadyamaharaharva evamvitsvargam lokameti || 8.3.5 || || iti trtiyah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.4 atha ya atma sa seturdhrtiresam lokanamasambhedaya naitam setumahoratre tarato na jara na mrtyurna soko na sukrtam na duskrtam sarve papmano'to nivartante'pahatapapma hyesa brahmalokah || 8.4.1 || tasmadva etam setum tirtvandhah sannanandho bhavati viddhah sannaviddho bhavatyupatapi sannanupatapi bhavati tasmadva etam setum tirtvapi naktamaharevabhinispadyate sakrdvibhato hyevaisa brahmalokah || 8.4.2 || tadya evaitam brahmalokam brahmacaryenanuvindanti tesamevaisa brahmalokastesam sarvesu lokesu kamacaro bhavati || 8.4.3 || || iti caturthah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.5 atha yadyajna ityacaksate brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryena hyeva yo jnata tam vindate'tha yadistamityacaksate brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryena hyevestvatmanamanuvindate || 8.5.1 || atha yadanasakayanamityacaksate brahmacaryameva tadesa hyatma na nasyati yam brahmacaryenanuvindate'tha yadaranyayanamityacaksate brahmacaryameva tadarasca ha vai nyascarnavau brahmaloke trtiyasyamito divi tadairam madiyam sarastadasvatthah somasavanastadaparajita purbrahmanah prabhuvimitam hiranmayam || 8.5.3 || tadya evaitavaram ca nyam carnavau brahmaloke brahmacaryenanuvindanti tesamevaisa brahmalokastesam sarvesu lokesu kamacaro bhavati || 8.5.4 || || iti pancamah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.6 atha ya eta hrdayasya nadyastah pingalasyanimnastisthanti suklasya nilasya pitasya lohitasyetyasau va adityah pingala esa sukla esa nila esa pita esa lohitah || 8.6.1 || tadyatha mahapatha atata ubhau gramau gacchatimam camum caivamevaita adityasya rasmaya ubhau lokau gacchantimam camum camusmadadityatpratayante ta asu nadisu srpta abhyo nadibhyah pratayante te'musminnaditye srptah || 8.6.2 || tadyatraitatsuptah samasth samprasannah svapnam na vijanatyasu tada nadisu srpto bhavati tam na kascana papma sprsati tejasa hi tada sampanno bhavati || 8.6.3 || atha yatraitadabalimanam nito bhavati tamabhita asina ahurjanasi mam janasi mamiti sa yavadasmacchariradanutkranto bhavati tavajjanati || 8.6.4 || atha yatraitadasmacchariradutkramatyathaitaireva rasmibhirurdhvamakramate sa omiti va hodva miyate sa yavatksipyenmanastavadadityam gacchatyetadvai khalu lokadvaram vidusam prapadanam nirodho'vidusam || 8.6.5 || tadesa slokah | satam caika ca hrdayasya nadyastasam murdhanamabhinihsrtaika | tayordhvamayannamrtatvameti visvannanya utkramane bhavantyutkramane bhavanti || 8.6.6 || || iti sasthah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.7 ya atmapahatapapma vijaro vimrtyurvisoko vijighatso'pipasah satyakamah satyasamkalpah so'nvestavyah sa vijijnasitavyah sa sarvamsca lokanapnoti sarvamsca kamanyastamatmanamanuvidya vijanatiti ha prajapatiruvaca || 8.7.1 || taddhobhaye devasura anububudhire te hocurhanta tamatmanamanvecchamo yamatmanamanvisya sarvamsca lokanapnoti sarvamsca kamanitindro haiva devanamabhipravavraja virocano'suranam tau hasamvidanaveva samitpani prajapatisakasamajagmatuh || 8.7.2 || tau ha dvatrimsatam varsani brahmacaryamusatustau ha prajapatiruvaca kimicchantavastamiti tau hocaturya atmapahatapapma vijaro vimrtyurvisoko vijighatso'pipasah satyakamah satyasamkalpah so'nvestavyah sa vijijnasitavyah sa sarvamsca lokanapnoti sarvamsca kamanyastamatmanamanuvidya vijanatiti bhagavato vaco vedayante tamicchantavavastamiti || 8.7.3 || tau ha prajapatiruvaca ya eso'ksini puruso drsyata esa atmeti hovacaitadamrtamabhayametadbrahmetyatha yo'yam bhagavo'psu parikhyayate yascayamadarse katama esa ityesa u evaisu sarvesvantesu parikhyayata iti hovaca || 8.7.4 || || iti saptamah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.8 udasarava atmanamaveksya yadatmano na vijanithastanme prabrutamiti tau hodasarave'veksamcakrate tau ha prajapatiruvaca kim pasyatha iti tau hocatuh sarvamevedamavam bhagava atmanam pasyava a lomabhyah a nakhebhyah pratirupamiti || 8.8.1 || tau ha prajapatiruvaca sadhvalamkrtau suvasanau pariskrtau bhutvodasarave'veksethamiti tau ha sadhvalamkrtau suvasanau pariskrtau bhutvodasarave'veksamcakrate tau ha prajapatiruvaca kim pasyatha iti || 8.8.2 || tau hocaturyathaivedamavam bhagavah sadhvalamkrtau suvasanau pariskrtau sva evamevemau bhagavah sadhvalamkrtau suvasanau pariskrtavityesa atmeti hovacaitadamrtamabhayametadbrahmeti tau ha santahrdayau pravavrajatuh || 8.8.3 || tau hanviksya prajapatiruvacanupalabhyatmanamananuvidya vrajato yatara etadupanisado bhavisyanti deva vasura va te parabhavisyantiti sa ha santahrdaya eva virocano'suranjagama tebhyo haitamupanisadam provacatmaiveha mahayya atma paricarya atmanameveha mahayannatmanam paricarannubhau lokavavapnotimam camum ceti || 8.8.4 || tasmadapyadyehadadanamasraddadhanamayajamanamahurasuro batetyasuranam hyesopanisatpretasya sariram bhiksaya vasanenalamkareneti samskurvantyetena hyamum lokam jesyanto manyante || 8.8.5 || || iti astamah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.9 atha hendro'prapyaiva devanetadbhayam dadarsa yathaiva khalvayamasmincharire sadhvalamkrte sadhvalamkrto bhavati suvasane suvasanah pariskrte pariskrta evamevayamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srame sramah parivrkne parivrkno'syaiva sarirasya nasamanvesa nasyati nahamatra bhogyam pasyamiti || 8.9.1 || sa samitpanih punareyaya tam ha prajapatiruvaca maghavanyacchantahrdayah pravrajih sardham virocanena kimicchanpunaragama iti sa hovaca yathaiva khalvayam bhagavo'smincharire sadhvalamkrte sadhvalamkrto bhavati suvasane suvasanah pariskrte pariskrta evamevayamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srame sramah parivrkne parivrkno'syaiva sarirasya nasamanvesa nasyati nahamatra bhogyam pasyamiti || 8.9.2 || evamevaisa maghavanniti hovacaitam tveva te bhuyo'nuvyakhyasyami vasaparani dvatrimsatam varsaniti sa haparani dvatrimsatam varsanyuvasa tasmai hovaca || 8.9.3 || || iti navamah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.10 ya esa svapne mahiyamanascaratyesa atmeti hovacaitadamrtamabhayametadbrahmeti sa ha santahrdayah pravavraja sa haprapyaiva devanetadbhayam dadarsa tadyadyapidam sariramandham bhavatyanandhah sa bhavati yadi sramamasramo naivaiso'sya dosena dusyati || 8.10.1 || na vadhenasya hanyate nasya sramyena sramo ghnanti tvevainam vicchadayantivapriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditiva nahamatra bhogyam pasyamiti || 8.10.2 || sa samitpanih punareyaya tam ha prajapatiruvaca maghavanyacchantahrdayah pravrajih kimicchanpunaragama iti sa hovaca tadyadyapidam bhagavah sariramandham bhavatyanandhah sa bhavati yadi sramamasramo naivaiso'sya dosena dusyati || 8.10.3 || na vadhenasya hanyate nasya sramyena sramo ghnanti tvevainam vicchadayantivapriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditiva nahamatra bhogyam pasyamityevamevaisa maghavanniti hovacaitam tveva te bhuyo'nuvyakhyasyami vasaparani dvatrimsatam varsaniti sa haparani dvatrimsatam varsanyuvasa tasmai hovaca || 8.10.4 || || iti dasamah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.11 tadyatraitatsuptah samastah samprasannah svapnam na vijanatyesa atmeti hovacaitadamrtamabhayametadbrahmeti sa ha santahrdayah pravavraja sa haprapyaiva devanetadbhayam dadarsa naha khalvayamevam sampratyatmanam janatyayamahamasmiti no evemani bhutani vinasamevapito bhavati nahamatra bhogyam pasyamiti || 8.11.1 || sa samitpanih punareyaya tam ha prajapatiruvaca maghavanyacchantahrdayah pravrajih kimicchanpunaragama iti sa hovaca naha khalvayam bhagava evam sampratyatmanam janatyayamahamasmiti no evemani bhutani vinasamevapito bhavati nahamatra bhogyam pasyamiti || 8.11.2 || evamevaisa maghavanniti hovacaitam tveva te bhuyo'nuvyakhyasyami no evanyatraitasmadvasaparani panca varsaniti sa haparani panca varsanyuvasa tanyekasatam sampeduretattadyadahurekasatam ha vai varsani maghavanprajapatau brahmacaryamuvasa tasmai hovaca || 8.11.3 || || iti ekadasah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.12 maghavanmartyam va idam sariramattam mrtyuna tadasyamrtasyasarirasyatmano'dhisthanamatto vai sasarirah priyapriyabhyam na vai sasarirasya satah priyapriyayorapahatirastyasariram vava santam na priyapriye sprsatah || 8.12.1 || asariro vayurabhram vidyutstanayitnurasariranyetani tadyathaitanyamusmadakasatsamutthaya param jyotirupasampadya svena rupenabhinispadyante || 8.12.2 || evamevaisa samprasado'smacchariratsamutthaya param jyotirupasampadya svena rupenabhinispadyate sa uttamapurusah sa tatra paryeti jaksatkridanramamanah stribhirva yanairva jnatibhirva nopajanam smarannidam sariram sa yatha prayogya acarane yukta evamevayamasmincharire prano yuktah || 8.12.3 || atha yatraitadakasamanuvisannam caksuh sa caksusah puruso darsanaya caksuratha yo vededam jighraniti sa atma gandhaya ghranamatha yo vededamabhivyaharaniti sa atmabhivyaharaya vagatha yo vededam srnavaniti sa atma sravanaya srotram || 8.12.4 || atha yo vededam manvaniti satma mano'sya daivam caksuh sa va esa etena daivena caksusa manasaitankamanpasyanramate ya ete brahmaloke || 8.12.5 || tam va etam deva atmanamupasate tasmattesam sarve ca loka attah sarve ca kamah sa sarvamsca lokanapnoti sarvamsca kamanyastamatmanamanuvidya vijanatiti ha prjapatiruvaca prajapatiruvaca || 8.12.6 || || iti dvadasah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.13 syamacchabalam prapadye sabalacchyamam prapadye'sva iva romani vidhuya papam candra iva rahormukhatpramucya dhutva sariramakrtam krtatma brahmalokamabhisambhavamityabhisambhavamiti || 8.13.1 || || iti trayodasah khandah || Chapter 8 Section 8.14 akaso vai nama namarupayornirvahita te yadantara tadbrahma tadamrtam sa atma prajapateh sabham vesma prapadye yaso'ham bhavami brahmananam yaso rajnam yasovisam yaso'hamanuprapatsi sa haham yasasam yasah syetamadatkamadatkam syetam lindu mabhigam lindu mabhigam || 8.14.1 || || iti caturdasah khandah || tadhaitadbrahma prajapatayai uvaca prajapatirmanave manuh prajabhyah acaryakuladvedamadhitya yathavidhanam guroh karmatisesenabhisamavrtya kutumbe sucau dese svadhyayamadhiyano dharmikanvidadhadatmani sarvaindriyani sampratisthapyahimsansarva bhutanyanyatra tirthebhyah sa khalvevam vartayanyavadayusam brahmalokamabhisampadyate na ca punaravartate na ca punaravartate || 8.15.1 || || iti pancadasah khandah ||
Chapter I — Meditation on Om 1.1.1 The syllable Om, called the Udgitha, should be meditated upon; for people sing the Udgitha, beginning with Om. Now follows the detailed explanation of the syllable: 1.1.2 The essence of all these beings is the earth; the essence of the earth is water; the essence of water is plants; the essence of plants is a person; essence of a person is speech; the essence of speech is the Rig—Veda; essence of the Rig—Veda is the Sama—Veda; the essence of the Sama—Veda is the Udgitha which is Om. 1.1.3 That Udgitha (Om) is the best of all essences, the supreme, deserving the highest place, the eighth. 1.1..4 What, then, is the Rik? What is the Saman? What is the Udgitha? This is to be considered. 1.1.5 Speech, indeed, is the Rik; the vital breath (prana) is the Saman; the syllable Om is the Udgitha. Speech and the prana, or the Rik and the Saman, form a couple. 1.1.6 And that couple become united in the syllable Om. When a pair come together they fulfil each other’s desire. 1.1.7 He who knows this as stated above and meditates on the syllable Om, the Udgitha, becomes, indeed, a fulfiller of desires. 1.1.8 This syllable Om is used to give assent, for wherever one assents to something, one says Om (yes). Now, what is assent is gratification. He who knows this and meditates on the syllable Om, the Udgitha, becomes, indeed, a gratifier of desires. 1.1.9 By means of this syllable the threefold knowledge proceeds. When adhvaryu priest gives an order in a sacrifice, he says Om. When the hotri priest recites the hymn, he says Om. When the udgatri priest sings the Saman, he says Om. All this is done for the glory of the Imperishable Atman by the greatness of that syllable and by its essence. 1.1.10 It may be contended that he who knows this true meaning of the syllable Om and he who does not, perform the same sacrifice and therefore must reap the same fruit. But this is not so. The results of knowledge and ignorance are different. Work that is done with knowledge, faith and the Upanishad (i.e. meditation on the deities) produces more powerful fruit. This is, verily, the detailed explanation of the syllable Om. Chapter II — Meditation on Om as the Prana 1.2.1 When the gods and the demons, both offspring of Prajapati, fought with each other, the gods took hold of the Udgitha, thinking that with this they would vanquish the demons. 1.2.2 They (i.e. the gods) meditated on the Udgitha (Om) as the prana which functions through the nose. But the demons pierced it (i.e. the prana) with evil. Therefore with it (i.e. the breath) one smells both what is pleasant—smelling and what is foul—smelling. For the breath is pierced by evil. 1.2.3 Then they meditated on the Udgitha as speech. But the demons pierced it with evil. Therefore one speaks both truth and falsehood. For speech is pierced by evil. 1.2.4 Then they meditated on the Udgitha as the eye. But the demons pierced it with evil. Therefore one sees both what is sightly and what is unsightly. For the eye is pierced by evil. 1.2.5 Then they meditated on the Udgitha as the ear. But the demons pierced it with evil. Therefore one hears both what is worth hearing and what is not worth hearing. For the ear is pierced by evil. 1.2.6 Then they meditated on the Udgitha as the mind. But the demons pierced it with evil. Therefore one thinks both proper and improper thoughts. For the mind is pierced by evil. 1.2.7 Then they meditated on the Udgitha as the principal (mukhya) prana. But as a clod of earth hitting a stone is scattered, even so the demons were destroyed when they hit it. 1.2.8 As a clod of earth is scattered when hitting a stone, thus will he be scattered who wishes evil to one who knows this or who injures him; for he is a solid stone. 1.2.9 With this (i.e. the principal vital breath) one does not discern what pleasant—smelling and what is foul—smelling; for it is unsmitten by evil. Whatever a person eats or drinks with it (the principal vital breath) supports the other pranas. That is why they depart when, at the time death, it no longer supports them by eating and drinking. It opens the mouth at the time of death as if the dying man wished to eat. 1.2.10, 1.2.11, 1.2.12, 1.2.13 Angira meditated on the Udgitha as the principal prana. people call it (i.e. the prana) Angiras, because it is the essence (rasa) of the limbs (anga). Brihaspati meditated on the Udgitha as the principal prana. People call it (the prana) Brihaspati, because speech is great (brihat) and it is the lord (pati) of speech. Ayasya meditated on the Udgitha as the principal prana. People call it (the prana) as Ayasya; because it comes (ayate) from the mouth (asya). Vaka, the son of Dalbhya, knew it (the prana); he became the udgatri priest of the sacrificers dwelling in the Naimisha forest. By singing the Udgitha he fulfilled all their desires. 1.2.14 He who knows this as described above and meditates upon the imperishable Udgitha (Om) obtains all his desires by singing the Udgitha. So much for the Udgitha as meditates on with reference to the body. Chapter III — Meditation on the Udgitha as the Sun and the Vyana 1.3.1 Now is described the meditation on the Udgitha with reference to the gods: One should meditate on the Udgitha as the sun who gives warmth. When he (the sun) rises he sings the Udgitha for the benefit of all creatures. When he rises he destroys darkness and fear. He who knows this becomes the destroyer of darkness and fear. 1.3.2 This prana and that sun are the same. This is warm and that is warm. This they call svara (what goes out) and that, pratyasvara (what returns). Therefore one should meditate on the Udgitha as this and that. 1.3.3 One should meditate on the Udgitha as the vyana. That which one breathes out is the prana and that which one breathes in is the apana. That which is the junction of the prana and the apana is the Vyana. This vyana is speech. Therefore when one utters speech one stops the prana and the apana. 1.3.4 That which is speech is the Rik. Therefore when a man utters a Rik he neither breathes out nor breathes in. That which is the Rik is the Saman. Therefore when a man sings a Saman, he neither breathes out nor breathes in. That which is the Saman is the Udgitha. Therefore when a man sings the Udgitha he neither breathes out nor breathes in. 1.3.5 And other works also which require strength, such as the kindling of fire by rubbing, running a race and stringing a strong bow, are performed without breathing out or breathing in. Therefore one should meditate on the Udgitha as the vyana. 1.3.6 One should meditate on the letters of the word Udgitha (i.e. ut, gi and tha). Ut is the prana, for a man rises (uttishthati) by means of the prana. Gi is speech, for speeches are called girah. Tha is food, for all this subsists (sthita) on food. 1.3.7 Ut is heaven, gi the mid—region and tha the earth. Ut is the sun, gi the air and tha fire. Ut is the Sama—Veda, gi the Yajur—Veda and tha the Rig—Veda. To him who thus meditates speech yields milk and milk is speech. He who knows this and meditates on the letters of the Udgitha becomes the possessor of food and the eater of food. 1.3.8 Next follows the fulfilment of prayers. One should thus meditate on the object one wishes to obtain through meditation: he (i.e. the udgatri priest) should meditate on the Saman with which he is going chant the praise. 1.3.9 He (the udgatri priest) should meditate on the Rik in which that Saman occurs, on the rishi to whom it was revealed and on the deity whom he is going to praise. 1.3.10 He (the udgatri priest) should meditate on the metre in which he is going to chant the praise; he should meditate on the hymn by which he is going to chant the praise. 1.3.11 He (the udgatri priest) should meditate on the quarter of space facing which he is going to chant the praise. 1.3.12 Finally, he (the udgatri priest) should meditate on himself and then on the object desired and chant the praise correctly. Thus will be quickly fulfilled for him the desire, desiring which he may offer the hymn of praise, yea, desiring which he may offer the hymn of praise. Chapter IV — Meditation on Om as Fearlessness and Immortality 1.4.1 The syllable Om, called the Udgitha, should be meditated upon; for people sing the Udgitha, beginning with Om. Now follows the detailed explanation of this syllable. 1.4.2 The gods, afraid of death, entered upon the threefold knowledge. They covered themselves with the metrical hymns. Because they covered (acchadayan) themselves with the hymns, the hymns are called chhandas. 1.4.3 As a fisherman might observe a fish in shallow water, so death observed the gods in the Rik, the Yajus and the Saman. They too came to know this, rose from the Rik, the Yajus and the Saman and entered the Svara (Om) alone. 1.4.4 When a man has mastered the Rig—Veda he loudly utters Om; he does the same when he has mastered the Sama—Veda and the Yajur—Veda. The Svara is the syllable Om; it is immortal and fearless. The gods, by entering it, became immortal and fearless. 1.4.5 He who, knowing this, sings the praise of the syllable Om enters this same syllable, called the Svara, which is immortal and fearless. Having entered it, he becomes immortal as the gods are immortal. Chapter V — Meditation on Om as the Sun and the Prana 1.5.1 Now, verily, that which is the Udgitha is the Pranava; that which is the Pranava is the Udgitha. Yonder sun is the Udgitha. It is the Pranava, because it moves along uttering Om. 1.5.2 Kaushitaki in olden times said to his son: “I sang the praise of the sun regarding it as one with its rays; therefore you are my only son. Meditate on the rays and the sun as different from each another and you will have many sons.” So much with reference to the gods. 1.5.3 Now with reference to the body: One should meditate on the Udgitha as the principal prana, for (i.e. the prana) moves in the body uttering Om. 1.5.4 Kaushitaki in olden times said to his son: “I sang the praise of the principal prana alone; therefore you are my only son. Meditate on the Udgitha as the manifold prana and you will have many sons.” 1.5.5 Now, verily, that which is the Udgitha is the Pranava; that which is the Pranava is the Udgitha. He (i.e. the udgatri priest) who knows this, rectifies from the seat of the hotri priest any mistake committed by him (the udgatri priest), yea he rectifies it. Chapter VI — The Luminous Person in the Solar Orb 1.6.1 This earth is the Rik and fire is the Saman. This Saman (i.e. fire) rests on that Rik (i.e. the earth). Therefore the Saman is sung resting on the Rik. Sa is the earth, ama is fire; thus they (the earth and fire) are designated as Sama. 1.6.2 The mid—region is the Rik and the air is the Saman. This Saman (i.e. the air) rests on that Rik (i.e. the mid—region). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. Sa is the mid—region, ama is the air; thus they (the mid—region and the air) are designated as Sama. 1.6.3 Heaven is the Ṛk, and the sun is the Sāma. This Sāma [called the sun] is based on the Ṛk [called heaven]. This is why Sāma scholars sing songs based on the Ṛk. Heaven is sā, and the sun is ama. Together they are Sāma. 1.6.4 The stars are the Rik and the moon is the Saman. This Saman (i.e. the moon) rests on that Rik (i.e. the stars). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. Sa is the stars, ama is the moon; thus they (the stars and the moon) are designated as Sama. 1.6.5 Now, the white radiance of the sun is the Rik and its blue intense darkness is the Saman. This Saman (i.e. the darkness) rests on that Rik (i.e. the radiance). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. 1.6.6, 1.6.7 Sa is the white radiance of the sun, ama is its blue intense darkness; thus they (the radiance and the darkness) are designated as Sama. Now, the golden person who is seen in the sun, who has a golden beard and golden hair, who is golden to the very tips of his nails—his eyes are like a lotus flower, red as the rump of a monkey. His name is Ut, for he has risen (udita) above all evil. He, too, who knows this rises above all evil. 1.6.8 The Ṛk and the Sāma are his two singers who sing in praise of this god. This is why he is called udgītha, and this is why a singer of the udgītha is called an udgātā. There are worlds above the solar region, but the god in the solar region rules over them [and also supports them]. He also decides the wishes of the gods and goddesses. This is from the standpoint of the gods and goddesses. Chapter VII — The Person in the Eye 1.7.1 Now with reference to the body: Speech is the Rik and the prana is the Saman. This Saman (the prana) rests on that Rik (speech). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. Sa is speech, ama is the prana; thus they (speech and the prana) are designated as Sama. 1.7.2 The eye is the Rik and the atman is the Saman. This Saman (the atman) rests on that Rik (speech). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. Sa is the eye, ama is the atman; thus they (the eye and the atman) are designated as Saman. 1.7.3 The ear is the Rik and the mind is the Saman. This Saman (the mind) rests on that Rik (the ear). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. Sa is the ear, ama is the mind; thus they (the ear and the mind) are designated as Sama. 1.7.4 Now, the white radiance of the eye is the Rik and its blue intense darkness is the Saman. This Saman (darkness) rests on that Rik (radiance). Therefore the Saman is sung, resting on the Rik. Sa is the white radiance of the eye, ama is its blue intense darkness; thus they (the radiance and the darkness) are designated as Sama. 1.7.5 Now, the person who is seen in the eye is the Rik, he is the Saman, he is the Uktha, he is the Yajus, he is Brahman. The form of this person in the eye is the same as the form of that person in the sun. The joints this person in the eye are the same as the joints of that person in the sun; the name of this one (Ut) is the same as the name of that one. 1.7.6 He is the lord of the worlds which spread beneath that (i.e. the eye) and also of all the wishes of men. Therefore all who sing to the vina sing of him and from him they obtain wealth. 1.7.7 He who, knowing this (i.e. the Udgitha), sings the Saman, sings both. Through that (i.e. the person in the sun) he obtains the world beyond that (i.e. the sun) and the wishes of the gods. 1.7.8, 1.7.9 Likewise, through this (i.e. the person in the eye), he obtains the worlds that spread beneath that (i.e. the eye) and all the wishes of men. Therefore an udgatri priest who knows this may say to the sacrificer for whom he acts as priest: “What desire of yours shall I fulfil by singing?” For he who, knowing this, sings the Saman is able to fulfil wishes through his singing of the Saman, yea, through his singing of the Saman. Chapter VIII — The Story of the Pravahana (I) 1.8.1 There were three men versed in the Udgitha: Silaka the son of Salavat, Chaikitayana of the line of Dalbhya and Pravahana the son of Jivala. They said: “We are indeed versed in the Udgitha. Let us have a discussion of the Udgitha.” 1.8.2 “Let it be so,” they said and sat down. Then Pravihana the son Jivala said: “Revered Sirs, you speak first and I shall listen to what the two brahmins have to say.” 1.8.3 Then Silaka the son of Salavat said to Chaikitayana of the line Dalbhya: “Well, may I question you?” “Do ask,” he said. 1.8.4, 1.8.5 “What is the support of the Saman?” “Tone (svara),” he replied. “What is the support of tone?” “The prana (vital breath),” he replied. “What is the support of the prana?” “Food,” he replied. “What is the support of food?” “Water,” he replied. “What is the support of water?” “Yonder world (heaven),” he replied. “What is the support of yonder world?” “Let no one carry the Saman beyond the heavenly world. We place the Saman in the heavenly world, for the Saman is praised as heaven.” 1.8.6 Then Silaka the son of Salavat said to Chaikitayana of the line of Dalbhya: “O Dalbhya your Saman is not firmly established. If at this time anyone who knew the support of the Saman were to say: ‘Your head shall fall off;’ surely your head would fall off.” 1.8.7 “Well then, revered Sir, let me learn it from you,” said Chaikitayana. “Learn it,” replied Silaka. “What is the support of that world?” “This world,” he replied. “What is the support of this world?” “Let no one carry the Saman beyond this world, which is its support. We place the Saman in this world as its support, for the Saman is praised as the support (i.e. this world).” 1.8.8 Then said Pravahana the son of Jivala: O son of Salavat, your Saman (i.e. this earth) has an end. If at this time anyone who knew the support of the Saman were to say: ‘Your head shall fall off,’ surely your head would fall off.” “Well then, let me learn this from you, revered Sir,” said Silaka. “Learn it,” said Pravahana. Chapter IX — The Story of Pravahana (II) 1.9.1 “What is the support of this world?” asked Silaka. “The akasa,” said Pravahana. “For all these beings are created from the akasa and return to the akasa. The akasa is greater than these; therefore the akasa is the supreme support.” 1.9.2 This is the Udgitha (Om), the most excellent; this is endless. He who, knowing this, meditates on the Udgitha obtains the most excellent life and wins the most excellent worlds. 1.9.3, 1.9.4 Atidhanvan the son of Sunaka, having taught this Udgitha to Udarasandilya, said: “As long as any of your descendants know this Udgitha, their life shall be the most excellent in this world and likewise in the other world.” He who thus knows the Udgitha and meditates on it—his life shall be the most excellent in this world and likewise in the other world, yea, the other world. Chapter X — The Story of Ushasti (I) 1.10.1 When the crops of the Kurus were destroyed by thunderstorms, Ushasti the son of Chakra, with his child—wife, lived in a deplorable condition in the village of a man who owned an elephant. 1.10.2 He (Ushasti) begged food from the owner of the elephant, who was eating some wretched beans. He (the owner of the elephant) said: “I have nothing but what is set before me.” 1.10.3 Ushasti said: “Give me these.” He gave the beans and said: “Here is some water left over from my drinking.” Ushasti said: “If I drink this, I will then be drinking what has been left by another.” 1.10.4 The owner of the elephant said: “Were not those beans also left over and therefore unclean?” Ushasti replied: “I should not have lived if I had not eaten them; but I can get water wherever I like.” 1.10.5 Having himself eaten, Ushasti gave his wife what was left. But she, having eaten before, took them (i.e. the beans) and put them away. 1.10.6 Next morning, on awaking, he said: “Alas, if I could get even little a to eat, I might earn some money. The king over here is going to perform a sacrifice; he would choose me for all the priestly offices.” 1.10.7 His wife said to him: “Here, my husband, are the beans.” After eating them, he went to the sacrifice that was about to be performed. 1.10.8 He saw there the assembled udgatri priests and sat near them in place where they would sing the hymns. He said to the prastotri priest: 1.10.9 “O prastotri priest, if without knowing the deity that belongs to Prastiva, you sing the Prastiva, your head will fall off.” 1.10.10, 1.10.11 In the same manner he addressed the udgatri priest: “O udgatri priest, if without knowing the deity that belongs to the Udgitha, you sing the Udgitha, your head will fall off.” In the same manner he addressed the pratihartri priest: “O pratihartri priest, if without knowing the deity that belongs to the Pratihara, you sing the Pratihara, your head will fall off.” They all stopped performing their duties and sat in silence. Chapter XI — The Story of Ushasti (II) 1.11.1 The sacrificer said to him (Ushasti): “I should like to know who you are, revered Sir.” “I am Ushasti the son of Chakra,” he replied. 1.11.2 He (the sacrificer) said: “Revered Sir, I looked for you to perform all these priestly offices, but not finding you, Sir, I have chosen others.” 1.11.3 “But now, Sir, please take up all the priestly offices.” “So be it,” said Ushasti, “but let these priests, with my permission, sing the hymns of praise. You will, however, give me as much wealth as you give them.” “So be it,” said the sacrificer. 1.11.4 Thereupon the prastotri priest approached him and said: “Sir, you said to me: ‘O prastotri priest, if without knowing the deity that belongs to the Prastava, you sing the Prastava, your head will fall off.’ Which is that deity?” 1.11.5 Ushasti said: “The prana is that deity. For all these beings merge in the prana alone and from the prana alone do they rise. This is deity which belongs to the Prastava. If without knowing him you chanted the Prastava after having been cursed by me, your head would have fallen off.” 1.11.6 Then the udgatri priest approached him and said: “Sir, you said to me: ‘O udgatri priest, if without knowing the deity that belongs to the Udgitha, you sing the Udgitha, your head will fall off.’ Which is that deity?” 1.11.7 Ushasti said: “The sun is that deity. For all these beings praise the sun which is high up. This is the deity which belongs to the Udgitha. If without knowing him you had chanted the Udgitha after having been cursed by me, your head would have fallen off.” 1.11.8 Then the pratihartri priest approached him and said: “Sir, you said to me: ‘O pratihartri priest, if without knowing the deity that belongs to the Pratihara, you sing the Pratihara, your head will fall off.’ Which is that deity?” 1.11.9 Ushasti said: “Food is that deity. For all these beings take food and live. This is the deity that belongs to the Pratihara. If without knowing him you had chanted the Pratihara after having been cursed by me, your head would have fallen off.” Chapter XII — The Udgitha of the Dogs 1.12.1 Now follows the Udgitha of the dogs: One day, Vaka the son of Dalbhya, or as he was also called, Glava son of Mitra, went forth to study the Vedas. 1.12.2 A white dog appeared before him. Other dogs, gathering around, said to him (i.e. the white dog): “Revered Sir, please sing for us, so we may obtain food; we are hungry.” 1.12.3 He (the white dog) said to them: “Come to me here tomorrow morning.” Vaka the son of Dalbhya, or as he was also called, Glava son of Mitra, kept watch. 1.12.4 Just as the priests move along, holding to one another, when they are about to sing praises with the Vahishpavamana hymn, so did the dogs move along. Then they sat down and uttered the syllable Him. 1.12.5 Om. Let us eat! Om. Let us drink! Om. Let the sun, who is the luminous deity (deva), the giver of rain (Varuna), the lord of creatures (Prajapati), bring food here! Now a prayer to the sun: O lord of food, bring food here, bring it here. Om. Chapter XIII — The Mystical Meaning of the Stobha Syllables 1.13.1 This Earth is verily the syllable hau; the air is the syllable hai; the moon is the syllable atha; the self is the syllable iha; the fire is the syllable i. 1.13.2 The sun is the syllable u; the invocation is the syllable e; the Visve—devas are the syllable au—ho—i; Prajapati is the syllable him; the prana the syllable svara; food is the syllable ya; Virat is the syllable vak. 1.13.3 Indefinable is the thirteenth stobha, namely, the variable syllable hum. 1.13.4 To him who knows this secret knowledge of the Samans, speech yields milk and milk is speech. He becomes the possessor of food and the eater of food—he who knows this, yea, he who knows this. Part Two Chapter 1 — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman (I) 2.1.1 Om. Meditation on the whole of the Saman is good. Whatever is good, people say it is Saman; and whatever is not good, people say it is not Saman. 2.1.2 Thus people say: “He approached him with Saman,” that is to say, “He approached him in a becoming manner.” Again they say: “He approached him without Saman,” that is to say, “He approached him in an unbecoming manner.” 2.1.3 And they also say: “Truly this is Saman for us,” that is to say, “It is good for us,” when it is good. Again, they say: “Truly this is not Saman for us,” that is to say, “It is not good for us,” when it is not good. 2.1.4 He who, knowing this, meditates on the Saman as good—all good qualities will approach him quickly, ay, they will accrue to him. Chapter II — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman (II) 2.2.1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman as the five worlds. The syllable Him is the earth, the Prastava fire, the Udgitha the sky, the Pratihara the sun, the Nidhana heaven. This is with reference to the ascending order. 2.2.2 Now with reference to the descending order: The syllable Him is heaven, the Prastava the sun, the Udgitha the sky, the Pratihara fire, the Nidhana the earth. 2.2.3 The worlds in the ascending and descending orders belong to him who, knowing this, meditates on the fivefold Saman as the worlds. Chapter III — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman as Rain 2.3.1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman as rain. The syllable Him is the wind that blows from the east, the Prastava is the cloud that forms, the Udgitha is what rains, the Pratihara is the lightning and the thunder. 2.3.2 The Nidhana is the cessation. It rains for him whenever he desires and he brings rain for others even when there is no rain who, knowing this, meditates on the fivefold Saman as rain. Chapter IV — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman as Water 2.4.1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman in all the waters. When the clouds gather, that is the syllable Him; when it rains, that the Prastava; the rivers which flow to the east, these are the Udgitha; the rivers which flow to the west, these are the Pratihara; the ocean is Nidhana. 2.4.2 He does not die in water and he becomes rich in water who, knowing this, meditates on the fivefold Saman in all the waters. Chapter V — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman as the Seasons 2.5.1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman as the seasons. The syllable Him is the spring, the Prastava the summer, the Udgitha the rainy season, the Pratihara the autumn, the Nidhana the winter. 2.5.2 The seasons belong to him and he becomes rich in seasons who, knowing this, meditates on the fivefold Saman as the seasons. Chapter VI — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman in Animals 2.6.1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman in animals. The syllable Him is goats, the Prastava sheep, the Udgitha cows, the Pratihara horses, the Nidhana man. 2.6.2 Animals belong to him as objects of enjoyment and he becomes rich in animals who, knowing this, meditates on the fivefold Saman in animals. Chapter VII — Meditation on the Fivefold Saman as the Senses 2.7.1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman, which is the most excellent, as the pranas (senses). The syllable Him is smell (i.e. the nose), the Prastava speech (the tongue), the Udgitha sight (the eye), the Pratihara hearing (the ear), the Nidhana the mind. These are each greater than the preceding. 2.7.2 The most excellent objects belong to him, nay, he conquers the most excellent worlds who, knowing this, meditates on the fivefold Saman, which is the most excellent, as the senses. Chapter VIII — Meditation on the Sevenfold Saman in Speech 2.8.1 Now for the sevenfold Saman: One should meditate on the sevenfold Saman in speech. When there is the syllable Hum in speech, that is the syllable Him; likewise Pra is the Prastava, A is the Adi. 2.8.2 Ud is the Udgitha, Pra the Pratihara, Upa the Upadrava, Ni the Nidhana. 2.8.3 For him speech yields milk, which is the milk of speech and he becomes rich in food and the eater of food who, knowing this, meditates on the sevenfold Saman in speech. Chapter IX — Meditation on the Sevenfold Saman as the Sun 2.9.1 One should meditate on the sevenfold Saman as yonder sun. The sun is the Saman because he is always the same (sama). He is the Saman because he makes everyone cherish the same thought: “He faces me,” “He faces me.” 2.9.2 One should know that all beings depend upon him (i.e. the sun). What he is before his rising is the syllable Him. The animals depend upon it (i.e. Him). Therefore the animals say “Him” before the sunrise, for they partake of the syllable Him of the Saman (sun). 2.9.3 What he (the sun) is just after he has risen, that is the Prastava. Men depend upon it. Therefore men love praise (prastuti) and eulogy, for they partake of the Prastava of that Saman. 2.9.4 What he is when the rays go forth, that is the Adi. Birds depend upon It. Therefore birds hold themselves without support in the sky and fly about, for they partake of the Adi of that Saman. 2.9.5 What he is just at midday, that is the Udgitha. The devas (gods) are dependent upon it. Therefore they are the best of the offspring of Prajapati, for they partake of the Udgitha of that Sa man. 2.9.6 What he is after midday and before afternoon, that is the Pratihara. The foetuses depend upon it. Therefore they are held in the womb after being conceived and do not fall, for they partake of the Pratihara of the Saman. 2.9.7 What he is after the afternoon and before sunset, that is the Upadrava. The animals of the forest depend upon it. Therefore they run (upadravanti) to the forest and their caves when they see a man, for partake of the Upadrava of that Saman. 2.9.8 What he is just after the sunset, that is the Nidhana. The Manes depend upon it. Therefore they put them (i.e. the Manes) down (nidadhati), for they partake of the Nidhana of that Saman. Thus a man meditates on the sevenfold Saman as the sun. Chapter X — Meditation on the Sevenfold Saman through the Number of Syllables 2.10.1 Next one should meditate on the sevenfold Saman which has a uniform number of syllables and which leads beyond death: The word Himkara has three syllables, the word Prastava has three syllables. Hence they are equal (sama). 2.10.2 The word Adi has two syllables and the word Pratihara has four syllables. If we take one syllable from Pratihara and join to Adi, they become equal (sama). 2.10.3, 2.10.4 The word Udgitha has three syllables and the word Upadrava has four syllables. With three and three syllables they should be equal. One syllable being left out, it becomes trisyllabic. Hence the equality (sama). The word Nidhana has three syllables; therefore it is equal. These make twenty—two syllables of the sevenfold Saman. 2.10.5 With twenty—one syllables he reaches the sun; for the sun is the twenty—first from here. With the twenty—second he conquers what is beyond the sun; that plane is blessed and free from grief. 2.10.6 He obtains here victory over the sun (death); and to him comes victory higher than the victory over the sun who, knowing this, meditates on the sevenfold Saman which has a uniform number syllables and which leads beyond death, yea, who meditates upon the sevenfold Saman. Chapter XI — Meditation on the Gayatra Saman 2.11.1 The syllable Him is the mind, the Prastava speech, the Udgitha sight, the Pratihara hearing, the Nidhana breath (the prana). This is the Gayatra Saman, as interwoven in the five pranas. 2.11.2 He who thus knows this Gayatra Saman interwoven in the pranas preserves his sense—organs intact, reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him who meditates on the Gayatra Saman the injunction is: “Be high—minded.” Chapter XII — Meditation on the Rathantara Sama 2.12.1 The rubbing of the fire—sticks is the syllable Him; the rising of smoke is the Prastava; the burning is the Udgitha; the forming of embers is the Pratihara; the going out is the Nidhana. This is the Rathantara Saman as interwoven in fire. 2.12.2 He who thus knows this Rathantara Saman as interwoven in fire becomes radiant with the light of Brahman and endowed with a good appetite; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do sip water or spit before the fire.” Chapter XIII — Meditation on the Vamadevya Saman 2.13.1 A man’s beckoning to a woman is the syllable Him; his gratifying her is the Prastava; his lying with her is the Pratihara; his spending time with her is the Nidhana; and the finishing of the sexual act is also the Nidhana. This is the Vamadevya Saman as interwoven in sexual intercourse. 2.13.2 He who thus knows the Vamadevya Saman as interwoven in sexual intercourse does not suffer from the pang of separation and procreates from every intercourse; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do not reject a woman who comes to you seeking intercourse”. Chapter XIV — Meditation on the Brihat Saman 2.14.1 The rising of the sun is the syllable Him; the risen sun is the Prastava; the midday sun is the Udgitha; the afternoon sun is Pratihara; the setting sun is the Nidhana. This is the Brihat Saman as interwoven in the sun. 2.14.2 He who thus knows the Brihat Saman as interwoven in the becomes radiant and endowed with a good appetite; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do not decry the burning sun.” Chapter XV — Meditation on the Vairupa Saman 2.15.1 The gathering of the mists is the syllable Him; the forming of clouds is the Prastava; the raining is the Udgitha; the flashing and thundering are the Pratihara; the ceasing of the rain is the Nidhana. This is the Vairupa Saman as interwoven in the clouds. 2.15.2 He who thus knows the Vairupa Saman as interwoven in the clouds obtains cattle of various forms and of beautiful form; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do not decry the rain.” Chapter XVI — Meditation on the Vairaja Saman 2.16.1 The syllable Him is the spring, the Prastava the summer, the Udgitha the rainy season, the Pratihara the autumn, the Nidhana the winter. This is the Vairaja Saman as interwoven in the seasons. 2.16.2 He who thus knows the Vairaja Saman as interwoven in the seasons shines through children, cattle and the light of Brahman; he reach the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do not decry the seasons.” Chapter XVII — Meditation on the Sakvari Saman 2.17.1 The syllable Him is the earth, the Prastava the sky, the Udgitha heaven, the Pratihara the quarters, the Nidhana the sea. This is the Sakvari Saman as interwoven in the worlds. 2.17.2 He who thus knows the Sakvari Saman as interwoven in the worlds becomes the possessor of the worlds; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do not decry the worlds.” Chapter XVIII — Meditation on the Revati Saman 2.18.1 The syllable Him is goats, the Prastava sheep, the Udgitha cows, the Pratihara horses, the Nidhana man. This is the Revati Saman interwoven in animals. 2.18.2 He who thus knows these Revati Samans as interwoven in animals becomes the possessor of animals; he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “Do not decry animals.” Chapter XIX — Meditation on the Yajnayajniya Saman 2.19.1 The syllable Him is hair, the Prastava skin, the Udgitha flesh, the Pratihara bone, the Nidhana marrow. This is the Yajnayajniya Saman as interwoven in the members of the body. 2.19.2 He who thus knows the Yajnayajniya Saman as interwoven in the members of the body becomes possessed of limbs; he is not crippled in any limb, he reaches the full length of life, lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. For him the injunction is: “For one year do not eat meat” or ”Do not eat meat at all.” Chapter XX — Meditation on the Rajana Saman 2.20.1 The syllable Him is fire, the Prastava air, the Udgitha the sun, the Pratihara the stars, the Nidhana the moon. This is the Rajana Saman as interwoven in the gods. 2.20.2 He who thus knows the Rajana Saman as interwoven in the gods obtains the same world as the gods, acquires the same prosperity as theirs and realizes union with them; he reaches the full length of lives brightly, becomes great in children and cattle, great in fame. him the injunction is: “Do not decry the brahmins.” Chapter XXI — Meditation on the Saman as Interwoven in Everything 2.21.1 The syllable Him is the three Vedas; the Prastava is these three worlds; the Udgitha is fire (Agni), air (Vayu) and the sun (Aditya); the Pratihara is the stars, the birds and the rays; the Nidhana is the serpents, the gandharvas and the Manes. This is the Saman as interwoven in everything. 2.21.2 He who thus knows this Saman as interwoven in everything becomes everything. 2.21.3 On this there is the following verse: “There are the fivefold three. Greater than these or besides these there is nothing.” 2.21.4 He who knows this, knows everything. All regions bring him gifts. Chapter XXII — The different notes employed in the Chanting of the Saman 2.22.1 An Udgatri priest thinks thus: “I choose the deep—sounding note of the Saman, which is good for the cattle and which belongs to fire (Agni). The undefined note belongs to Prajapati, the defined note to Soma (the moon), the soft and smooth note to Vayu (the air), the smooth and strong note to Indra, the heron—like note to Brihaspati and dull note to Varuna.” Let a man cultivate all these, avoiding, however, the note of Varuna. 2.22.2 A man should sing, wishing that by his song he may secure immortality for the gods: “May I obtain by my song oblations (svadha) for the Manes, hope for men, grass and water for cattle, heaven for the sacrificer and food for myself.” Thus reflecting on all these in his mind, he (the udgatri priest) should chant the praises without making mistakes in pronunciation etc. 2.22.3 All vowels belong to the different parts of Indra’s body, all sibilants to Prajapati, all consonants to Mrityu (death). If someone should reprove him (i.e. the udgatri priest who knows this) regarding the pronunciation of vowels, let him say: “I went to Indra for my refuge when pronouncing my vowels. He will answer you.” 2.22.4 And if someone should reprove him for his sibilants, let him say: “I went to Prajapati for my refuge. He will smash you.” And if someone should reprove him for his consonants, let him say” I went to Mrityu for my refuge. He will burn you to ashes.” 2.22.5 All vowels should be pronounced with resonance and strength and with the thought on the part of the singer: “May I impart strength to Indra (the prana).” All the sibilants should be pronounced full—without being swallowed or thrown out and with the thought: “May I give myself to Prajapati.” All consonants should be pronounced slowly and without mixing them with the others and with the thought: “May I withdraw myself from death.” Chapter XXIII — Praise of Om Unassociated with any Ritual 2.23.1 There are three divisions of dharma: Sacrifice, study and charity form the first. Austerity is the second. Dwelling in the house of the teacher as a brahmacharin, always mortifying the body in the house of the teacher, is the third. All those who practise these dharmas attain the worlds of the virtuous. But one who is established in Brahman obtains Immortality. 2.23.2 Prajapati brooded on the worlds. From them, thus brooded upon, there was revealed in his heart the threefold knowledge. He brooded on it and from it, thus brooded upon, there issued forth these syllables: Bhuh, Bhuvah and Svah. 2.23.3 He brooded on them (the three syllables) and from them, thus brooded upon, there issued forth Om. As all leaves are held together by a midrib, so is all speech held together by Om (brahman). Om is all thus, yea, On is all this. Chapter XXIV — The Different Planes attained by the Sacrificer 2.24.1, 2.24.2 The expounders of Brahman (i.e. the Vedas) ask: “Since the morning oblation belongs to the Vasus, the midday oblation to the Rudras and the third (i.e. evening) oblation to the Adityas and the Visve—devas, “Where, then, is the world of the sacrificer?” He who does not know this, how can he perform the sacrifice? Only he who knows should perform it. 2.24.3, 2.24.4 Before beginning the morning chant, the sacrificer, sitting behind the Garhapatya Fire and facing the north, sings the Saman addressed to the Vasus: “O Fire! Open the door of the earth—world. Let us see thee, that we may rule this earth. 2.24.5, 2.24.6 Then the sacrificer offers an oblation, reciting thus: “Adoration to Agni, who dwells in the earth—world! Secure this world for me, the sacrificer. That is the world for the sacrificer. “I, the sacrificer, will go thither when this life is over. Svaha!” Afterwards the sacrificer chants: “Cast away the bolt of the earth—world.” Having said this, he rises. To him the Vasus offer the world connected with the morning oblation. 2.24.7, 2.24.8 Before beginning the midday oblation, the sacrificer, sitting behind the Dakshina Fire and facing the north, sings the Saman addressed to the Rudras: “O Fire! Open the door of the sky—world. Let us see thee, that we may rule wide in the sky—world.” 2.24.9, 2.24.10 Then the sacrificer offers an oblation, reciting thus: “Adoration to Vayu, who dwells in the sky—world! Secure this world for me, the sacrificer. That is the world for the sacrificer. “I, the sacrificer, will go thither when this life is over. Svaha!” Afterwards the sacrificer chants: “Cast away the bolt of the sky—world.” Having said this, he rises. To him the Rudras offer the world connected with the midday oblation. 2.24.11, 2.24.12, 2.24.13 Before beginning the third (i.e. evening) oblation, the sacrificer, sitting behind the Ahavaniya Fire and facing the north, sings the two Samans addressed to the Adityas and the Visve— devas: “O Fire! Open the door of the heaven—world. Let us see thee, that we may rule supreme in heaven.” This is addressed to the Adityas. Next the Saman addressed to the Visve—devas: “O Fire! Open the door of the heaven—world. Let us see thee, that we may rule supreme in heaven.” 2.24.14, 2.24.15 Then the sacrificer offers an oblation, reciting thus: “Adoration to Adityas and the Visve—devas, who dwell in the heaven— world! Secure this world for me, the sacrificer. That is the world for the sacrificer. “I, the sacrificer, will go thither when this life is over. Svaha! Afterwards the sacrificer chants: “Cast away the bolt of the heaven—world.” Having said this, he rises. 2.24.16 To him the Adityas and the Visve—devas offer the world connected with the third oblation. He (the sacrificer) who knows this knows the measure of the sacrifice, yea, he knows it. Part Three Chapter I — The Honey—Doctrine (Rig—Veda) 3.1.1 Yonder sun is, verily, the honey of the gods. Heaven is the cross—beam. The mid—region is the hive. The particles of water—vapours drawn by the sun through its rays are the eggs. 3.1.2, 3.1.3 The eastern rays of the sun are the eastern honey—cells. The Rik—verses are the bees. The ritual laid down in the Rig— Veda is the flower. The water of the sacrificial libations is the nectar of the flower. These Riks heated the Rig—Veda. From it, thus heated, issued forth—as its essence—fame, radiance of the body, vigour of the senses, virility and the food that is eaten. 3.1.4 That essence flowed forth and went toward the sun and that forms what is called the red colour of the rising sun. Chapter II — The Honey—Doctrine (Yajur—Veda) 3.2.1 The southern rays of the sun are the southern honey—cells. The Yajus—verses are the bees. The ritual laid down in the Yajur— Veda is the flower. The water of the sacrificial libation is the nectar of the flower. 3.2.2 These Yajus—verses heated the Yajur—Veda. From it, thus heated, issued forth—as its essence—fame, radiance of the body, vigour of the senses, virility and the food that is eaten. 3.2.3 That essence flowed forth and went toward the sun. That forms what is called the white colour of the sun. Chapter III — The Honey—Doctrine (Sama—Veda) 3.3.1 The western rays of the sun are the western honey—cells. The Saman—verses are the bees. The Sama—Veda is the flower. The water is the nectar. 3.3.2 The Samans heated the Sama—Veda. From it, thus heated, issued forth—as its essence—fame, radiance, vigour of the senses, virility and the food that is eaten. 3.3.3 That flowed forth and went toward the sun. called the dark colour of the sun. Chapter IV — The Honey—Doctrine (Atharva—Veda) 3.4.1 The northern rays of the sun are the northern honey—cells. The verses of the Atharvangirasa are the bees. The Itihasa—purana is the flower. The water is the nectar. 3.4.2 These very hymns of the Atharvangirasa heated the Itihasa— purana. From it, thus heated, issued forth—as its essence— fame, radiance, vigour of the senses, virility and the food that is eaten. 3.4.3 That flowed forth and went toward the sun. That forms what is called the extremely dark colour of the sun. Chapter V — The Honey—Doctrine (Continued) 3.5.1 Now, the upward rays of the sun are the honey—cells above. The secret teachings of the Upanishads are the bees. Brahman (Om) is flower. The water is the nectar. 3.5.2 These secret teachings as the bees heated Brahman (Om). From It, thus heated, issued forth—as Its essence—fame, radiance, vigour of the senses, virility and the food that is eaten. 3.5.3 That flowed forth and went towards the sun. That forms what appears to stir in the centre of the sun. 3.5.4 These different colours in the sun are the essences of the essences; for the Vedas are the essences and these colours are, again, their essences. These are the nectars of the nectars; for the Vedas are the nectars (i.e. immortal) and of them these colours in the sun are the nectars. Chapter VI — Meditation on the Vasus 3.6.1 On the first of these nectars the Vasus live, with Agni (fire) at their head. Truly, the gods do not eat or drink. They are satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. 3.6.2 They retire into that red colour and rise up from that colour. 3.6.3 He who thus knows this nectar becomes one of the Vasus, with Agni (fire) at their head; he is satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. He retires into that red colour and again rises up from that colour. 3.6.4 As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, so long does he, like the Vasus, enjoy rulership and sovereignty. Chapter VII — Meditation on the Rudras 3.7.1 On the second of these nectars the Rudras live, with Indra at their head. Truly, the gods do not eat or drink. They are satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. 3.7.2 They retire into that white colour and rise up from that colour. 3.7.3 He who thus knows this nectar becomes one of the Rudras, with Indra at their head; he is satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. He retires into that white colour and again rises up from that colour. 3.7.4 As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, twice as long does it rise in the south and set in the north and just so long does he, like the Rudras, enjoy rulership and sovereignty. Chapter VIII — Meditation on the Adityas 3.8.1 On the third of these nectars the Adityas live, with Varuna at their head. Truly, the gods do not eat or drink. They are satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. 3.8.2 They retire into that dark colour and rise up from that colour. 3.8.3 He who thus knows this nectar becomes one of the Adityas, with Varuna at their head; he is satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. He returns into that dark colour and again rises up from that colour. 3.8.4 As long as the sun rises in the south and sets in the north, twice as long does it rise in the west and set in the east and just so long does he, like the Adityas, enjoy rulership and sovereignty. Chapter IX — Meditation on the Maruts 3.9.1 On the fourth of these nectars the Maruts live, with Soma at their head. Truly, the gods do not eat or drink. They are satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. 3.9.2 They retire into that extremely dark colour and rise up from that colour. 3.9.3 He who thus knows this nectar becomes one of the Maruts, with Soma at their head; he is satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. He retires into that extremely dark colour and again rises up from that colour. 3.9.4 As long as the sun rises in the west and sets in the east, twice as long does it rise in the north and set in the south and just so long does he, like the Maruts, enjoy rulership and sovereignty. Chapter X — Meditation on the Sadhyas 3.10.1 On the fifth of these nectars the Sadhyas live, with Brahma at their head. Truly, the gods do not eat or drink. They are satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. 3.10.2 Thy retire into that form and rise up from that form. 3.10.3 He who knows this nectar becomes one of the Sadhyas, with Brahma at their head; he is satisfied by merely looking at the nectar. He retires into that form and again rises up from that form. 3.10.4 As long as the sun rises in the north and sets in the south, twice as long does it rise above and set below and just so long does he, like the Sadhyas, enjoy rulership and sovereignty. Chapter XI — The Result of the Meditation on the Honey 3.11.1 Now, after having risen thence upwards, it (i.e. the sun) rises and sets no more. It remains alone in the centre. And on this there is the following verse: 3.11.2 “There (i.e. in Brahmaloka) the sun neither rises nor sets at any time. O ye gods, if this is true, may I never fall from Brahman!” 3.11.3 Verily, for him who thus knows this Brahma—Upanishad, the sun does not rise or set. For him it is day for ever. 3.11.4 This doctrine Brahma told to Prajapati, Prajapati to Manu, Manu to his offspring. And to Uddalaka Aruni this doctrine of Brahman was narrated by his father. 3.11.5 A father may therefore tell that doctrine of Brahman to his eldest son to a worthy disciple. 3.11.6 It must not be told to anyone else, even if he should offer one the whole sea—girt earth, full of treasure; for this doctrine is worth more an that, yea, it is worth more. Chapter XII — Meditation on the Gayatri 3.12.1 The gayatri is everything, whatever here exists. Speech is verily the Gayatri, for speech sings forth (gaya—ti) and protects (traya—te) everything, whatever here exists. 3.12.2 That Gayatri is also the earth; for everything that exists here rests on this earth and does not go beyond. 3.12.3 In man, that Gayatri is also the body; for the pranas exist in this body and do not go beyond. 3.12.4 That body, in man, is again the heart within a man; for the pranas exist in it and do not go beyond. 3.12.5 That Gayatri has four feet and is sixfold. The same is also declared by a Rik—verse: 3.12.6 “Such is its greatness (i.e. of Brahman as known through the symbol of the Gayatri). Greater than it is the Person (Brahman). One of Its feet covers all beings; the immortal three feet are in heaven (i.e. in Itself) 3.12.7, 3.12.8, 3.12.9 The Brahman which has been thus described is the same as the physical akasa outside a person. The akasa which is outside a person is the same as that which is inside a person. The akasa which is inside a person is the akasa within the heart. The akasa which is within the heart is omnipresent and unchanging. He who knows this obtains full and unchanging prosperity. Chapter XIII — Meditation on the Door—Keepers 3.13.1 Of that heart there are five doors controlled by the devas. That which is the eastern door is the prana—that is the eye, that is Aditya (the sun). One should meditate on that as brightness and the source of food. He who knows this becomes bright and an eater of food. 3.13.2 That which is the southern gate is the vyana—that is the ear, that is Chandrama (the moon). One should meditate on that as prosperity and fame. He who knows this becomes prosperous and famous. 3.13.3 That which is the western gate is the apana—that is speech, that is Agni (fire). One should meditate on that as the radiance of Brahman and the source of food. He who knows this becomes radiant and an eater of food. 3.13.4 That which is the northern gate is the samana—that is the mind, that is Parjanya (the rain—god). One should meditate on that as fame and beauty. He who knows this becomes famous and beautiful. 3.13.5 That which is the upper gate is the udana—that is Vayu, that is the akasa. One should meditate on that as strength and greatness. He who knows this becomes strong and great. 3.13.6 These are the five servants of Brahman, the door—keepers of the world of heaven. He who thus knows these five servants of Brahman, the door—keepers of the world of heaven—in his family a hero is born. He who thus knows the five servants of Brahman, the door—keepers of the world of heaven, himself attains the world of heaven. 3.13.7, 3.13.8 Now, the light which shines above this heaven, above all the worlds, above everything, in the highest worlds not excelled by any other worlds, that is the same light which is within man. There is this visible of this light: when we thus perceive by touch the warmth in the body. And of it we have this audible proof: when we thus hear, by covering the ears, what is like the rumbling of a carriage, or the bellowing of an ox, or the sound of a blazing fire. One should worship as Brahman that inner light which is seen and heard. He who knows becomes conspicuous and celebrated, yea, he becomes celebrated. Chapter XIV — The Sandilya Doctrine 3.14.1 All this is Brahman. From It the universe comes forth, in It the universe merges and in It the universe breathes. Therefore a man should meditate on Brahman with a calm mind. Now, verily, a man consists of will. As he wills in this world, so does he become when he has departed hence. Let him with this knowledge in mind form his will. 3.14.2, 3.14.3 He who consists of the mind, whose body is subtle, whose form is light, whose thoughts are true, whose nature is like the akasa, whose creation in this universe, who cherishes all righteous desires, who contains all pleasant odours, who is endowed with all tastes, who embraces all this, who never speaks and who is without longing— He is my Self within the heart, smaller than a grain of rice, smaller than a grain of barley, smaller than a mustard seed, smaller than a grain of millet; He is my Self within the heart, greater than the earth, greater than the mid—region, greater than heaven, greater than all these worlds. 3.14.4 He whose creation is this universe, who cherishes all desires, who contains all odours, who is endowed with all tastes, who embraces all this, who never speaks and who is without longing—He is my Self within the heart, He is that Brahman. When I shall have departed hence I shall certainly reach Him: one who has this faith and has no doubt will certainly attain to that Godhead. Thus said Sandilya, yea, thus he said. Chapter XV — Meditation on the Universe as a Chest 3.15.1 The chest of the universe, with the mid—region for its inside and the earth for its bottom, does not decay. The quarters are its different corners and heaven is its lid, which is above. This chest is the storehouse of treasures. Inside it are all things. 3.15.2 The eastern quarter is called Juhu, the southern quarter Sahamana, the western quarter Rajni and the northern quarter Subhuta. Vayu the air is their child. He who knows this Vayu as the child of the quarters never weeps for his sons. I know the air to be the child of the quarters; may I never weep for my sons. 3.15.3 I take refuge in the imperishable chest with this one and this one and this one. I take refuge in the prana with this one and this one and this one. I take refuge in Bhuh with this one and this one and this one. I take refuge in Bhuvah with this one and this one and this one. I take refuge Svah with this one and this one and this one. 3.15.4 When I said: “I take refuge in the prana,” prana meant everything that exists here—in that I take refuge. 3.15.5 When I said: “I take refuge in Bhuh,” what I really said was: “I refuge in the earth, the mid—region and heaven.” 3.15.6 Then I said: “I take refuge in Bhuvah,” what I said was: “I take in fire, the air and the sun.” 3.15.7 When I said: “I take refuge in Svah,” what I said was: “I take refuge in the Rig—Veda, Yajur—Veda and Sama—Veda.” That is what I said, yea, that is what I said. Chapter XVI — Man as a Sacrifice (I) 3.16.1 A person, indeed, is a sacrifice. His first twenty—four years constitute the morning libation. The Gayatri metre has twenty—four syllables and the morning libation is offered with Gayatri hymns. The Vasus are connected with that part of the sacrifice. The pranas are the Vasus; for, verily, they make everything abide (visayanti) in this body. 3.16.2 If anything ails him during that period, he should recite the following mantra: “O ye pranas, ye Vasus, unite this morning libation with the midday libation. May I, who am a sacrifice, not disappear in the midst of the pranas, who are the Vasus.” Thus he rises from his illness and becomes free of it. 3.16.3 His next forty—four years constitute the midday libation. The Tristubh metre has forty—four syllables and the midday libation is offered with Tristubh hymns. The Rudras are connected with that part of the sacrifice. The pranas are the Rudras; for, verily, they make everything weep (rodayanti). 3.16.4 If anything ails him during that second period, he should recite the following mantra: “O ye pranas, ye Rudras, unite this midday libation with the third libation. May I, who am a sacrifice, not disappear in the midst of the pranas, who are the Rudras.” Thus he rises from his illness and becomes free of it. 3.16.5 His next forty—eight years constitute the third oblation. The Jagati metre has forty—eight syllables and the third oblation is offered with Jagati hymns. The Adityas are connected with that part of the sacrifice. The pranas are the Adityas; for, verily, they take up (adadate) every—thing. 3.16.6 If anything ails him during that third period, he should recite the following mantra: “O ye pranas, ye Adityas, extend this my third libation to the full age. May I, who am a sacrifice, not disappear in the midst of the pranas, who are the Adityas.” Thus he rises from his illness and becomes free of it. 3.16.7 Mahidasa, the son of Itara, knew this and said addressing a disease: “O you disease! Why do you afflict me? I shall not die of this pain” He lived a hundred and sixteen years. He, too, who knows this lives on to a hundred and sixteen years. Chapter XVII — Man as a Sacrifice (II) 3.17.1 When a man hungers, thirsts and abstains from pleasures— these are his initiatory rites. 3.17.2 When he eats, drinks and enjoys pleasures, he then participates in Upasadas. 3.17.3 When a man laughs, eats and enjoys sexual intercourse—these are Stuta and Sastra. 3.17.4 Austerity, almsgiving, uprightness, non—violence and truthfulness—these are the gifts (dakshina) for the priests. 3.17.5 Because the life of a man is a sacrifice therefore they say that his mother will give birth (soshyati) to him, or his mother has given birth (asoshta) to him. The same words are used in the Soma—sacrifice and mean: “He will pour out the Soma— juice” and “He has poured out the Soma—juice.” This is his birth. His death is the Avabhritha. 3.17.6 Ghora, of the line of Angirasa, communicated this teaching to Krishna, the son of Devaki—and it quenched Krishna’s thirst for any other knowledge—and said: “When a man approaches death he should take refuge in these three thoughts: ‘Thou art indestructible (akshata),’ ‘Thou art unchanging (aprachyuta),’ and ‘Thou art the subtle prana.’ “On this subject there are two Rik—verses: 3.17.7 “They (i.e. the knowers of Brahman) see everywhere the Supreme Light, which shines in Brahman, which is all— pervading like the light of day and which belongs to the primeval Seed. ‘Perceiving the higher light in the sun—which is above the darkness of ignorance—as the higher light in the heart, perceiving the Supreme Light which is higher than all lights, we have reached the Highest Light, the Sun, the most luminous among the gods, yea, we have reached the Highest Light, the Sun, the most luminous among the gods.” Chapter XVIII – The Mind and the Akasa as Symbols of Brahman 3.18.1 One should meditate on the mind as Brahman—this is said with reference to the body. One should meditate on the akasa as Brahman—this is to said with reference to the gods. Thus both—the meditation with reference to the body and the meditation with reference to the gods—are being taught. 3.18.2 That Brahman has four feet (quarters): speech is one foot, the prana (the nose) is one foot, the eye is one foot, the ear is one foot—this is to said with reference to the body. Now with reference to the gods: Agni (fire) is one foot, Vayu (air) is one foot, Aditya (the sun) is one foot and the quarters (disah) are one foot. This is the twofold meditation with reference to the body and with reference to the gods. 3.18.3 Speech is, indeed, a fourth foot (quarter) of Brahman of which the mind is a symbol. It shines and warms with the light of fire. He who knows this shines and warms with fame, with renown and with the radiance of Brahman. 3.18.4 Prana (the nose) is, indeed, a fourth foot of Brahman. It shines and warms with the light of the air. He who knows this shines and warms with fame, with renown and with the radiance of Brahman. 3.18.5 The eye, indeed, is a fourth foot of Brahman. It shines and warms with the light of the sun. He who knows this shines and warms with fame, with renown and with the radiance of Brahman. 3.18.6 The ear, indeed, is a fourth foot of Brahman. It shines and warms with the light of the quarters. With fame, with renown and with the radiance of Brahman he shines and warms who knows this, yea, who knows this. Chapter XIX — Meditation on the Sun as Brahman 3.19.1 The sun is Brahman: this is the teaching. An explanation thereof follows: In the beginning this universe was non—existent. It became existent. It grew. It turned into an egg. The egg lay for the period of a year. Then it broke open. Of the two halves of the egg—shell, one half was of silver, the other of gold. 3.19.2 That which was of silver became the earth; that which was of gold, heaven. What was the thick membrane of the white became the mountains; the thin membrane of the yolk, the must and the clouds. The veins became the rivers; the fluid in the bladder, the ocean. 3.19.3 And what was born of it was yonder Aditya, the sun. when it was born shouts of “Hurrah!” arose, together with all beings and all objects of desire. Therefore at its rise and its every return shouts of “Hurrah!” together with all beings and all objects of desire arise. 3.19.4 He who, knowing this, meditates on the sun as Brahman— pleasant sounds will quickly approach him and continue to delight him, yea, continue to delight him. Part Four Chapter I — The Story of Janasruti and Raikva 4.1.1 There once lived a king named Janasruti, who was a great— grandson of Janasruta. He bestowed his gifts with respect, gave away liberally and cooked much food for the hungry. He built rest—houses every—where with the thought that people everywhere would eat his food. 4.1.2 One night some flamingos were flying along. One flamingo said to another: “Hey! Ho! Short—sighted, Short—sighted! The radiance of Janasruti, the great—grandson of Janasruta, has spread to the sky. Do not touch it, lest it should burn you.” 4.1.3 The other replied: “Say, who is this person about whom you have spoken as though he were like Raikva, the man with the cart?” “What sort of person is this Raikva, the man with the cart?” 4.1.4 The short—sighted flamingo replied: “As in a game of dice, when the krita is won, the lower ones also are won, so whatever merits people acquire all accrue to that Raikva. As Raikva I describe him, too, who knows what Raikva knows.” 4.1.5, 4.1.6 Janasruti the great—grandson of Janasruta overheard this conversation. Immediately after getting out of bed, he said to his attendant: “Friend, did you speak of me as though I were Raikva, the man with the cart?” “What sort of person is Raikva, the man with the cart?” “As in a game of dice, when the krita is won, the lower ones also are won, so whatever merits people acquire all accrue to that Raikva. As Raikva I describe him, too, who knows what Raikva knows.” 4.1.7 The attendant searched for him and returned without finding him. Then the king said to him: “Listen, where a knower of Brahman is to searched for, look for him there.” 4.1.8 After proper search the attendant came upon a person who, lying underneath his cart, was scratching an itch. Humbly he took his seat near him and said: “Revered Sir, are you Raikva, the man with the cart?” “Oh yes, I am he,” he answered. Then the attendant returned, saying to himself: “I have found him out.” Chapter II — Dialogue of Raikva and Janasruti (I) 4.2.1, 4.2.2 Then Janasruti the great—grandson of Janasruta took with him six hundred cows, a necklace and a chariot with mules and went to Raikva and said: “Raikva, here are six hundred cows, a necklace and a chariot with mules. Pray, revered Sir, teach me the deity whom you worship.” 4.2.3 To him the other said: “Ah, may the necklace and the chariot remain with you, O Sudra, along with the cows.” Thereupon Janasruti the great—grandson of Janasruta took with him a thousand cows, a chariot with mules, a necklace and his own daughter, too and went to Raikva. 4.2.4 Janasruti said to him: “Raikva, here are a thousand cows, a necklace, a chariot with mules, this wife and this village where you shall dwell. Revered Sir, teach me.” 4.2.5 Then considering her (the princess) as the door for imparting knowledge, Raikva said: “O Sudra! You brought these cows and other presents; this is good. But you will make me speak now only through this means (i.e. the princess).” These are the villages named Raikvaparna, in the country of Mahavrishas, where Raikva lived. Now Raikva said to the king: Chapter III — Dialogue of Raikva and Janasruti (II) 4.3.1 “Verily, Vayu (the air) is the swallower (samvarga). For when fire goes out it is indeed swallowed by the air. When the sun sets it is swallowed by the air. When the moon sets it is swallowed by the air. 4.3.2 “When water dries up it is swallowed by the air. For indeed the air absorbs them all. So much with reference to the gods. 4.3.3 “Now with reference to the body: Verily, the prana is the swallower. When a man sleeps, speech goes into the prana, sight goes into the prana, hearing goes into the prana and the mind goes into the prana. For indeed the prana absorbs them all. 4.3.4 “These are the two swallowers: the air among the gods, the prana among the senses.” 4.3.5 Once Saunaka of the line of Kapi and Abhipratarin, the son of Kakshasena, were being waited upon at their meal, when a brahmacharin begged food of them. They did not give him anything. 4.3.6 He said: “One God, Prajapati, swallowed the four great ones. He is the Guardian of the world. O descendent of Kapi, O Abhipratarin, mortals do not see Him though he abides in manifold forms. Verily, this food has not been given to Him to whom it belongs.” 4.3.7 Sanaka of the line of Kapi, pondering on those words, went to the brahmacharin and said: “He is the self of the gods, the creator of all beings, with unbroken teeth, the eater, the truly wise one. They speak of His magnificence as great, because without being eaten, He eats even what is not common food. O brahmacharin, we meditate upon this Brahman.” Then he said to the attendants: “Give him food.” 4.3.8 They gave food to him. Now these five (i.e. the eater vayu and fire, the sun, the moon and water, which are its food) and those five (i.e. the eater prana and the organs of speech, the eye, the ear and the mind, which are its food) make ten. These together constitute the krita (the highest throw in a game of dice). On account of this similarity of ten, these ten are the food in the ten quarters and further, they are Virat, the eater of food, by which all this becomes seen. All this he sees and the eater of food he becomes, who knows this, yea, who knows this. Chapter IV — The Story of Satyakama 4.4.1 Once upon a time, Satyakama the son of Jabala addressed his mother and said: “Revered Mother, I wish to become a brahmacharin. Of what ancestry am I?” 4.4.2 She said to him: “I do not know, my child, of what ancestry you are. In my youth I was preoccupied with many household duties and with attending on guests when I conceived you. I do not know of what ancestry you are. I am Jabala by name and you are Satyakama. So you may speak of yourself as Satyakama Jabala (the son of Jabala). 4.4.3 He came to Gautama the son of Haridrumata and said: “Revered Sir, I wish to live with you as a brahmacharin. May I approach you, as a pupil?” 4.4.4 Gautama said to him: “Of what ancestry are you, dear friend?” Satyakama said: “I do not know, Sir, of what ancestry I am. I asked my mother about it and she replied: ‘In my youth I was preoccupied with many household duties and with attending on guests when I conceived you. I do not know of what ancestry you are. I am Jabala by name and you are Satyakama.’ I am therefore, Sir, Satyakama Jabala.” 4.4.5 Gautama said: “None but a true brahmin would thus speak out. Fetch the fuel, dear friend; I shall initiate you. You have not departed from truth.” He initiated Satyakama. Having separated out four hundred lean and weak cows from his herd, he said: “Dear friend, go with these.” Driving them away toward the forest, Satyakama said: “I shall not return until they become a thousand.” He lived a number of years in the forest [until the cows had become a thousand]. Chapter V — Instruction by the Bull 4.5.1 The bull of the herd, addressing him, said: “Satyakama!” “Revered Sir!” Satyakama replied. The bull said: “Dear friend, we have become a thousand, take us to teacher’s house. 4.5.2 “I will declare to you one foot of Brahman.” “Declare it, Revered Sir.” The bull said to him: “The east is one quarter, the west is one quarter, the south is one quarter, the north is one quarter. This, dear friend, is foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters and this foot is called Prakasavat (shining). 4.5.3 “He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting four quarters as shining, becomes shining on this earth. He conquers shining worlds—he who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as shining.” Chapter VI — Instruction by Fire 4.6.1 The bull further said: “Agni (fire) will declare to you another foot of Brahman.” Satyakama then, when it was the morrow, drove the cows in the direction of the teacher’s house. And when they came together toward evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid fuel on the fire and sat down behind the fire, facing the east. 4.6.2 Agni (fire), addressing him, said: “Satyakama!” “Revered Sir!” Satyakama replied. 4.6.3 “Dear friend, I will declare to you one foot of Brahman.” “Declare it, revered Sir.” Agni said to him: “The earth is one quarter, the sky is one quarter, heaven is one quarter, the ocean is one quarter. This, dear friend, is one foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters and this foot is called Anantavat (endless). 4.6.4 “He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as endless, becomes endless on this earth. He conquers endless worlds—he who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as endless.” Chapter VII — Instruction by the Swan 4.7.1 Agni further said: “A hamsa (swan) will declare to you another foot.” Satyakama then, when it was the morrow, drove the cows in the direction of the teacher’s house. And when they came together toward evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid fuel on the fire and sat down behind the fire, facing the east. 4.7.2 Then a swan flew to him and said: “Satyakama!” “Revered Sir!” Satyakama replied. 4.7.3 Dear friend, I will declare to you one foot of Brahman.” “Declare it, revered Sir.” The swan said to him: “Fire is one quarter, the sun is one quarter, the moon is one quarter, lightning is one quarter. This, dear friend, is one foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters and this foot is called Jyotishmat (luminous). 4.7.4 He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as luminous, becomes luminous on this earth. He conquers luminous worlds—he who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as luminous. Chapter VIII — Instruction by the Diver—Bird 4.8.1 The swan further said: “A madgu (diver—bird) will declare to you another foot.” Satyakama then, when it was the morrow, drove the cows in the direction of the teacher’s house. And when they came together toward evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid fuel on the fire and sat down behind the fire, facing the east. 4.8.2 Then a diver—bird flew to him and said: “Satyakama!” “Revered Sir!” Satyakama replied. 4.8.3 “Dear friend, I will declare to you one foot of Brahman.” “Declare it, revered Sir.” The diver—bird said to him: “The prana is one quarter, the eye is one quarter, the ear is one quarter, the mind is one quarter. This, dear friend, is one foot of Brahman, consisting of four quarters and this foot is called Ayatanavat (having support). 4.8.4 “He who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as Ayatanavat, possesses a support (i.e. home) on this earth. He conquers the worlds which offer a home—he who knows this and meditates on the foot of Brahman consisting of four quarters as Ayatanavat.” Chapter IX — Instruction by the Teacher 4.9.1 Satyakama reached the teacher’s house. The teacher said to him: “Satyakama!” “Revered Sir!” Satyakama replied. 4.9.2 The teacher said: “Dear friend, you shine like one who knows Brahman. Who has taught you?” “Others than men,” he replied. “But I wish, revered Sir, that you alone should teach me.” 4.9.3 “For I have heard from persons like your good self that only knowledge which is learnt from a teacher (acharya) leads to the highest good.” Then he (Gautama) taught him the same knowledge. Nothing whatsoever was left out, yea, nothing whatsoever was left out. Chapter X — The Story of Upakosala 4.10.1 Upakosala the son of Kamala dwelt as a brahmachirin (religious student) with Satyakama the son of Jabala. He tended his teacher’s fires for twelve years. Satyakama allowed his other pupils to return to their homes after they had finished their Vedic studies but did not allow Upakosala to depart. 4.10.2 Then his wife said to him: “This brahmachirin, practising austerities, has intelligently tended your fires. Give him instruction lest the fires should blame you.” The teacher, however, went away on a journey without teaching him. 4.10.3 The brahmachirin out of mental grief began to fast. Then the teacher’s wife said to him: “Brahmachirin, why do you not eat?” He said: “There are in a man like me many desires directed to various objects. I am full of sorrows. I will not eat.” 4.10.4 Thereupon the fires said among themselves: “This brahmachirin, practising austerities, has intelligently tended us. Come, let us teach him.” They said to him: “The prana is Brahman, ka (joy) is Brahman, kha (the akaha) is Brahman.” 4.10.5 He said: “I understand that the prana is Brahman, but I do not understand ‘joy’ (ka) and ‘the akasa’ (kha).” They said: “What is joy (ka) is the akasa (kha), what is the akasa (kha) is joy (ka).” They taught him the prana (i.e. Brahman) and the akasa related to it. Chapter XI — Instruction by the Household Fire 4.11.1 Next the Garhapatya Fire taught him: “The earth, fire, food and the sun are my forms. The person that is seen in the sun—I am he, I am he indeed. 4.11.2 “He who, knowing this, meditates on the fire frees himself from sinful actions, obtains the World of the Garhapatya Fire, reaches his full age and lives brightly. His descendants do not perish. We support him in this world and in the other who, knowing this, meditates on the fire.” Chapter XII — Instruction by the Southern Fire 4.12.1 Then the Anvaharya (Southern) Fie taught him: “Water, the quarters, the stars and the moon are my forms. The person that is seen in the moon—I am he, I am he indeed. 4.12.2 “He who, knowing this, meditates on the fire frees himself from sinful actions, obtains the World of the Anvaharya Fire, reaches his full age and lives brightly. His descendants do not perish. We support him in this world and in the other who, knowing this, meditates on the fire.” Chapter XIII — Instruction by the Ahavaniya Fire 4.13.1 Then the Ahavaniya Fire taught him: “The prana, the akaha, heaven and lightning are my forms. The person that is seen in lightning—I am he, I am he indeed. 4.13.2 “He who, knowing this, meditates on the fire frees himself from sinful actions, obtains the World of the Anvaharya Fire, reaches his full age and lives brightly. His descendants do not perish. We support him in this world and in the other who, knowing this, meditates on the fire.” Chapter XIV — Dialogue between the Teacher and the Pupil 4.14.1 Then they (i.e. all the fires) said: “Upakosala, dear friend, thus we taught you the knowledge of ourselves and the knowledge of the Self. But the teacher will teach you the way.” The teacher returned and said to him: “Upakosala!” 4.14.2, 4.14.3 He replied: “Revered Sir!” “Dear friend, your face shines like that of one who knows Brahman. Who has taught you?” “Who should teach me, Sir?” Here he conceals the fact, as it were. And he said pointing to the fires: “For this reason they are of this form now, though they were of a different form before.” “Dear friend, what did they teach you?” “This,” Upakosala replied and repeated some of what the fires had told him. The teacher said: “They told you, dear friend, only about the worlds, but I shall tell you about Brahman. As water does not cling to the lotus leaf, so no evil clings to one who knows this.” Upakosala said to him: “Revered Sir, please tell me.” Chapter XV — Instruction by the Teacher 4.15.1 He said: “The person that is seen in the eye—that is the Self. This is the immortal, the fearless; this is Brahman. That is why, if one drops melted butter or water in the eye, it flows away on both sides. 4.15.2 “The seers call him Samyadvama, for all blessings (vama) go towards him (samyanti). All blessings go towards him who knows this. 4.15.3 “He is also Vamani, for he carries to living beings (nayati) all blessings (vama). He who knows this carries all blessings. 4.15.4 “He is also called Bhamani, for he shines (bhati) in all the worlds. He who knows this shines in all the worlds. 4.15.5 “Now, whether or not they perform the funeral rites for such a person, he goes to light, from light to day, from day to the bright half of the moon, from the bright half of the moon to the six months during which the sun goes to the north, from those months to the year, from the year to the sun, from the sun to the moon, from the moon to lightning. There a person who is not a human being meets him and leads him to Brahman. This is the Path of the Gods (Devayana), the path leading to Brahman. Those who travel by it do not return to the whirl of humanity, yea, they do not return.” Chapter XVI — The Silence of the Brahma Priest 4.16.1 Verily, he who moves along (i.e. the air) is the sacrifice; for he, moving along, purifies everything. And because, moving along, he purifies everything, he is the sacrifice. Of that sacrifice, the mind and speech are the two ways. 4.16.2, 4.16.3 The Brahma priest purifies one of the two (i.e. the mind) by his mind. The other (i.e. speech) is purified through words by the hotri priest, the adhvaryu priest and the udgatri priest. If the Brahma priest, after the Prataranuvaka hymn has begun and before the recitation of the Paridhaniya hymn, breaks his silence and speaks, he purifies only one of the ways (i.e. speech), but the other (i.e. the mind) is injured. As a man walking on one leg, or a carriage going on one wheel, is injured, likewise the sacrifice is injured. Following the injury to the sacrifice, the sacrificer too is injured. By performing the defective sacrifice he becomes more sinful. 4.16.4 But if the Brahma priest, after the Prataranuvaka hymn has begun and before the recitation of the Paridhaniya, does not break his silence and speak, he purifies both the ways and neither of them is injured. As a man walking on two legs or a carriage going on two wheels goes on without obstacle, likewise the sacrifice goes on without obstacle. Following the success of the sacrifice, the sacrificer too fares well. Having performed the sacrifice he becomes better. Chapter XVII — Penances for Mistakes in the Sacrifice 4.17.1 Prajapati brooded over the worlds; from them, thus brooded over, he squeezed the essences: agni (fire) from the earth, vayu (air) from the mid—region and aditya (the sun) from heaven. 4.17.2 He brooded over these three deities; from them, thus brooded over, he squeezed the essences. The Rik—verses from fire, the Yajus—verses from the air and the Saman—verses from the sun. 4.17.3 He brooded over the threefold knowledge (i.e. the three Vedas); from them, thus brooded over, he squeezed the essences: Bhuh from the Rik—verses, Bhuvah from the Yajus—verses and Svah from the Saman—verses. 4.17.4 If the sacrifice is injured with regard to the Rik—verses, one should then offer a libation in the Garhapatya Fire saying: “Bhuh Svaha!” Thus is healed the injury with regard to the Rik—verses by means of the essence and the power of the Rik—verses themselves. 4.17.5 If the sacrifice is injured with regard to the Yajus—verses, one should then offer a libation in the Southern (Dakshina) Fire, saying: “Bhuvah Svaha!” Thus is healed the injury with regard to the Yajus—verses by means of the essence and the power of the Yajus—verses themselves. 4.17.6 If the sacrifice is injured with regard to the Saman—verses, one should then offer a libation in the Ahavaniya Fire, saying: “Svah Svaha!” Thus is healed the injury with regard to the Saman—verses by means of the essence and the power of the Saman—verses themselves. 4.17.7, 4.17.8 As one binds gold by means of borax and silver by means of gold and tin by means of silver and lead by means of tin and iron by means of lead and wood by means of iron or leather, Likewise one heals any injury done to the sacrifice with the power of these worlds, these gods and these three Vedas. That sacrifice is well healed in which there is a Brahma priest who knows this. 4.17.9, 4.17.10 That sacrifice is inclined to the north in which there is a Brahma priest who knows this. And with regard to such a Brahma priest, there is the following gatha: “Wherever it is injured, thither he (the Brahma priest) goes.” The silent Brahma alone, as one or the priests, protects the sacrificer, as a mare protects a warrior. Because the Brahma priest who knows this protects the sacrifice, the sacrificer and all the priests, one should therefore make a person who knows this the Brahma priest and not one who knows it not, yea, not one who knows it not. Part Five Chapter I — The Supremacy of the Prana 5.1.1 Om. He who knows what is the oldest and greatest becomes himself the oldest and greatest. The prana, indeed, is the oldest and greatest. 5.1.2 He who knows what is the most excellent (vasishtha) becomes the most excellent among his kinsmen. The organ of speech, indeed, is the most excellent. 5.1.3 He who knows what has the attributes of firmness (pratishtha) becomes firm in this world and the next. The eye, indeed, is endowed with firmness. 5.1.4 He who knows prosperity (sampad), his wishes are fulfilled— both divine and human wishes. The ear, indeed, is prosperity. 5.1.5 He who knows the abode (ayatana) becomes the abode of his kinsmen. The mind, indeed, is the abode. 5.1.6 The pranas (sense—organs) disputed among themselves about who was the best among them, each saying: “I am the best,” “I am the best.” 5.1.7 They went to Prajapati, their progenitor and said: “O revered Sir, who is the best among us?” He said to them: “He by whose departure the body looks worse than the worst is the best among you.” 5.1.8 The organ of speech departed. After being away for a whole year, it came back and said: “How have you been able to live without me?” The other organs replied: “We lived just as dumb people live, without speaking, but breathing with the prana (nose), seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear and thinking with the mind.” Then the organ of speech entered the body. 5.1.9 The eye departed. After being away for a whole year, it came back and said: “How have you been able to live without me?” The other organs replied: “We lived just as blind people live, without seeing, but breathing with the prana, speaking with the tongue, hearing with the ear and thinking with the mind.” Then the eye entered the body. 5.1.10 The ear went out. After being away for a whole year, it came back and said: “How have you been able to live without me?” The other organs replied: “We lived just as deaf people live, without hearing, but breathing with the prana. Speaking with the tongue, seeing with the eye and thinking with the mind.” Then the ear entered the body. 5.1.11 The mind went out. After being away for a whole year, it came back and said: “How have you been able to live without me?” The other organs replied: “We lived just like children whose minds are not yet formed, without thinking with the mind, but breathing with the prana, speaking with the tongue, seeing with the eye and hearing with the ear.” Then the mind entered the body. 5.1.12 Then as the vital breath was about to depart, he uprooted the organs from their places just as a noble horse tears up the pegs to which its feet are tied. They came to him and said: “Revered Sir, be thou our lord; thou art the best among us. Do not depart from us.” 5.1.13 Then the organ of speech said to him: “That attribute of being most excellent which I possess is thine.” Then the eye said: “That attribute of firmness which I possess is thine.” 5.1.14 Then the ear said: “That attribute of prosperity which I possess is thine.” Then the mind said: “That attribute of being the abode which I possess is thine.” 5.1.15 And people do not call them (i.e. the sense—organs) the organs of speech, the eyes, the ears, or the mind, but the pranas. The prana alone is all these. Chapter II — The Mantha Rite 5.2.1 The prana said: “What will be my food?” They answered: “Whatever food there is—including that of dogs and birds.” The Upanishad says: All that is eaten is the food of the ana. Ana is his (i.e. the prana’s) direct name. For one who knows this, there exists nothing which is not food. 5.2.2 He said: “What will be my dress?” They answered: “Water.” Therefore when people eat they cover him (the prana), both before and after eating, with water. Thus the prana obtains clothing and is no longer naked. 5.2.3 Satyakama the son of Jabala explained this doctrine of the prana to Gosruti, the son of Vyaghrapada and said: “If one should tell this to a dry stump, branches would grow and leaves spring forth.” 5.2.4 Now, if a man wishes to attain greatness, he should perform the initiatory rite on the day of the new moon and then on the night of the full moon he should stir a paste of all the herbs with curds and honey and offer it as a libation in the fire where the melted butter is offered, saying: “Svaha to the oldest (jyashtha) and greatest (sreshtha)!” Then let him throw the remainder adhering to the ladle into the paste. 5.2.5 In the same manner he should offer a libation in the fire where the melted butter is offered, saying: “Svaha to the most excellent (vasishtha)!” Then let him throw the remainder adhering to the ladle into the paste. In the same manner he should offer a libation into the fire where the melted butter is offered, saying: “Svaha to firmness (pratishthi)!” and then throw the remainder adhering to the ladle into the paste. In the same manner he should offer a libation in the fire where the melted butter is offered, saying: “Svaha to prosperity (sampad)!” and then throw the remainder adhering to the ladle into the paste. In the same manner he should offer a libation into the fire where the melted butter is offered, saying: “Svaha to the abode (ayatana)!” and then throw the remainder adhering to the ladle into the paste. 5.2.6 Then, moving away a little from the fire and holding the paste (mantha) in his hands, he recites: “Thou (prana) art ama by name, for all this rests in thee. He (i.e. the paste, which is the same as the prana) is the oldest, the greatest, the king and the sovereign. May he make me the oldest, the greatest, the king and the sovereign. May I be all this!” 5.2.7 Then he recites the following Rik—mantra, swallowing the paste (mantha) each time he utters a foot of the mantra: “We desire, of the great progenitor (i.e. the sun)”—here he swallows a little—”of the luminous, the food”—here he swallows a little— “the best and all—supporting”—here he swallows a little—”we meditate quickly on the nature of the sun”—here he swallows the whole. Having cleansed the vessel made of metal or wood, he lies down behind the fire, on a skin or on the bare ground, controlling his speech and self—possessed. If he sees a woman in a dream, then let him know that his work (rite) has been a success. 5.2.8 On this there is the following verse: “If during rites performed with a view to fulfilling certain desires, he sees a woman in his dream, let him know of his success from this vision in a dream, yea, from this vision in a dream.” Chapter III — The Story of Svetaketu and Pravahana 5.3.1 Svetaketu the grandson of Aruna came to the assembly of the Panchalas. Pravahana the son of Jibala said to him: “Boy, has your father instructed you?” “Yes, revered Sir,” he replied. 5.3.2 The king said: “Do you know to what place men go after departing from here?” “No, revered Sir.” “Do you know how they return again?” “No, revered Sir.” “Do you know where the paths leading to the gods and leading to the Manes separate?” “No, revered Sir.” 5.3.3 “Do you know why yonder world is not filled up?” “No, revered Sir.” “Do you know how water, in the fifth oblation, comes to be called man?” “No, revered Sir.” 5.3.4 “Then why did you say that you had been instructed? How could he who did not know these things say that he had been instructed?” Then Svetaketu went back to his father with a sorrowful mind and said to him: “Revered Sir, you told me that you had instructed me, though you had not instructed me. 5.3.5 “That fellow of a Kshatriya asked me five questions and I could not answer one of them.” The father said: “As you have stated these questions to me, let me assure you that I do not know even one of them. If I had known them, why should I not have told them to you?” 5.3.6 Then Gautama went to the king’s place. When he arrived the king showed him proper respect. Next morning, when the king came to the assembly, Gautama, too, came there. The king said to him: “Gautama, Sir, ask of me a boon relating to human wealth.” He replied: “May human wealth remain with you. Tell me that speech which you addressed to my boy.” The king became sad. 5.3.7 The king commanded him: “Stay with me for a long time.” Then he said to him: “As to what you have told me, O Gautama, this knowledge did not reach any brahmin before you. Thus it was to the kshatriya alone, among all the people, that the teaching of this knowledge belonged.” Then he began to teach him: Chapter IV — The Five Fires (I) 5.4.1 “Yonder world is the sacrificial fire, O Gautama, the sun the fuel, the rays the smoke, daytime the flame, the moon the embers and the stars the sparks. 5.4.2 “In this fire the gods offer faith as libation. Out of that offering King Moon is born.” Chapter V — The Five Fires (II) 5.5.1 “Parjanya (the god of rain), O Gautama, is the fire, the air the fuel, the cloud the smoke, lightning the flame, the thunderbolt the embers and thunderings the sparks. 5.5.2 “In this fire the gods offer King Moon as libation. Out of that offering rain is born.” Chapter VI— The Five Fires (III) 5.6.1 “The earth, O Gautama, is the fire, the year the fuel, the akasa the smoke, the night the flame, the quarters the embers and the intermediate quarters the sparks. 5.6.2 “In this fire the gods offer rain as libation. Out of that offering food is born.” Chapter VII— The Five Fires (IV) 5.7.1 “Man, O Gautama, is the fire, speech is the fuel, the prana the smoke, the tongue the flame, the eye the embers and the ear the sparks. 5.7.2 “In this fire the gods offer food as libation. Out of that offering semen produced.” Chapter VIII — The Five Fires (V) 5.8.1 “Woman, O Gautama, is the fire, her sexual organ is the fuel, what invites is the smoke, the vulva is the flame, what is done inside is the embers, the pleasures are the sparks. 5.8.2 “In this fire the gods offer semen as libation. Out of that offering the foetus is formed.” Chapter IX — Birth and Death 5.9.1 “Thus in the fifth libation water comes to be called man. The foetus enclosed in the membrane, having lain inside for ten or nine months, or more or less, is born. 5.9.2 “Having been born, he lives whatever the length of his life may be. When he is dead, they carry him to the fire of the funeral pyre whence he came, whence he arose.” Chapter X — The Various Paths followed after Death 5.10.1, 5.10.2 “Those who know this and those who, dwelling in the forest, practise faith and austerities go to light, from light to day, from day to the bright half of the moon, from the bright half of the moon to the six months during which the sun goes to the north, from those months to the year, from the year to the sun, from the sun to the moon, from the moon to lightning. There a person who is not a human being meets him and leads him to Brahman. This is the Path of the Gods (Devayana). 5.10.3 “But those who, living in the village, perform sacrifices, undertake works of public utility and give alms go to smoke, from smoke to night, from night to the dark half of the moon, from the dark half of the moon to the six months during which the sun goes to the south. But they do not reach the year. 5.10.4 “From those months they go to the World of the Manes, from the world of the Manes to the akasa, from the akasa to the moon. This is King Soma. They are the food of the gods. Them the gods eat. 5.10.5, 5.10.6 “Having dwelt there in the lunar world till their good works are consumed, they return again the same way they came. They first reach the akasa and from the akasa the air. Having become air, they become smoke; having become smoke, they become mist; “Having become mist, they become cloud; having become cloud, they fall as rain—water. Then they are born as rice and barley, herbs and trees, sesamum and beans. Thence the exit is most difficult; for whoever capable of begetting children eats that food and injects semen, they become like unto him. 5.10.7 “Those whose conduct here on earth has been good will quickly attain some good birth—birth as a brahmin, birth as a kshatriya, or birth as a vaisya. But those whose conduct here has been evil will quickly attain some evil birth—birth as a dog, birth as a pig, or birth as a chandala. 5.10.8 “Those who neither practise meditation nor perform rituals do not follow either of these ways. They become those insignificant creatures which are continually revolving and about which it may be said: ‘Live and die.’ This is the third place. “Therefore that world never becomes full. Let a man despise this course. To this end there is the following verse: 5.10.9 ‘ “A man who steals the gold of a brahmin, he (i.e. a brahmin) who drinks liquor, he who dishonours his teacher’s bed and he who kills a brahmin—these four fall, as also a fifth who associates with them.’ “ 5.10.10 “But he who knows these Five Fires is not stained by sin even though associating with them. He becomes pure and clean and obtains the world of the blessed—he who knows this, yea, he who knows this.” Chapter XI — Concerning the Universal Self 5.11.1 Prachinasala the son of Upamanyu, Satyayajna the son of Pulusha, Indradyumna the grandson of Bhallavi, Jana the son of Sarkaraksha and Budila the son of Asvatarasva—great householders and great scriptural scholars—came together and discussed the question: “What is our self and what is Brahman?” 5.11.2 They solved the problem with the words: “Revered Sirs, Uddalaka the son of Aruna knows, at present, about the Vaisvanara Self. Let us go to him.” They went to him. 5.11.3 He (Uddalaka) concluded: “These great householders and great scriptural scholars will question me. Perhaps I shall not be able to tell them everything. Therefore I shall direct them to another teacher.” 5.11.4 He said to them: “Revered Sirs, King Asvapati the son of Kekaya knows, at present, about the Vaisvanara Self. Let us all go to him.” They went to him. 5.11.5, 5.11.6, 5.11.7 When they arrived, the king ordered that proper respect should be paid to each of them. The next morning, after leaving bed, he said to them: “In my kingdom there is no thief, no miser, no wine—bibber, no man without a sacrificial fire, no ignorant person, no adulterer, much less adulteress. “Revered Sirs, I am going to perform a sacrifice. I shall give to you as much wealth as I give to each priest. Please, revered Sirs, stay here.” They said: “If a person comes to another with a purpose, he should tell the other only about that. At present, you know about the Vaisvanara Self. Please tell us about Him.” He said to them: “I shall give you a reply tomorrow morning.” Next morning they approached him with fuel in their hands. Without having performed any initiatory rites, the king said to them: Chapter XII — The Head of the Vaisvanara Self 5.12.1, 5.12.2 “O son of Upamanyu, whom do you meditate on as the Self?” “Heaven only, venerable King,” he replied. “The Self you meditate on,” said the king “is the Vaisvanara Self called the Good Light (Sutejas). Therefore one sees in your family the Suta libation as also the Prasuta libation and the Asuta libation and you eat food and see what is pleasing. Whoever thus meditates on the Vaisvanara Self eats food, sees what is pleasing and has in his family the glory of Brahman. That, however, is only the head of the Self. Surely your head would have fallen off if you had not come to me.” Chapter XIII — The Eye of the Vaisvanara Self 5.13.1, 5.13.2 Then he said to Satyayajna the son of Pulusha: “O Prachinayogya, whom do you meditate on as the Self?” “The sun only, venerable King,” he replied. “The Self you meditate on,” said the king, “is the Vaisvanara Self called the Universal Form (Visvarupa). Therefore one sees in your family much and manifold wealth—there are ready the chariot and mules, female servants and gold necklaces—and you eat food and see what is pleasing. Whoever thus meditates on the Vaisvanara Self eats food, sees what is pleasing and has in his family the glory of Brahman. That, however, is only the eye of the Self. Surely you would have become blind if you had not come to me.” Chapter XIV — The Prana of the Vaisvanara Self 5.14.1, 5.14.2 Then he said to Indradyumna the grandson of Bhallavi: “O Vaiyaghrapadya, whom do you meditate on as the Self?” “The air only, venerable King,” he replied. “The Self you meditate on,” said the king, “is the Vaisvanara Self of varied courses (Prithagvartma). Therefore gifts come to you in various ways, rows of chariots follow you in various ways and you eat food and see what is pleasing. Whoever thus meditates on the Vaisvanara Self eats food, sees what is pleasing and has in his family the glory of Brahman. That, however, is only the prana of the Self. Surely your prana would have left you if you had not come to me.” Chapter XV — The Trunk of the Vaisvanara Self 5.15.1, 5.15.2 Then he said to Jana the son of Sarkaraksha: “Whom do you meditate on as the Self?” “The akasa only, venerable King,” he replied. “The Self you meditate on,” said the king, “is the Vaisvanara Self called Bahula (full). Therefore you are full of offspring and wealth and you eat food and see what is pleasing. Whoever thus meditates on the Vaisvanara Self eats food, sees what is pleasing and has in his family the glory of Brahman. That, however, is only the trunk of the Self. Surely your trunk would have been destroyed if you had not come to me.” Chapter XVI — The Bladder of the Vaisvanara Self 5.16.1, 5.16.2 Then he said to Budila the son of Asvatarasva: “O Vaiyaghrapadya, whom do you meditate on as the Self?” “Water only, venerable King,” he replied. “The Self you meditate on,” said the king, “is the Vaisvanara Self called Rayi (wealth). Therefore you are wealthy and flourishing and you eat food and see what is pleasing. Whoever thus meditates on the Vaisvanara Self eats food, sees what is pleasing and has in his family the glory of Brahman. That, however, is only the bladder of the Self. Surely your bladder would have burst if you had not come to me.” Chapter XVII — The Feet of the Vaisvanara Self 5.17.1, 5.17.2 Then he said to Uddalaka the son of Aruna: “O Gautama, whom do you meditate on as the Self?” “The earth only, venerable King,” he replied. “The Self you meditate on,” said the king, “is the Vaisvanara Self called Pratishtha (the support). Therefore you are supported by offspring and cattle and you eat food and see what is pleasing. Whoever thus meditates on the Vaisvanara Self eats food, sees what is pleasing and has in his family the glory of Brahman. That, however, is only the feet of the Self. Surely your feet would have withered away if you had not come to me.” Chapter XVIII — The Vaisvanara Self as the Whole 5.18.1 Then he (the king) said to them all: “You being endowed with limited knowledge eat your food, knowing that Vaisvanara Self as if He were many. But he who worships the Vaisvanara Self as the measure of the span from earth to heaven and as identical with the self, eats food in all worlds, in all beings and in all selves. 5.18.2 “Of this Vaisvanara Self the head is Sutejas (the Good Light), the eye Visvarupa (the Universal Form), the prana Prithagvartma (of various courses), the trunk Bahula (full), the bladder Rayi (wealth), the feet Prithivi (the earth), the chest the Vedi (altar), the hair the kusa grass on the altar, the heart the Garhapatya Fire, the mind the Anvaharya Fire and the mouth the Ahavaniya Fire.” Chapter XIX — Performance of the Agnihotra in Oneself (The Prana) 5.19.1 Therefore the food that comes first should be offered as an oblation. The first oblation that he (i.e. the eater) offers, he should offer, saying: “Svaha to the prana!” Then the prana is satisfied. 5.19.2 The prana being satisfied, the eye is satisfied. The eye being satisfied, the sun is satisfied. The sun being satisfied, heaven is satisfied. Heaven being satisfied, whatever is under heaven and under the sun is satisfied. They being satisfied, he (i.e. the eater or sacrificer) is satisfied with offspring, cattle, food, brightness of the body and the light of Brahman. Chapter XX — The Vyana 5.20.1 The second oblation that he offers, he should offer, saying: “Svaha to the vyana!” Then the vyana is satisfied. 5.20.2 The vyana being satisfied, the ear is satisfied. The ear being satisfied, the moon is satisfied. The moon being satisfied, the quarters are satisfied. The quarters being satisfied, whatever is under the quarters and under the moon is satisfied. They being satisfied, the eater is satisfied with offspring, cattle, food, brightness of the body and the light of Brahman. Chapter XXI — The Apana 5.21.1 The third oblation that he offers, he should offer, saying: “Svaha to the apana!” Then the apana is satisfied. 5.21.2 The apana being satisfied, speech (i.e. the tongue) is satisfied. Speech being satisfied, fire is satisfied. Fire being satisfied, the earth is satisfied. The earth being satisfied, what is under the earth and under fire is satisfied. They being satisfied, the eater is satisfied with offspring, cattle, food, brightness of the body and the light of Brahman. Chapter XXII — The Samana 5.22.1 The fourth oblation that he offers, he should offer, saying: “Svaha to the samana!” Then the samana is satisfied. 5.22.2 The samana being satisfied, the mind is satisfied. The mind being satisfied, the rain—god is satisfied. The rain—god being satisfied, the lightning is satisfied. The lightning being satisfied, what is under the lightning and under the rain—god is satisfied. They being satisfied, the eater is satisfied with offspring, cattle, food, brightness of the body and the light of Brahman. Chapter XXIII — The Udana 5.23.1 The fifth oblation that he offers, he should offer, saying: “Svaha to the udana!” Then the udana is satisfied. 5.23.2 The udana being satisfied, the skin is satisfied. The skin being satisfied, the air is satisfied. The air being satisfied, the akasa is satisfied. The akasa being satisfied, what is under the air and under the akasa is satisfied. They being satisfied, the eater is satisfied with offspring, cattle, food, brightness of the body and the light of Brahman. Chapter XXIV — The Glory of the Agnihotra Sacrifice 5.24.1 If, without knowing this knowledge of the Vaisvanara Self, one offers an Agnihotra oblation, it is like an oblation offered in dead ashes after removing the live coals. 5.24.2 But if; knowing this, one offers an Agnihotra oblation, it is like an oblation offered in all the worlds, in all beings and in all atmans. 5.24.3 Even as the soft fibres of the ishika reed, when thrown into fire, are burnt, so also are burnt all the sins of one who, knowing this, offers an Agnihotra oblation. 5.24.4 Therefore even if a man who knows this gives what is left of his food to a chandala, he verily offers it to his Vaisvanara Self. On this there is the following verse: 5.24.5 “As here on earth hungry children gather around their mother, so do all beings gather around the Agnihotra sacrifice, yea around the Agnihotra sacrifice.” Part Six Chapter I — The Non—Duality of the Self 6.1.1 Om. There once lived Svetaketu the grandson of Aruna. To him his father said: “Svetaketu, lead the life of a brahmacharin; for there is none belonging to our family, my dear, who, not having studied the Vedas, is a brahmin only by birth.” 6.1.2, 6.1.3 Svetaketu went to his teacher’s house when he was twelve years old and studied the Vedas till he was twenty—four. Then he returned to his father, serious, considering himself well read and arrogant. His father said to him: “Svetaketu, since you are now so serious, think yourself well read and are so arrogant, have you, my dear, ever asked for that instruction by which one hears what cannot be heard, by which one perceives what cannot be perceived, by which one knows what cannot be known?” Svetaketu asked: “What is that instruction, venerable Sir?” 6.1.4, 6.1.5, 6.1.6 “Just as, my dear, by one clod of clay all that is made of clay is known, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the truth is that all is clay; “Just as, my dear, by one nugget of gold all that is made of gold is known, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the truth is that all is gold; “And just as, my dear, by one pair of nail—scissors all that is made of iron is known, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the truth is that all is iron—even so, my dear, is that instruction.” 6.1.7 “Surely those venerable men did not know that. For if they had known it, why should they not have told it to me? Therefore do you, venerable Sir, tell me about it.” “So be it, my dear,” said the father. Chapter II — Brahman: the Cause of the Universe 6.2.1 “In the beginning, my dear, this universe was Being (Sat) alone, one only without a second. Some say that in the beginning this was non—being (asat) alone, one only without a second; and from that non—being, being was born.” 6.2.2 Aruni said: “But how, indeed, could it be thus, my dear? How could Being be born from non—being? No, my dear, it was Being alone that existed in the beginning, one only without a second. 6.2.3 “It (Being, or Brahman) thought: ‘May I be many; may I grow forth.’ It created fire. That fire thought: ‘May I be many; may I grow forth.’ It created water. That is why, whenever a person is hot and perspires, water is produced from fire (heat) alone. 6.2.4 “That water thought: ‘May I be many; may I grow forth.’ It created food (i.e. earth). That is why, whenever it rains anywhere, abundant food is produced. From water alone is edible food produced. Chapter III — The Threefold Development 6.3.1 “Of all these living beings, there are only three origins: those born from an egg, those born from a living being and those born from a sprout. 6.3.2 “That Deity thought: ‘Let Me now enter into those three deities by means of this living self and let Me then develop names and forms.’ 6.3.3 “That Deity, having thought: ‘Let Me make each of these three tripartite,’ entered into these three deities by means of the living self and developed names and forms. 6.3.4 “It made each of these tripartite; and how these three deities became, each of them, tripartite, that learn from me now, my dear. Chapter IV — The Threefold Development further explained 6.4.1 “The red colour of gross fire is the colour of the original fire; the white colour of gross fire is the colour of the original water; the black colour of gross fire is the colour of the original earth. Thus vanishes from fire what is commonly called fire, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the three colours (forms) alone are true. 6.4.2 “The red colour of the sun is the colour of fire, the white the colour of water, the black the colour of earth. Thus vanishes from the sun what is commonly called the sun, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the three colours alone are true. 6.4.3 “The red colour of the moon is the colour of fire, the white the colour of water, the black the colour of earth. Thus vanishes from the moon what is commonly called the moon, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the three colours alone are true. 6.4.4 “The red colour of lightning is the colour of fire, the white the colour of water, the black the colour of earth. Thus vanishes from lightning what is commonly called lighting, the modification being only a name, arising from speech, while the three colours alone are true. 6.4.5 “It was just through this knowledge that the great householders and great Vedic scholars of olden times declared: ‘No one can now mention to us anything which we have not heard, thought of, or known.’ They knew all from these three forms. 6.4.6, 6.4.7 “Whatever, appeared red they knew to be the colour of fire; whatever appeared white they knew to be the colour of water; whatever appeared black they knew to be the colour of earth. “Whatever appeared to be unknown they knew to be the combination of these three deities (i.e. colours). Now learn from me, my dear, how these three deities, when they reach man, become each of them tripartite. Chapter V — The Threefold Nature of Food 6.5.1 “Food when eaten becomes threefold. What is coarsest in it becomes faeces, what is medium becomes flesh and what is subtlest becomes mind. 6.5.2 “Water when drunk becomes threefold. What is coarsest in it becomes urine, what is medium becomes blood and what is subtlest becomes prana. 6.5.3 “Fire when eaten becomes threefold. What is coarsest in it becomes bone, what is medium becomes marrow and what is subtlest becomes speech. 6.5.4 “The mind, my dear, consists of food, the prana of water and speech of heat.” “Please, venerable Sir, instruct me further.” “So be it, my dear.” Chapter VI — The Physical Nature of the Mind, the Prana and Speech 6.6.1 “That, my dear, which is the subtlest part of curds rises, when they are churned and becomes butter. 6.6.2 “In the same manner, my dear, that which is the subtlest part of the food that is eaten rises and becomes mind. 6.6.3 “The subtlest part of the water that is drunk rises and becomes prana. 6.6.4 “The subtlest part of the fire that is eaten rises and becomes speech. 6.6.5 “Thus, my dear, the mind consists of food, the prana consists of water and speech consists of fire.” “Please, venerable Sir, instruct me further.” “So be it, my dear.” Chapter VII — How the Mind consists of Food 6.7.1 “A person, my dear, consists of sixteen parts. Do not eat any food for fifteen days, but drink as much water as you like. Since the prana consists of water, it will not be cut off if you drink water.” 6.7.2 Svetaketu did not eat any food for fifteen days. Then he came to his father and said: “What, Sir, shall I recite?” His father said: “The Rik, Yagus and Saman verses.” He replied: “They do not occur to me, Sir.” 6.7.3 His father said to him: “Just as, my dear, of a great blazing fire a single coal, the size of a firefly, may be left, which would not burn much more than that, even so, my dear, of your sixteen parts only one part is left; and therefore with that one part you do not remember the Vedas. Now go and eat and you will understand me.” 6.7.4 Svetaketu ate and approached his father. Then whatever his father asked him, he showed that he knew it. 6.7.5, 6.7.6 Then his father said to him: “Just as, my dear, of a great lighted fire a single coal the size of a firefly, if left, may be made to blaze up again by adding grass to it and will thus burn much more, “Even so, my dear; of your sixteen parts only one part was left and that, when strengthened by food, blazed up. With it you now remember the Vedas. Therefore, my dear, the mind consists of food, the prana consists of water and speech consists of fire.” After that he understood what his father said, yea, he understood it. Chapter VIII — Concerning Sleep, Hunger, Thirst and Death 6.8.1 Uddalaka the son of Aruna said to his son Svetaketu: “Learn from me, my dear, the true nature of sleep. When a person has entered into deep sleep, as it is called, then, my dear, he becomes united with Pure Being (Sat), he has gone to his own Self. That is why they say he is in deep sleep (svapiti); it is because he has gone (apita) to his own (svam). 6.8.2 “Just as a bird tied by a string to the hand of the bird—catcher first flies in every direction and then finding no rest anywhere, settles down at the place where it is bound, so also the mind (i.e. the individual soul reflected in the mind), my dear, after flying in every direction and finding no rest anywhere, settles down in the Prana (i.e. Pure Being); for the mind (the individual soul) is fastened to the Prana (Pure Being). 6.8.3 “Learn from me, my dear, what hunger and thirst are. When a man is hungry, as they say, it is water that has led (i.e. carried away) what was eaten. Therefore, just as they speak of a leader of cows, a leader of horses, a leader of men, so do they speak of water as the leader of food. So, my dear, know this offshoot (i.e. the body) to have sprung forth from a cause, for it cannot be without a root. 6.8.4 “And where could its root be except in food (earth)? And in the same way, my dear, as food too is an offshoot, seek for water as its root. And as water too, my dear, is an offshoot, seek for fire as its root. And as fire too, my dear, is an offshoot, seek for Being (Sat) as its root. Yes, all these creatures, my dear, have their root in Being, they dwell in Being, they finally rest in Being. 6.8.5 “When a man is said to be thirsty, it is fire that has led (i.e. carried away) what was drunk by him. Therefore as they speak of a leader of cows, a leader of horses, a leader of men, so do they speak of fire as the leader of water. So, my dear, know this offshoot (the body) to have sprung forth from a cause, for it cannot be without a root. 6.8.6 “And where could its root be except in water? And in the same way, my dear, as water is an offshoot, seek for fire as its root. And as fire too, my dear, is an offshoot, seek for Being as its root. Yes, my dear, all these creatures have their root in Being, they dwell in Being, they finally rest in Being. “And how these three deities (fire, water and earth), on reaching a human being, become each of them tripartite has already been said. When a person departs hence, his speech merges in his mind, his mind in his prana, his prana in heat (fire) and the heat in the Highest Being. 6.8.7 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter IX — The Absence of Individuality in Deep Sleep 6.9.1, 6.9.2 “As bees, my dear, make honey by collecting the juices of trees located at different places and reduce them to one form, “And as these juices have no discrimination so as to be able to say: ‘I am the juice of this tree,’ or ‘I am the juice of that tree’—even so, indeed, my dear, all these creatures, though they reach Pure Being, do not know that they have reached Pure Being. 6.9.3 “Whatever these creatures are, here in this world—a tiger, a lion, a wolf, a boar, a worm, a fly, a gnat, or a mosquito—that they become again. 6.9.4 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter X — The Absence of Particularized Consciousness in Deep Sleep 6.10.1, 6.10.2 “These rivers, my dear, flow—the eastern toward the east and the western toward the west. They arise from the sea and flow into the sea. Just as these rivers, while they are in the sea, do not know: ‘I am this river’ or ‘I am that river,’ “Even so, my dear, all these creatures, even though they have come from Pure Being, do not know that they have come from Pure Being. Whatever these creatures are, here in this world—a tiger, a lion, a wolf a boar, a worm, a fly, a gnat, or a mosquito, that they become again. 6.10.3 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter XI — The Indestructibility of the Jiva 6.11.1 “If, my dear, someone were to strike at the root of this large tree here, it would bleed but live. If he were to strike at the middle, it would bleed but live. If he were to strike at the top, it would bleed but live. Pervaded by the living self, that tree stands firm, drinking in again and again its nourishment and rejoicing. 6.11.2 “But if the life (i.e. living self) leaves one of its branches, that branch withers; if it leaves a second, that branch withers; if it leaves a third, that branch withers. If it leaves the whole tree, the whole three withers. 6.11.3 “In exactly the same manner, my dear,” said he, “know this: This body dies, bereft of the living self; but the living self dies not. “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter XII — The Birth of the Gross from the Subtle 6.12.1 “Bring me a fruit of that nyagrodha (banyan) tree.” “Here it is’ venerable Sir.” “Break it.” “It is broken, venerable Sir.” “What do you see there?” “These seeds, exceedingly small, “Break one of these, my son.” “It is broken, venerable Sir.” “What do you see there?” “Nothing at all, venerable Sir.” 6.12.2 The father said: “That subtle essence, my dear, which you do not perceive there—from that very essence this great nyagrodha arises. Believe me, my dear. 6.12.3 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter XIII — The Invisibility of an Existent Object 6.13.1 “Place this salt in water and then come to me in the morning.” The son did as he was told. The father said to him: “My son, bring me the salt which you placed in the water last night.” Looking for it, the son did not find it, for it was completely dissolved. 6.13.2 The father said: “My son, take a sip of water from the surface. How is it?” “It is salt.” “Take a sip from the middle. How is it?” “It is salt.” “Take a sip from the bottom. How is it?” “It is salt.” “Throw it away and come to me.” The son did as he was told, saying: “The salt was there all the time.” Then the father said: “Here also, my dear, in this body you do not perceive Sat (Being); but It is indeed there.” 6.13.3 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter XIV — The Means of Self—Knowledge 6.14.1 “Just as someone, my dear, might lead a person, with his eyes covered, away from the country of the Gandharas and leave him in a place where there were no human beings; and just as that person would turn toward the east, or the north, or the south, or the west, shouting: ‘I have been brought here with my eyes covered, I have been left here with my eyes covered!’ 6.14.2 “And as thereupon someone might loosen the covering and say to him: ‘Gandhara is in that direction; go that way’; and as thereupon, having been informed and being capable of judgement, he would, by asking his way from one village to another, arrive at last at Gandhara—in exactly the same manner does a man who has found a teacher to instruct him obtain the true knowledge. For him there is delay only so long as he is not liberated from the body; then he reaches perfection. 6.14.3 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son. “So be it, my dear,” the father replied. Chapter XV — Ultimate Liberation 6.15.1 “Around a dying person afflicted with illness, my dear, his relatives gather and ask: ‘Do you know me? Do you know me?’ He knows them as long as his speech is not merged in his mind, his mind in his prana (breath), his prana in heat (fire) and the heat in the Highest Deity. 6.15.2 “But when his speech is merged in his mind, his mind in his prana, his prana in heat and the heat in the Highest Deity, then he does not know them. 6.15.3 “Now, that which is the subtle essence—in it all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” “Please, venerable Sir, give me further instruction,” said the son “So be it, my dear;” the father replied. Chapter XVI — Liberation for the Knower of Brahman 6.16.1 “My dear, they (i.e. the police) bring a man whom they have seized by the hand and say: ‘He has taken something, he has committed a theft.’ When he denies it, they say: ‘Heat the axe for him.’ If he has committed the theft but denies it, then he makes himself a liar. Being false—minded, he covers himself with falsehood, grasps the heated axe and is burnt. Then he is killed. 6.16.2 “But if he did not commit the theft, then he makes himself what he really is. Being true—minded, he covers himself with truth, grasps the heated axe and is not burnt. He is released. 6.16.3 “As that truthful man is not burnt so also one who has known Sat is not born again. Thus in That (Sat) all that exists has its self. That is the True. That is the Self. That thou art, Svetaketu.” Part Seven Chapter I — Dialogue between Narada and Sanatkumara 7.1.1 Om. Narada approached Sanatkumara as a pupil and said: “Venerable Sir, please teach me.” Sanatkumara said to him: “Please tell me what you already know. Then I shall tell you what is beyond.” 7.1.2 Narada said: “Venerable Sir, I know the Rig—Veda, the Yajur—Veda, the Sama—Veda, the Atharva—Veda as the fourth Veda, the epics (Puranas) and ancient lore (Itihasa) as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas (i.e. grammar), the rules of the sacrifices by which the Manes are gratified, the science of numbers, the science of portents, the science of time, logic, ethics, etymology, Brahma—vidya (i.e. the science of pronunciation, ceremonials, prosody, etc.), the science of elemental spirits, the science of weapons, astronomy, the science of serpents and the fine arts. All this I know, venerable Sir. 7.1.3 “But, venerable Sir, with all this I know words only; I do not know the Self. I have heard from men like you that he who knows the Self overcomes sorrow. I am one afflicted with sorrow. Do you, venerable Sir, help me to cross over to the other side of sorrow.” Sanatkumara said to him: “Whatever you have read is only a name. 7.1.4 “Verily, a name is the Rig—Veda; so also are the Yajur— Veda, the Sama—Veda, the Atharva—Veda as the fourth Veda, the epics and the ancient lore as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas, the rules of the sacrifices by which the Manes are gratified, the science of numbers, the science of portents, the science of time, logic, ethics, etymology, Brahma—vidya, the science of elemental spirits, the science of weapons, astronomy, the science of serpents and the fine arts. “Meditate on the name. 7.1.5 “He who meditates on a name as Brahman can, of his own free will, reach as far as the name reaches—he who meditates on a name as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than a name?” “Of course there is something greater than a name.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter II — Speech as Brahman 7.2.1 “Speech is, verily, greater than a name. Speech makes one understand the Rig—Veda, the Yajur—Veda, the Sama—Veda, the Atharva—Veda as the fourth, the epics and the ancient lore as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas, the rules of sacrifices by which the Manes are gratified, the science of numbers, the science of portents, the science of time, logic, ethics, etymology, Brahma—vidya, the science of elemental spirits, the science of weapons, astronomy, the science of serpents and the fine arts, as well as heaven, earth, air, akasa, water, fire, gods, men, cattle, birds, herbs, trees, animals, together with worms, flies and ants, as also righteousness and unrighteousness, the true and the false, the good and the bad, the pleasant and the unpleasant. “Verily, if there were no speech, neither righteousness nor unrighteousness would be known, neither the true nor the false, neither the pleasant nor the unpleasant. “Speech, verily, makes us know all this. Meditate upon speech. 7.2.2 “He who meditates on speech as Brahman can, of his own free will, reach as far as speech reaches—he who meditates on speech as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than speech?” “Of course there is something greater than speech.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter III — Mind as Brahman 7.3.1 “The mind is, verily, greater than speech. Just as the closed fist holds two amalakas, or two plums, or two aksha fruits, so does the mind hold speech and a name. For when a man thinks in his mind that he would read the sacred hymns, then he reads them. When he thinks in his mind that he would perform actions, then he performs them. When he thinks in his mind that he would have sons and cattle, then he desires them. When he thinks in his mind that he would have this world and the other, then he desires them. Mind, indeed, is the self; mind is the world; mind is Brahman. “Meditate on the mind. 7.3.2 “He who meditates on mind as Brahman can, of his own free will, reach as far as mind reaches—he who meditates on mind as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than mind?” “Of course there is something greater than mind.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter IV — Will as Brahman 7.4.1 “Will (Samkalpa) is, verily, greater than mind. For when a man wills, then he thinks in his mind, then he utters speech and then he employs speech in the recital of a name. The sacred hymns are included in a name and all sacrifices are included in the sacred hymns. 7.4.2 “Will, indeed, is the goal of all these beginning with mind and ending in sacrifice; from will they arise and in will they all abide. Heaven and earth willed, air and akasa willed, water and fire willed. Through the will of heaven and earth, etc. the rain wills; through the will of the rain, food wills; through the will of food, the pranas will; through the will of the pranas, the sacred hymns will; through the will of the sacred hymns, the sacrifices will; through the will of the sacrifices, the world wills; through the will of the world, everything wills. Such is will. Meditate on will. 7.4.3 “He who meditates on will as Brahman can, of his own free will, reach as far as will reaches—he who meditates on will as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than will?” “Of course there is something greater than will.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter V — Consideration as Brahman 7.5.1 “Consideration (Chitta) is, verily, greater than will. For when a man considers, then he wills, then he thinks in his mind, then he utters speech, then he engages speech in the recitation of a name. The sacred hymns are included in a name and all sacrifices are included in the sacred hymns. 7.5.2 “Consideration is, indeed, the goal of all these beginning with mind and ending in sacrifice; from consideration they arise and in consideration they all abide. Therefore if a person is without consideration, even though he possesses much knowledge, people say of him that he is nothing and whatever he knows is useless; for if he were really learned, he would not be so inconsiderate. But if a person is considerate, though he knows but little, to him people are eager to listen. Consideration, indeed, is the goal of all these; consideration is the self; consideration is the support. Meditate on consideration. 7.5.3 “He who meditates on consideration as Brahman, he, being permanent, firm and undistressed, obtains the worlds which are permanent, firm and undistressed; he can, of his own free win, reach as far as consideration reaches—he who meditates on consideration as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than consideration?” “Of course there is something greater than consideration.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter VI — Meditation as Brahman 7.6.1 “Meditation (Dhyana) is, verily, greater than consideration. Earth meditates, as it were. The mid—region meditates, as it were. Heaven meditates, as it were. The waters meditate, as it were. The mountains meditate, as it were. The gods meditate, as it were. Men meditate, as it were. Therefore he who, among men, attains greatness here on earth seems to have obtained a share of meditation. Thus while small people are quarrelsome, abusive and slandering, great men appear to have obtained a share of meditation. Meditate on meditation. 7.6.2 “He who meditates on meditation as Brahman, can, of his own free will, reach as far as meditation reaches—he who meditates on meditation as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than meditation?” “Of course there is something greater than meditation.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter VII — Understanding as Brahman 7.7.1 “Understanding is, verily, greater than meditation. Understanding makes one understand the Rig—Veda, the Yajur—Veda, the Sama—Veda, the Atharva—Veda as the fourth, the epics and the ancient lore as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas, the rules of sacrifices by which the Manes are gratified, the science of numbers, the science of portents, the science of time, logic, ethics, etymology, Brahma—vidya, the science of elemental spirits, the science of weapons, astronomy, the science of serpents and the fine arts; heaven, earth, air, water, fire, gods, men, cattle, birds, herbs, trees; animals, together with worms, flies and ants; and also righteousness and unrighteousness, the true and the false, the good and the bad, the pleasant and the unpleasant, food and taste, this world and yonder world. Meditate on understanding. 7.7.2 “He who meditates on understanding as Brahman attains the worlds of understanding and knowledge and can, of his own free will, reach as far as understanding reaches—he who meditates on understanding as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than understanding?” “Of course there is something greater than understanding.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter VIII — Strength as Brahman 7.8.1 “Strength is, verily, greater than understanding. One strong man causes a hundred men of understanding to tremble. When a man is strong he can rise. If he rises he can attend on the teachers. If he attends on them he can become their intimate companion as a pupil. If he is their intimate companion he can watch their conduct, listen to their instruction, reflect on what he hears, become convinced of what he reflects on, act and enjoy the result of action. By strength the earth stands firm, by strength the mid—region, by strength heaven, by strength the mountains, by strength the gods and men, by strength cattle and birds, herbs and trees and animals, together with worms, flies and ants, by strength the world stands firm. Meditate upon strength.” 7.8.2 “He who meditates on strength as Brahman can, of his own free will, reach as far as strength reaches—he who meditates on strength as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than strength?” “Of course there is something greater than strength.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter IX — Food as Brahman 7.9.1 “Food is, verily, greater than strength. Therefore if a man abstains from food for ten days, even though he might live, yet he would not be able to see, hear, reflect, become convinced, act, or enjoy the result. But when he obtains food, he is able to see, hear, reflect, become convinced, act and enjoy the result. 7.9.2 “He who meditates on food as Brahman obtains the world rich in food and drink; he can, of his own free will, reach as far as food reaches—he who meditates on food as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than food?” “Of course there is something greater than food.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter X — Water as Brahman 7.10.1 “Water is, verily, greater than food. Therefore if there is not sufficient rain, then living creatures are afflicted with the thought that there will be less food. But if there is sufficient rain, then living creatures rejoice in the thought that there will be much food. It is water that assumes the form of this earth, this mid—region, this heaven, these mountains, these gods and men, cattle and birds, herbs and trees and animals, together with worms, flies and ants. Water indeed is all these forms. Meditate on water. 7.10.2 “He who meditates on water as Brahman obtains all his desires and becomes satisfied; he can, of his own free will, reach as far as water reaches—he who meditates on water as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than water?” “Of course there is something greater than water.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter XI — Fire as Brahman 7.11.1 “Fire is, verily, greater than water. For, having seized the air, it warms the akasa. Then people say: ‘It is hot, it burns; it will rain.’ Thus does fire first manifest itself and then create water. Furthermore, thunderclaps roll with lightning upward and across the sky. Then people say: ‘There is lightning, there is thunder; it will rain.’ Here also does fire first manifest itself and then create water. Meditate on fire. 7.11.2 “He who meditates on fire as Brahman becomes radiant himself and obtains radiant worlds, full of light and free from darkness; he can, of his own free will, reach as far as fire reaches—he who meditates on fire as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than fire?” “Of course there is something greater than fire.” “Please tell that to me, Venerable Sir.” Chapter XII — The Akasa as Brahman 7.12.1 “The akasa is, verily, greater than fire. For in the akasa exist both the sun and the moon, lightning, stars and fire. It is through the akasa that a person calls another; it is through the akasa that the other hears; it is through the akasa that the person hears back. In the akasa we rejoice when we are together and in the akasa we rejoice not when we are separated. In the akasa everything is born and toward the akasa all things grow. Meditate upon the akasa. 7.12.2 “He who meditates on the akasa as Brahman obtains the worlds extending far and wide, luminous, free from pain and spacious; he can, of his own free will, reach as far as the akasa reaches— he who meditates on the akasa as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than the akasa?” “Of course there is something greater than the akasa.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter XIII — Memory as Brahman 7.13.1 “Memory is, verily, greater than the akasa. Therefore even when many people assemble, if they had no memory they would not hear anyone at all, they would not think, they would not understand. But surely, if they had memory, they would hear, think and understand. Through memory one knows one’s sons, through memory one’s cattle. Meditate on memory. 7.13.2 “He who meditates on memory as Brahman can, of his own free will, reach as far as memory reaches—he who meditates on memory as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than memory?” “Of course there is something greater than memory.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter XIV — Hope as Brahman 7.14.1 “Hope is, verily, greater than memory. Kindled by hope, a person endowed with memory reads the sacred hymns, performs sacrifices, desires sons and cattle; desires this world and the other. Meditate on hope. 7.14.2 “He who meditates on hope as Brahman—all his desires are fulfilled through hope, his prayers are not in vain; he can, of his own free will, reach as far as hope reaches—he who meditates on hope as Brahman.” Narada said: “Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than hope?” “Of course there is something greater than hope.” “Please tell that to me, venerable Sir.” Chapter XV — The Prana as Brahman 7.15.1 “The prana is, verily, greater than hope. As the spokes of a wheel are fastened to the nave, so are all these beginning with the name and ending with hope fastened to the prana. The prana moves by the prana. The prana gives the prana to the prana. The prana is the father, the prana is the mother, the prana is the brother, the prana is the sister, the prana is the teacher, the prana is the brahmin. 7.15.2 “If one says something unbecoming to a father, mother, brother, sister, teacher, or brahmin, then people say: ‘Shame on you! Verily, you are a slayer of your father, a slayer of your mother, a slayer of your brother, a slayer of your sister, a slayer of your teacher, a slayer of a brahmin.’ 7.15.3 “But if; when the prana has departed from them, one shoves them together with a poker and burns every bit of them, no one would say: ‘You are a slayer of your father, a slayer of your mother, a slayer of your brother, a slayer of your sister, a slayer of your teacher, a slayer of a brahmin.” 7.15.4 “The prana, verily, is all this. He (i.e. the knower of the prana) who sees this, reflects on this, is convinced of this, becomes an ativadi (superior speaker). If people say to such a man: ‘You are an ativadi,’ he may say: ‘Yes, I am an ativadi’; he need not deny it.” Chapter XVI — The Knowledge of the Truth 7.16.1 “But in reality he is an ativadi who has become an ativadi by the knowledge of the True.” “May I, venerable Sir, become an ativadi by the knowledge of the True.” “But one should desire to know the True.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to know the True.” Chapter XVII — Truth depends upon Understanding 7.17.1 Sanatkumara said: “When one understands the True, only then does one declare the True. One who does not understand the True does not declare It. Only one who understands It declares the True. One must desire to understand this understanding.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand.” Chapter XVIII — Understanding depends upon Reflection 7.18.1 “When one reflects, only then does one understand. One Who does not reflect does not understand. Only one who reflects understands. One must desire to understand this reflection.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand reflection.” Chapter XIX — Reflection depends upon Faith 7.19.1 “When one has faith, only then does one reflect. One who does not have faith does not reflect. Only one who has faith reflects. One must desire to understand faith.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand faith.” Chapter XX — Faith depends upon Single—Mindedness 7.20.1 “When one is single—minded in one’s devotion to the teacher, only then does one have faith. One who does not have single— mindedness does not have faith. Only one who has single— mindedness has faith. One must desire to understand single— mindedness.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand single—mindedness.” Chapter XXI — Single—Mindedness depends upon Concentration 7.21.1 “When one performs one’s duties (i.e. practises concentration), only then does one have single—mindedness. One who does not perform his duties does not have single—mindedness. Only one who performs his duties has single—mindedness. One must desire to understand the performance of duties.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand the performance of duties.” Chapter XXII — Concentration depends upon Bliss 7.22.1 “When one obtains bliss, only then does one perform one’s duties. One who does not obtain bliss does not perform his duties. Only one who obtains bliss performs his duties. One must desire to understand bliss.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand bliss.” Chapter XXIV — The Infinite is Bliss 7.23.1 “The infinite is bliss. There is no bliss in anything finite. Only the Infinite is bliss. One must desire to understand the Infinite.” “Venerable Sir, I desire to understand the Infinite.” Chapter XXIV — The Infinite and the Finite 7.24.1 “Where one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, understands nothing else—that is the Infinite. Where one sees something else, hears something else, understands something else—that is the finite. The Infinite is immortal, the finite mortal.” “Venerable Sir, in what does the Infinite find Its support?” “In Its own greatness—or not even in greatness.” 7.24.2 “Here on earth people describe cows and horses, elephants and gold, slaves and wives, fields and houses, as ‘greatness.’ I do not mean this,” he said, “for in such cases one thing finds its support in another. But what I say is: Chapter XXV — Instruction about the Infinite 7.25.1 “That infinite, indeed, is below. It is above. It is behind. It is before. It is to the south. It is to the north. The Infinite, indeed, is all this. “Next follows the instruction about the Infinite with reference to ‘I’: I, indeed, am below. I am above. I am behind. I am before. I am to the south. I am to the north. I am, indeed, all this. 7.25.2 “Next follows the instruction about the Infinite with reference to the Self: The Self indeed, is below. It is above. It is behind. It is before. It is to the south. It is to the north. The Self, indeed, is all this. “Verily, he who sees this, reflects on this and understands this delights in the Self sports with the Self, rejoices in the Self revels in the Self. Even while living in the body he becomes a self—ruler. He wields unlimited freedom in all the worlds. ‘‘But those who think differently from this have others for their rulers they live in perishable worlds. They have no freedom in all the worlds.” Chapter XXVI — Self—knowledge 7.26.1 “For him who sees this, reflects on this and understands this, the prana springs from the Self, hope springs from the Self, memory springs from the Self, the akasa springs from the Self, fire springs from the Self; water springs from the Self; appearance and disappearance spring from the Self, food springs from the Self, strength springs from the Self; understanding springs from the Self, meditation springs from the Self, consideration springs from the Self, will springs from the Self; mind springs from the Self speech springs from the Self, the name springs from the Self the sacred hymns spring from the Self the sacrifices spring from the Self—ay, all this springs from the Self.” 7.26.2 “On this there is the following verse: “‘The knower of Truth does not see death or disease or sorrow. The knower of Truth sees everything and obtains everything everywhere.’ “He (the knower) is one before the creation, becomes three, becomes five, becomes seven, becomes nine; then again he is called eleven, one hundred and ten and one thousand and twenty. “Now is described the discipline for inner purification by which Self—Knowledge is attained: When the food is pure, the mind becomes pure. When the mind is pure the memory becomes firm. When the memory is firm all ties are loosened.” The venerable Sanatkumara showed Narada, after his blemishes had been wiped out, the other side of darkness. They call Sanatkumara Skanda, yea, Skanda they call him. Part Eight Chapter I — Brahman in the Heart 8.1.1 Om. There is in this city of Brahman an abode, the small lotus of the heart; within it is a small akasa. Now what exists within that small akasa, that is to be sought after, that is what one should desire to understand. 8.1.2, 8.1.3 If they should say to him: “Now, with regard to the abode, the small lotus, in this city of Brahman and the small akasa within it—what is there in it that is to be sought after and what is there that one should desire to understand?” Then he (the teacher) should say: “As far as, verily, this great akasa extends, so far extends the akasa within the heart. Both heaven and earth are contained within it, both fire and air, both sun and moon, both lightning and stars; and whatever belongs to him (i.e. the embodied creature) in this world and whatever does not, all that is contained within it (i.e. the akasa in the heart).” 8.1.4 If they (the pupils) should say: “If everything that exists—all beings and all desires—is contained in this city of Brahman, then what is left of it when old age overcomes it or when it perishes?” 8.1.5 Then he (the teacher) should say: “With the old age of the body, That (i.e. Brahman, described as the akasa in the heart) does not age; with the death of the body, That does not die. That Brahman and not the body is the real city of Brahman. In It all desires are contained. It is the Self—free from sin, free from old age, free from death, free from grief free from hunger, free from thirst; Its desires come true, Its thoughts come true. Just as, here on earth, people follow as they are commanded by a leader and depend upon whatever objects they desire, be it a country or a piece of land so also those who are ignorant of the Self depend upon other objects and experience the result of their good and evil deeds. 8.1.6 “And just as, here on earth, whatever is earned through work perishes, so does the next world, won by virtuous deeds, perish. Those who depart hence without having realized the Self and these true desires—for them there is no freedom in all the worlds. But those who depart hence after having realized the Self and these true desires—for them there is freedom in all the worlds. Chapter II — The Fulfilment of Desires through Self—Knowledge 8.2.1 “If he desires the World of the Manes, by his mere thought the Manes come to him. Having obtained the world of the Manes he is happy. 8.2.2 “And if he desires the world of the mothers, by his mere thought the mothers come to him. Having obtained the world of the mothers, he is happy. 8.2.3 “And if he desires the world of the brothers, by his mere thought the brothers come to him. Having obtained the world of the brothers, he is happy. 8.2.4 “And if he desires the world of the sisters, by his mere thought the sisters come to him. Having obtained the world of the sisters, he is happy. 8.2.5 “And if he desires the world of the friends, by his mere thought the friends come to him. Having obtained the world of the friends, he is happy. 8.2.6 “And if he desires the world of perfumes and garlands, by his mere thought perfumes and garlands come to him. Having obtained the world of perfumes and garlands, he is happy. 8.2.7 “And if he desires the world of food and drink, by his mere thought food and drink come to him. Having obtained the world of food and drink, he is happy. 8.2.8 “And if he desires the world of song and music, by his mere thought song and music come to him. Having obtained the world of song and music, he is happy. 8.2.9 “And if he desires the world of women, by his mere thought women come to him. Having obtained the world of women, he is happy. 8.2.10 “Whatever country he longs for, whatever objects he desires, by his mere thought all these come to him. Having obtained them, he is happy. Chapter III — The Serene Self and Satya Brahman 8.3.1 “These true desires are covered by what is false. Though they exist always, yet they have a covering which is false. Thus, whosoever belonging to the embodied creature has departed from this life, him he cannot see in this world with his eyes. 8.3.2 “Those of his fellows who belong to him here and those who are dead and whatever else there is which he wishes for and does not obtain—he finds all that by going in there (i.e. into his own Self). For there, indeed, lie those true desires of his, covered by what is false. “As people who do not know the spot where a treasure of gold has been hidden somewhere in the earth, walk over it again and again without finding it, so all these creatures day after day go into the World of Brahman and yet do not find it, because they are carried away by untruth. 8.3.3 “That Self abides in the heart. The etymological explanation of heart is this: This one (ayam) is in the heart (hridi); therefore It is called the heart (hridayam). He who knows this goes every day in deep sleep to Heaven (i.e. Brahman, dwelling in the heart). 8.3.4 “Now, this serene being, after rising from this physical body and attaining the Highest Light, reaches his own true form. This is the Self.” Thus he (i.e. the teacher, questioned by his pupils) spoke. Continuing, he said: “This is the immortal, the fearless. This is Brahman. And of this Brahman the name is Satyam, the True.” 8.3.5 This name Satyam consists of three syllables: Sat, ti and yam. That which is Sat signifies the Immortal; and that which is ti is the mortal; and yam binds them both. Because this syllable binds both, therefore it is called yam. He who knows this goes every day in deep sleep to Heaven (i.e. Brahman, dwelling in the heart). Chapter IV — Brahman as a Dam 8.4.1 The self is a dam, a separating boundary, for keeping these worlds apart. This dam is not passed by day and night, by old age, death and grief, or by good and evil deeds. All evils turn back from It, for the World of Brahman is free from all evil. 8.4.2 Therefore, having reached this dam, he who is blind ceases to be blind, he who is miserable ceases to be miserable, he who is afflicted with disease ceases to be afflicted. Therefore, having reached this dam, the night becomes day; for the World of Brahman is lighted once for all. 8.4.3 That World of Brahman belongs to those who realize It by means of continence (brahmacharya)—for them there is freedom in all the worlds. Chapter V — Continence 8.5.1 Now, what people call yajna (sacrifice), that is really continence. For he who knows Brahman obtains that World of Brahman, which others obtain through sacrifice, by means of continence. What people call ishta (worship), that is really continence. For having desired (ishtva) the Knowledge of the Self; by means of continence one realizes the Self. 8.5.2 Now, what people call the Satrayana sacrifice, that is really continence. For by means of continence one obtains from the True (Sat) the safety (trana) of the self. What people call the vow of silence (mauna), that is really continence. For after knowing the Self from the scriptures one meditates (manute) on It. 8.5.3 Now, what people call the vow of fasting (anasakayana), that is really continence. For that Self does not perish (na nasyati) which one realizes by means of continence. 8.5.4 The World of Brahman belongs to those who obtain by means of continence the seas Ara and Nya in the World of Brahman. For them there is freedom in all the worlds. Chapter VI — The Course after Death for the Illumined 8.6.1 Now, those arteries of the heart are filled with the essences of brown, white, blue, yellow and red liquid substances. Verily, the sun yonder is brown, it is white, it is blue, it is yellow, it is red. 8.6.2 As a long highway runs between two villages, this one and that yonder, so do the rays of the sun go to both worlds, this one and that yonder. They start from yonder sun and enter into these arteries; they start from these arteries and enter into yonder sun. 8.6.3 When a man is asleep, with the senses withdrawn and serene and sees no dream, then he has entered into these arteries. Then no evil touches him, for he has obtained the light of the sun. 8.6.4 And when he becomes weak, then those sitting around him say: “Do you know me? Do you know me?” As long as he has not departed from this body, he knows them. 8.6.5 When he departs from the body if he is a mere ritualist and ignorant of Brahman he then goes upward by these rays toward the worlds which he has gained by his meritorious work. Or if he is a knower of the doctrines of the akasa in the lotus of the heart, he then meditates on Om and thus secures entrance into Brahmaloka. Or if he is ignorant he attains lower bodies. The knower attains the solar orb as quickly as one directs one’s mind from one object to another. This indeed is the door to the World of Brahman for those who know; for the ignorant it is closed. 8.6.6 On this there is the following verse: “There are one hundred and one arteries of the heart, one of which pierces the crown of the head. Going upward by it, a man at death attains immortality. Other arteries, going in different directions, only serve as channels for his departing from the body, yea, only serve as channels for his departing from the body.” Chapter VII — The Person in the Eye 8.7.1 Prajapati said: “The Self which is free from sin, free from old age, free from death, free from grief, free from hunger, free from thirst, whose desires come true and whose thoughts come true—That it is which should be searched out, That it is which one should desire to understand. He who has known this Self from the scriptures and a teacher and understood It obtains all the worlds and all desires. 8.7.2 The devas (gods) and asuras (demons) both heard these words and said: “Well, let us search out this Self by searching out which one obtains all the worlds and all desires.” Indra, among the gods, went forth and Virochana, among the demons. Without communicating with each other, the two came into the presence of Prajapati, fuel in hand. 8.7.3 They dwelt there for thirty—two years, practising brahmacharya. Then Prajapati said to them: “For what purpose have you both been living here?” They said: “A saying of yours is being repeated by learned people: ‘The Self which is free from sin, free from old age, free from death, free from grief, free from hunger, free from thirst, whose desires come true and whose thoughts come true—That it is which should be searched out, That it is which one should desire to understand. He who has known this Self and understood It obtains all the worlds and all desires.’ Now, we both have dwelt here because we desire that Self.” 8.7.4 Prajapati said to them: “The person that is seen in the eye—that is the Self.” He further said: “This is immortal, fearless. This is Brahman.” They asked: “Venerable Sir, he who is perceived in the water and he who is perceived in a mirror—which of these is he?” Prajapati replied: “The same one, indeed, is perceived in all these.” Chapter VIII — The Doctrine of the Demons 8.8.1 Prajapati said: “Look at yourself in a pan of water and then what you do not understand of the Self come and tell me.” They cast their glance in a pan of water. Then Prajapati said to them: “What do you see?” They said: “Venerable Sir, we see the entire self even to the very hairs and nails, a veritable picture.” 8.8.2 Prajapati said to them: “After you have well adorned yourselves with ornaments, put on your best clothes and cleansed yourselves, look into the pan of water.” After having adorned themselves well, put on their best clothes and cleansed themselves, they looked into the pan of water. “What do you see?” asked Prajapati. 8.8.3 They said: “Just as we ourselves are well adorned, well dressed and clean, so, venerable Sir, are these two reflections well adorned, well dressed and clean.” Prajapati said: “This is the Self, this is immortal, fearless. This is Brahman.” They both went away satisfied in heart. 8.8.4 Prajapati saw them going and said: “They are both going away without having known and without having realized the Self. And whoever of these, whether gods or demons, follow this doctrine shall perish.” Virochana, satisfied in heart, went to the demons and preached this doctrine (Upanishad) to them: “The self (i.e. body) alone is to be worshipped here on earth, the self (i.e. body) alone is to be served. It is only by worshipping the self here and by serving the self that one gains both worlds—this and the next.” 8.8.5 Therefore even today they say of one who does not practise charity, who has no faith and who does not perform sacrifices: “He is verily a demon”; for such is the doctrine of the demons. The demons deck the bodies of the dead with garlands and perfume, with raiment and with ornaments, for they think that thus they will win the world beyond. Chapter IX — The Shadow Self is Perishable 8.9.1 But Indra, even before he had reached the gods, saw this difficulty: “As this reflection in the water is well adorned when the body is well adorned, well dressed when the body is well dressed, clean when the body is clean, so this reflection in the water will be blind if the body is blind, one—eyed if the body is one—eyed, crippled if the body is crippled and will perish if the body perishes. 8.9.2 “I do not see any good in this doctrine.” He returned with fuel in hand. To him Prajapati said: “Well, Indra, you went away with Virochana, satisfied in heart; now for what purpose have you come back?” He (Indra) said: “Venerable Sir, as this reflection in the water is well adorned when the body is well adorned, well dressed when the body is well dressed, clean when the body is clean, so this reflection in the water will be blind if the body is blind, one— eyed if the body is one—eyed, crippled if the body is crippled and will perish if the body perishes. Therefore I do not see any good in this doctrine.” 8.9.3 “So it is Indra,” replied Prajapati. “I shall explain the Self to you further. Live with me another thirty—two years.” He lived with Prajapati another thirty—two years. Then Prajapati said to Indra: Chapter X — The Dream Self 8.10.1, 8.10.2 “He who moves about, exalted, in dreams—this is the Self, this is immortal, fearless. This is Brahman.” Then Indra went away satisfied in heart. But even before he had reached the gods, he saw this difficulty: “Although this dream self is not blind even if the body is blind, nor do its eyes and nose run when the eyes and nose of the body run; although this self is not affected by the defects of the body, “Nor killed when it (the body) is killed, nor one—eyed when it is one—eyed—yet they kill it (the dream self), as it were; they chase it, as it were. It becomes conscious of pain, as it were; it weeps, as it were. I do not see any good in this doctrine.” 8.10.3, 8.10.4 He returned with fuel in hand. To him Prajapati said: “Well, Indra, you went away satisfied in heart; now for what purpose have you come back?” He (Indra) said: “Venerable Sir, although this dream self is not blind even if the body is blind, nor do its eyes and nose run when the eyes and nose of the body run; although this self is not affected by the defects of the body, “Nor killed when it (the body) is killed, nor one—eyed when it is one—eyed—yet they kill it (the dream self), as it were; they chase it, as it were. It becomes conscious of pain, as it were; it weeps, as it were. I do not see any good in this.” “So it is, Indra,” replied Prajapati. “I shall explain the Self further to you. Live with me another thirty—two years.” He lived with Prajapati another thirty—two years. Then Prajapati said to Indra: Chapter XI — The Self in Dreamless Sleep 8.11.1 “When a man is asleep, with senses withdrawn and serene and sees no dream—that is the Self. This is immortal, fearless. This is Brahman.” Then Indra went away satisfied in heart. But even before he had reached the gods, he saw this difficulty: “In truth it (i.e. the self in dreamless sleep) does not know itself as ‘I am it,’ nor these other creatures. It has therefore reached in dreamless sleep utter annihilation, as it were. I do not see any good in this.” 8.11.2 He returned with fuel in hand. To him Prajapati said: “Well, Indra, you went away satisfied in heart; now for what purpose have you come back?” He (Indra) said: “Venerable Sir, in truth it (i.e. the self in dreamless sleep) does not know itself as ‘I am it,’ nor these other creatures. It has therefore reached utter annihilation, as it were. I do not see any good in this.” 8.11.3 “So it is, Indra,” replied Prajapati. “I shall explain the Self further to you and nothing else. Live with me another five years.” Indra lived with Prajapati another five years. This made in all one hundred and one years. Therefore people say that Indra lived with Prajapati as a brahmacharin one hundred and one years. Then Prajapati said to him: Chapter XII — The Incorporeal Self 8.12.1 “O Indra, this body is mortal, always held by death. It is the abode of the Self which is immortal and incorporeal. The embodied self is the victim of pleasure and pain. So long as one is identified with the body, there is no cessation of pleasure and pain. But neither pleasure nor pain touches one who is not identified with the body. 8.12.2, 8.12.3 “The wind is without body; the cloud, lightning and thunder are without body. Now, as these, arising from yonder akasa and reaching the highest light, appear in their own forms, “So does this serene Being, arising from this body and reaching the Highest Light, appear in His own form. In that state He is the Highest Person. There He moves about, laughing, playing, rejoicing—be it with women, chariots, or relatives, never thinking of the body into which he was born. “As an animal is attached to a cart, so is the prana (i.e. the conscious self) attached to the body. 8.12.4 “When the person in the eye resides in the body, he resides where the organ of sight has entered into the akasa (i.e. the pupil of the eye); the eye is the instrument of seeing. He who is aware of the thought: ‘Let me smell this,’ he is the Self; the nose is the instrument of smelling. He who is aware of the thought: ‘Let me speak,’ he is the Self; the tongue is the instrument of speaking. He who is aware of the thought: ‘Let me hear,’ he is the Self; the ear is the instrument of hearing. 8.12.5 “He who is aware of the thought: ‘Let me think this,’ he is the Self; the mind is his divine eye. He, the Self sees all these desires in the World of Brahman through the divine eye, the mind and rejoices. 8.12.6 “The gods meditate on that Self. Therefore all worlds belong to them and all desires. He who knows that Self and understands It obtains all worlds and all desires.” Thus said Prajapati, yea, thus said Prajapati. Chapter XIII — A Mantra for Meditation and Repetition 8.13.1 From the dark I come to the variegated; from the variegated I come to the Dark. Shaking off evil as a horse shakes dust from its hair, freeing myself from the body as the moon frees itself from the mouth of Rahu, I fulfil all ends and obtain the uncreated World of Brahman. Chapter XIV — The Prayer of a Seeker of Eternal Life 8.14.1 That which is called the akasa is the revealer of names and forms. That within which these names and forms exist is, verily, Brahman. That is the Immortal; that is the Self. Now is stated a mantra: “I come to the assembly, the palace of Prajapati. I am the glory of the brahmins, the glory of the kings, the glory of the vaisyas. I wish to obtain that glory. I am the glory of glories. May I never go to the red and toothless, all— devouring, slippery place, yea, may I never go to it.” Chapter XV — The Attainment of Brahmaloka 8.15.1 Brahma told this knowledge of the Self to Prajapati (Kasyapa), Prajapati to Manu, Manu to mankind. He who has studied the Vedas at the house of a teacher, according to the prescribed rules, during the time left after the performance of his duties to the teacher; he who, after leaving the teacher’s house, has settled down into a householder’s life and continued the study of the Vedas in a sacred spot and made others (i.e. his sons and disciples) virtuous; he who has withdrawn all the sense— organs into the Self; he who has not given pain to any creature except as approved by the scriptures—he who conducts himself thus, all through his life, reaches the World of Brahman after death and does not return, yea, does not return. End of Chandogya Upanishad
ॐ आप्यायन्तु ममाङ्गानि वाक्प्राणश्चक्षुः श्रोत्रमथो बलमिन्द्रियाणि च सर्वाणि । सर्वं ब्रह्मौपनिषदं माहं ब्रह्म निराकुर्यां मा मा ब्रह्म निराकरोदनिराकरणमस्त्वनिराकरणंं मेऽस्तु । तदात्मनि निरते य उपनिषत्सु धर्मास्ते मयि सन्तु ते मयि सन्तु ॥ ॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः ॥ Transliteration oṃ āpyāyantu mamāṅgāni vākprāṇaścakṣuḥ śrotramatho balamindriyāṇi ca sarvāṇi . sarvaṃ brahmaupaniṣadaṃ māhaṃ brahma nirākuryāṃ mā mā brahma nirākarodanirākaraṇamastvanirākaraṇaṃṃ me'stu . tadātmani nirate ya upaniṣatsu dharmāste mayi santu te mayi santu .. .. oṃ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ śāntiḥ .. || prathamo'dhyāyaḥ || omityetadakṣaramudgīthamupāsīta | omiti hyudgāyati tasyopavyākhyānam || 1.1.1 || eṣāṃ bhūtānāṃ pṛthivī rasaḥ pṛthivyā apo rasaḥ | apāmoṣadhayo rasa oṣadhīnāṃ puruṣo rasaḥ puruṣasya vāgraso vāca ṛgrasa ṛcaḥ sāma rasaḥ sāmna udgītho rasaḥ || 1.1.2 || sa eṣa rasānāṃrasatamaḥ paramaḥ parārdhyo'ṣṭamo yadudgīthaḥ || 1.1.3 || katamā katamarkkatamatkatamatsāma katamaḥ katama udgītha iti vimṛṣṭaṃ bhavati || 1.1.4 || vāgevarkprāṇaḥ sāmomityetadakṣaramudgīthaḥ | tadvā etanmithunaṃ yadvākca prāṇaścarkca sāma ca || 1.1.5 || tadetanmithunamomityetasminnakṣare saṃsṛjyate yadā vai mithunau samāgacchata āpayato vai tāvanyonyasya kāmam || 1.1.6 || āpayitā ha vai kāmānāṃ bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānakṣaramudgīthamupāste || 1.1.7 || tadvā etadanujñākṣaraṃ yaddhi kiṃcānujānātyomityeva tadāhaiṣo eva samṛddhiryadanujñā samardhayitā ha vai kāmānāṃ bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānakṣaramudgīthamupāste || 1.1.8 || teneyaṃ trayīvidyā vartate omityāśrāvayatyomiti śaṃsatyomityudgāyatyetasyaivākṣarasyāpacityai mahimnā rasena || 1.1.9 || tenobhau kuruto yaścaitadevaṃ veda yaśca na veda | nānā tu vidyā cāvidyā ca yadeva vidyayā karoti śraddhayopaniṣadā tadeva vīryavattaraṃ bhavatīti khalvetasyaivākṣarasyopavyākhyānaṃ bhavati || 1.1.10 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.2 devāsurā ha vai yatra saṃyetire ubhaye prājāpatyāstaddha devā udgīthamājahruranenainānabhibhaviṣyāma iti || 1.2.1 || te ha nāsikyaṃ prāṇamudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taṃ hāsurāḥ pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayaṃ jighrati surabhi ca durgandhi ca pāpmanā hyeṣa viddhaḥ || 1.2.2 || atha ha vācamudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire tāṃ hāsurāḥ pāpmanā vividhustasmāttayobhayaṃ vadati satyaṃ cānṛtaṃ ca pāpmanā hyeṣā viddhā || 1.2.3 || atha ha cakṣurudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taddhāsurāḥ pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayaṃ paśyati darśanīyaṃ cādarśanīyaṃ ca pāpmanā hyetadviddham || 1.2.4 || atha ha śrotramudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taddhāsurāḥ pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayaṃ śṛṇoti śravaṇīyaṃ cāśravaṇīyaṃ ca pāpmanā hyetadviddham || 1.2.5 || atha ha mana udgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taddhāsurāḥ pāpmanā vividhustasmāttenobhayaṃsaṃkalpate saṃkalpanīyaṃca cāsaṃkalpanīyaṃ ca pāpmanā hyetadviddham || 1.2.6 atha ha ya evāyaṃ mukhyaḥ prāṇastamudgīthamupāsāṃcakrire taṃhāsurā ṛtvā vidadhvaṃsuryathāśmānamākhaṇamṛtvā vidhvaṃsetaivam || 1.2.7 || yathāśmānamākhaṇamṛtvā vidhvaṃsata evaṃ haiva sa vidhvaṃsate ya evaṃvidi pāpaṃ kāmayate yaścainamabhidāsati sa eṣo'śmākhaṇaḥ || 1.2.8 || naivaitena surabhi na durgandhi vijānātyapahatapāpmā hyeṣa tena yadaśnāti yatpibati tenetarānprāṇānavati etamu evāntato'vittvotkramati vyādadātyevāntata iti || 1.2.9 || taṃ hāṅgirā udgīthamupāsāṃcakra etamu evāṅgirasaṃ manyante'ṅgānāṃ yadrasaḥ || 1.2.10 || tena taṃ ha bṛhaspatirudgīthamupāsāṃcakra etamu eva bṛhaspatiṃ manyante vāgghi bṛhatī tasyā eṣa patiḥ || 1.2.11 || tena taṃ hāyāsya udgīthamupāsāṃcakra etamu evāyāsyaṃ manyanta āsyādyadayate || 1.2.12 || tena taṃha bako dālbhyo vidāṃcakāra | sa ha naimiśīyānāmudgātā babhūva sa ha smaibhyaḥ kāmānāgāyati || 1.2.13 || āgātā ha vai kāmānāṃ bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānakṣaramudgīthamupāsta ityadhyātmam || 1.2.14 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.3 athādhidaivataṃ ya evāsau tapati tamudgīthamupāsītodyanvā eṣa prajābhya udgāyati | udyaṃstamo bhayamapahantyapahantā ha vai bhayasya tamaso bhavati ya evaṃ veda || 1.3.1 || samāna u evāyaṃ cāsau coṣṇo'yamuṣṇo'sau svara itīmamācakṣate svara iti pratyāsvara ityamuṃ tasmādvā etamimamamuṃ codgīthamupāsīta || 1.3.2 || atha khalu vyānamevodgīthamupāsīta yadvai prāṇiti sa prāṇo yadapāniti so'pānaḥ | atha yaḥ prāṇāpānayoḥ saṃdhiḥ sa vyāno yo vyānaḥ sā vāk | tasmādaprāṇannanapānanvācamabhivyāharati || 1.3.3 || yā vāksarktasmādaprāṇannanapānannṛcamabhivyāharati yarktatsāma tasmādaprāṇannanapānansāma gāyati yatsāma sa udgīthastasmādaprāṇannanapānannudgāyati || 1.3.4 || ato yānyanyāni vīryavanti karmāṇi yathāgnermanthanamājeḥ saraṇaṃ dṛḍhasya dhanuṣa āyamanamaprāṇannanapānaṃstāni karotyetasya hetorvyānamevodgīthamupāsīta || 1.3.5 || atha khalūdgīthākṣarāṇyupāsītodgītha iti prāṇa evotprāṇena hyuttiṣṭhati vāggīrvāco ha gira ityācakṣate'nnaṃ thamanne hīdaṃsarvaṃsthitam || 1.3.6 || dyaurevodantarikṣaṃ gīḥ pṛthivī thamāditya evodvāyurgīragnisthaṃ sāmaveda evodyajurvedo gīrṛgvedasthaṃ dugdhe'smai vāgdohaṃ yo vāco doho'nnavānannādo bhavati ya etānyevaṃ vidvānudgīthākṣarāṇyupāsta udgītha iti || 1.3.7 || atha khalvāśīḥsamṛddhirupasaraṇānītyupāsīta yena sāmnā stoṣyansyāttatsāmopadhāvet || 1.3.8 || yasyāmṛci tāmṛcaṃ yadārṣeyaṃ tamṛṣiṃ yāṃ devatāmabhiṣṭoṣyansyāttāṃ devatāmupadhāvet || 1.3.9 || yena cchandasā stoṣyansyāttacchanda upadhāvedyena stomena stoṣyamāṇaḥ syāttaṃstomamupadhāvet || 1.3.10 || yāṃ diśamabhiṣṭoṣyansyāttāṃ diśamupadhāvet || 1.3.11 || ātmānamantata upasṛtya stuvīta kāmaṃ dhyāyannapramatto'bhyāśo ha yadasmai sa kāmaḥ samṛdhyeta yatkāmaḥ stuvīteti yatkāmaḥ stuvīteti || 1.3.12 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.4 omityetadakṣaramudgīthamupāsītomiti hyudgāyati tasyopavyākhyānam || 1.4.1 || devā vai mṛtyorbibhyatastrayīṃ vidyāṃ prāviśaṃste chandobhiracchādayanyadebhiracchādayaṃstacchandasāṃ chandastvam || 1.4.2 || tānu tatra mṛtyuryathā matsyamudake paripaśyedevaṃ paryapaśyadṛci sāmni yajuṣi | te nu viditvordhvā ṛcaḥ sāmno yajuṣaḥ svarameva prāviśan || 1.4.3 || yadā vā ṛcamāpnotyomityevātisvaratyevaṃsāmaivaṃ yajureṣa u svaro yadetadakṣarametadamṛtamabhayaṃ tatpraviśya devā amṛtā abhayā abhavan || 1.4.4 || sa ya etadevaṃ vidvānakṣaraṃ praṇautyetadevākṣaraṃ svaramamṛtamabhayaṃ praviśati tatpraviśya yadamṛtā devāstadamṛto bhavati || 1.4.5 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.5 atha khalu ya udgīthaḥ sa praṇavo yaḥ praṇavaḥ sa udgītha ityasau vā āditya udgītha eṣa praṇava omiti hyeṣa svaranneti || 1.5.1 || etamu evāhamabhyagāsiṣaṃ tasmānmama tvameko'sīti ha kauṣītakiḥ putramuvāca raśmīṃstvaṃ paryāvartayādbahavo vai te bhaviṣyantītyadhidaivatam || 1.5.2 || athādhyātmaṃ ya evāyaṃ mukhyaḥ prāṇastamudgīthamupāsītomiti hyeṣa svaranneti || 1.5.3 || etamu evāhamabhyagāsiṣaṃ tasmānmama tvameko'sīti ha kauṣītakiḥ putramuvāca prāṇāṃstvaṃ bhūmānamabhigāyatādbahavo vai me bhaviṣyantīti || 1.5.4 || atha khalu ya udgīthaḥ sa praṇavo yaḥ praṇavaḥ sa udgītha iti hotṛṣadanāddhaivāpi durudgīthamanusamāharatītyanusamāharatīti || 1.5.5 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.6 iyamevargagniḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍha़ṃ sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma gīyata iyameva sāgniramastatsāma || 1.6.1 || antarikṣamevargvāyuḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma gīyate'ntarikṣameva sā vāyuramastatsāma || 1.6.2 || dyaurevargādityaḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma gīyate dyaureva sādityo'mastatsāma || 1.6.3 || nakṣatrānyevarkcandramāḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma gīyate nakṣatrāṇyeva sā candramā amastatsāma || 1.6.4 || atha yadetadādityasya śuklaṃ bhāḥ saivargatha yannīlaṃ paraḥ kṛṣṇaṃ tatsāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma gīyate || 1.6.5 || atha yadevaitadādityasya śuklaṃ bhāḥ saiva sātha yannīlaṃ paraḥ kṛṣṇaṃ tadamastatsāmātha ya eṣo'ntarāditye hiraṇmayaḥ puruṣo dṛśyate hiraṇyaśmaśrurhiraṇyakeśa āpraṇasvātsarva eva suvarṇaḥ || 1.6.6 || tasya yathā kapyāsaṃ puṇḍarīkamevamakṣiṇī tasyoditi nāma sa eṣa sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhya udita udeti ha vai sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyo ya evaṃ veda || 1.6.7 || 7. His eyes are like lotuses blossomed by the sun. He is called ut because he is above all weakness. He who knows this truth is also above all weakness. Tasya, his; yathā, like; kapyāsam [kapi, which means ‘he who drinks water’ (i.e, the sun) + āsa, which means blossomed], blossomed by the sun; puṇḍarīkam evam, like the lotus; akṣinī the eyes; tasya ut iti nāma, his name is ‘ut’; saḥ eṣaḥ sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyaḥ uditaḥ, he is above all weakness; udeti, he rises; ha vai sarvebhyaḥ pāpmabhyaḥ, above all weakness; yaḥ, who; evam veda, knows thus. tasyarkca sāma ca geṣṇau tasmādudgīthastasmāttvevodgātaitasya hi gātā sa eṣa ye cāmuṣmātparāñco lokāsteṣāṃ ceṣṭe devakāmānāṃ cetyadhidaivatam || 1.6.8 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.7 athādhyātmaṃ vāgevarkprāṇaḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃ sāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma gīyate| vāgeva sā prāṇo'mastatsāma || 1.7.1 || cakṣurevargātmā sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma gīyate | cakṣureva sātmāmastatsāma || 1.7.2 || śrotramevarṅmanaḥ sāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma gīyate | śrotrameva sā mano'mastatsāma || 1.7.3 || atha yadetadakṣṇaḥ śuklaṃ bhāḥ saivargatha yannīlaṃ paraḥ kṛṣṇaṃ tatsāma tadetadetasyāmṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma tasmādṛcyadhyūḍhaṃsāma gīyate | atha yadevaitadakṣṇaḥ śuklaṃ bhāḥ saiva sātha yannīlaṃ paraḥ kṛṣṇaṃ tadamastatsāma || 1.7.4 || atha ya eṣo'ntarakṣiṇi puruṣo dṛśyate saivarktatsāma tadukthaṃ tadyajustadbrahma tasyaitasya tadeva rūpaṃ yadamuṣya rūpaṃ yāvamuṣya geṣṇau tau geṣṇau yannāma tannāma || 1.7.5 || sa eṣa ye caitasmādarvāñco lokāsteṣāṃ ceṣṭe manuṣyakāmānāṃ ceti tadya ime vīṇāyāṃ gāyantyetaṃ te gāyanti tasmātte dhanasanayaḥ || 1.7.6 || atha ya etadevaṃ vidvānsāma gāyatyubhau sa gāyati so'munaiva sa eṣa cāmuṣmātparāñco lokāstāṃścāpnoti devakāmāṃśca || 1.7.7 || athānenaiva ye caitasmādarvāñco lokāstāṃścāpnoti manuṣyakāmāṃśca tasmādu haivaṃvidudgātā brūyāt || 1.7.8 || kaṃ te kāmamāgāyānītyeṣa hyeva kāmāgānasyeṣṭe ya evaṃ vidvānsāma gāyati sāma gāyati || 1.7.9 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.8 trayo hodgīthe kuśalā babhūvuḥ śilakaḥ śālāvatyaścaikitāyano dālbhyaḥ pravāhaṇo jaivaliriti te hocurudgīthe vai kuśalāḥ smo hantodgīthe kathāṃ vadāma iti || 1.8.1 || tatheti ha samupaviviśuḥ sa ha prāvahaṇo jaivaliruvāca bhagavantāvagre vadatāṃ brāhmaṇayorvadatorvācaṃ śroṣyāmīti || 1.8.2 || sa ha śilakaḥ śālāvatyaścaikitāyanaṃ dālbhyamuvāca hanta tvā pṛcchānīti pṛccheti hovāca || 1.8.3 || kā sāmno gatiriti svara iti hovāca svarasya kā gatiriti prāṇa iti hovāca prāṇasya kā gatirityannamiti hovācānnasya kā gatirityāpa iti hovāca || 1.8.4 || apāṃ kā gatirityasau loka iti hovācāmuṣya lokasya kā gatiriti na svargaṃ lokamiti nayediti hovāca svargaṃ vayaṃ lokaṃ sāmābhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ svargasaṃstāvaṃhi sāmeti || 1.8.5 || taṃ ha śilakaḥ śālāvatyaścaikitāyanaṃ dālbhyamuvācāpratiṣṭhitaṃ vai kila te dālbhya sāma yastvetarhi brūyānmūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mūrdhā te vipatediti || 1.8.6 || hantāhametadbhagavato vedānīti viddhīti hovācāmuṣya lokasya kā gatirityayaṃ loka iti hovācāsya lokasya kā gatiriti na pratiṣṭhāṃ lokamiti nayediti hovāca pratiṣṭhāṃ vayaṃ lokaṃ sāmābhisaṃsthāpayāmaḥ pratiṣṭhāsaṃstāvaṃ hi sāmeti || 1.8.7 || taṃ ha pravāhaṇo jaivaliruvācāntavadvai kila te śālāvatya sāma yastvetarhi brūyānmūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mūrdhā te vipatediti hantāhametadbhagavato vedānīti viddhīti hovāca || 1.8.8 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.9 asya lokasya kā gatirityākāśa iti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtānyākāśādeva samutpadyanta ākāśaṃ pratyastaṃ yantyākāśo hyevaibhyo jyāyānakāśaḥ parāyaṇam || 1.9.1 || sa eṣa parovarīyānudgīthaḥ sa eṣo'nantaḥ parovarīyo hāsya bhavati parovarīyaso ha lokāñjayati ya etadevaṃ vidvānparovarīyāṃsamudgīthamupāste || 1.9.2 || taṃ haitamatidhanvā śaunaka udaraśāṇḍilyāyoktvovāca yāvatta enaṃ prajāyāmudgīthaṃ vediṣyante parovarīyo haibhyastāvadasmim̐lloke jīvanaṃ bhaviṣyati || 1.9.3 || tathāmuṣmim̐lloke loka iti sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste parovarīya eva hāsyāsmim̐lloke jīvanaṃ bhavati tathāmuṣmim̐lloke loka iti loke loka iti || 1.9.4 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.10 maṭacīhateṣu kuruṣvāṭikyā saha jāyayoṣastirha cākrāyaṇa ibhyagrāme pradrāṇaka uvāsa || 1.10.1 || sa hebhyaṃ kulmāṣānkhādantaṃ bibhikṣe taṃ hovāca | neto'nye vidyante yacca ye ma ima upanihitā iti || 1.10.2 || eteṣāṃ me dehīti hovāca tānasmai pradadau hantānupānamityucchiṣṭaṃ vai me pītaṃsyāditi hovāca || 1.10.3 || na svidete'pyucchiṣṭā iti na vā ajīviṣyamimānakhādanniti hovāca kāmo ma udapānamiti || 1.10.4 || sa ha khāditvātiśeṣāñjāyāyā ājahāra sāgra eva subhikṣā babhūva tānpratigṛhya nidadhau || 1.10.5 || sa ha prātaḥ saṃjihāna uvāca yadbatānnasya labhemahi labhemahi dhanamātrāṃrājāsau yakṣyate sa mā sarvairārtvijyairvṛṇīteti || 1.10.6 || taṃ jāyovāca hanta pata ima eva kulmāṣā iti tānkhāditvāmuṃ yajñaṃ vitatameyāya || 1.10.7 || tatrodgātṝnāstāve stoṣyamāṇānupopaviveśa sa ha prastotāramuvāca || 1.10.8 || prastotaryā devatā prastāvamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānprastoṣyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti || 1.10.9 || evamevodgātāramuvācodgātaryā devatodgīthamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānudgāsyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti || 1.10.10 || evameva pratihartāramuvāca pratihartaryā devatā pratihāramanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānpratihariṣyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti te ha samāratāstūṣṇīmāsāṃcakrire || 1.10.11 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.11 atha hainaṃ yajamāna uvāca bhagavantaṃ vā ahaṃ vividiṣāṇītyuṣastirasmi cākrāyaṇa iti hovāca || 1.11.1 || sa hovāca bhagavantaṃ vā ahamebhiḥ sarvairārtvijyaiḥ paryaiṣiṣaṃ bhagavato vā ahamavittyānyānavṛṣi || 1.11.2 || bhagavāṃstveva me sarvairārtvijyairiti tathetyatha tarhyeta eva samatisṛṣṭāḥ stuvatāṃ yāvattvebhyo dhanaṃ dadyāstāvanmama dadyā iti tatheti ha yajamāna uvāca || 1.11.3 || atha hainaṃ prastotopasasāda prastotaryā devatā prastāvamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānprastoṣyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mā bhagavānavocatkatamā sā devateti || 1.11.4 || prāṇa iti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtāni prāṇamevābhisaṃviśanti prāṇamabhyujjihate saiṣā devatā prastāvamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānprāstoṣyo mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyattathoktasya mayeti || 1.11.5 || atha hainamudgātopasasādodgātaryā devatodgīthamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānudgāsyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mā bhagavānavocatkatamā sā devateti || 1.11.6 || āditya iti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtānyādityamuccaiḥ santaṃ gāyanti saiṣā devatodgīthamanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānudagāsyo mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyattathoktasya mayeti || 1.11.7 || atha hainaṃ pratihartopasasāda pratihartaryā devatā pratihāramanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānpratihariṣyasi mūrdhā te vipatiṣyatīti mā bhagavānavocatkatamā sā devateti || 1.11.8 || annamiti hovāca sarvāṇi ha vā imāni bhūtanyannameva pratiharamāṇāni jīvanti saiṣā devatā pratihāramanvāyattā tāṃ cedavidvānpratyahariṣyo mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyattathoktasya mayeti tathoktasya mayeti || 1.11.9 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.12 athātaḥ śauva udgīthastaddha bako dālbhyo glāvo vā maitreyaḥ svādhyāyamudvavrāja || 1.12.1 || tasmai śvā śvetaḥ prādurbabhūva tamanye śvāna upasametyocurannaṃ no bhagavānāgāyatvaśanāyāmavā iti || 1.12.2 || tānhovācehaiva mā prātarupasamīyāteti taddha bako dālbhyo glāvo vā maitreyaḥ pratipālayāṃcakāra || 1.12.3 || te ha yathaivedaṃ bahiṣpavamānena stoṣyamāṇāḥ saṃrabdhāḥ sarpantītyevamāsasṛpuste ha samupaviśya hiṃ cakruḥ || 1.12.4 || o3madā3moṃ3pibā3moṃ3 devo varuṇaḥ prajapatiḥ savitā2nnamihā2haradannapate3'nnamihā 2harā2haro3miti || 1.12.5 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 1 Section 1.13 ayaṃ vāva loko hāukāraḥ vāyurhāikāraścandramā athakāraḥ | ātmehakāro'gnirīkāraḥ || 1.13.1 || āditya ūkāro nihava ekāro viśve devā auhoyikāraḥ prajapatirhiṃkāraḥ prāṇaḥ svaro'nnaṃ yā vāgvirāṭ || 1.13.2 || aniruktastrayodaśaḥ stobhaḥ saṃcaro huṃkāraḥ || 1.13.3 || दुग्धेऽस्मै वाग्दोहं यो वाचो दोहोऽन्नवानन्नादो भवति य एतामेवंसाम्नामुपनिषदं वेदोपनिषदं वेदेति ॥ १.१३.४ ॥ ॥ इति त्रयोदशः खण्डः ॥ ॥ इति प्रथमोऽध्यायः ॥ dugdhe'smai vāgdohaṃ yo vāco doho'nnavānannādo bhavati ya etāmevaṃsāmnāmupaniṣadaṃ vedopaniṣadaṃ vedeti || 1.13.4 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || || iti prathamo'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.1 || dvitīyo'dhyāyaḥ || samastasya khalu sāmna upāsanaṃ sādhu yatkhalu sādhu tatsāmetyācakṣate yadasādhu tadasāmeti || 2.1.1 || tadutāpyāhuḥ sāmnainamupāgāditi sādhunainamupāgādityeva tadāhurasāmnainamupāgādityasādhunainamupagādityeva tadāhuḥ || 2.1.2 || athotāpyāhuḥ sāma no bateti yatsādhu bhavati sādhu batetyeva tadāhurasāma no bateti yadasādhu bhavatyasādhu batetyeva tadāhuḥ || 2.1.3 || sa ya etadevaṃ vidvānasādhu sāmetyupāste'bhyāśo ha yadenaṃ sādhavo dharmā ā ca gaccheyurupa ca nameyuḥ || 2.1.4 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.2 lokeṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāsīta pṛthivī hiṃkāraḥ | agniḥ prastāvo'ntarikṣamudgītha ādityaḥ pratihāro dyaurnidhanamityūrdhveṣu || 2.2.1 || athāvṛtteṣu dyaurhiṃkāra ādityaḥ prastāvo'ntarikṣamudgītho'gniḥ pratihāraḥ pṛthivī nidhanam || 2.2.2 || kalpante hāsmai lokā ūrdhvāścāvṛttāśca ya etadevaṃ vidvām̐llokeṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāste || 2.2.3 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.3 vṛṣṭau pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāsīta purovāto hiṃkāro megho jāyate sa prastāvo varṣati sa udgītho vidyotate stanayati sa pratihāra udgṛhṇāti tannidhanam || 2.3.1 || varṣati hāsmai varṣayati ha ya etadevaṃ vidvānvṛṣṭau pañcavidhaṃsāmopāste || 2.3.2 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.4 sarvāsvapsu pañcavidhaṃsāmopāsīta megho yatsamplavate sa hiṃkāro yadvarṣati sa prastāvo yāḥ prācyaḥ syandante sa udgītho yāḥ pratīcyaḥ sa pratihāraḥ samudro nidhanam || 2.4.1 || na hāpsu praityapsumānbhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānsarvāsvapsu pañcavidhaṃsāmopāste || 2.4.2 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.5 ṛtuṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāsīta vasanto hiṃkāraḥ grīṣmaḥ prastāvo varṣā udgīthaḥ śaratpratihāro hemanto nidhanam || 2.5.1 || kalpante hāsmā ṛtava ṛtumānbhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānṛtuṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāste || 2.5.2 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.6 paśuṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāsītājā hiṃkāro'vayaḥ prastāvo gāva udgītho'śvāḥ pratihāraḥ puruṣo nidhanam || 2.6.1 || bhavanti hāsya paśavaḥ paśumānbhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānpaśuṣu pañcavidhaṃ sāmopāste || 2.6.2 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.7 prāṇeṣu pañcavidhaṃ parovarīyaḥ sāmopāsīta prāṇo hiṃkāro vākprastāvaścakṣurudgīthaḥ śrotraṃ pratihāro mano nidhanaṃ parovarīyāṃsi vā etāni || 2.7.1 || parovarīyo hāsya bhavati parovarīyaso ha lokāñjayati ya etadevaṃ vidvānprāṇeṣu pañcavidhaṃ parovarīyaḥ sāmopāsta iti tu pañcavidhasya || 2.7.2 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.8 atha saptavidhasya vāci saptavidhṃ sāmopāsīta yatkiṃca vāco humiti sa hiṃkāro yatpreti sa prastāvo yadeti sa ādiḥ || 2.8.1 || yaduditi sa udgītho yatpratīti sa pratihāro yadupeti sa upadravo yannīti tannidhanam || 2.8.2 || dugdhe'smai vāgdohaṃ yo vāco doho'nnavānannādo bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānvāci saptavidhaṃ sāmopāste || 2.8.3 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.9 atha khalvamumādityaṃsaptavidhaṃ sāmopāsīta sarvadā samastena sāma māṃ prati māṃ pratīti sarveṇa samastena sāma || 2.9.1 || tasminnimāni sarvāṇi bhūtānyanvāyattānīti vidyāttasya yatpurodayātsa hiṃkārastadasya paśavo'nvāyattāstasmātte hiṃ kurvanti hiṃkārabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ || 2.9.2 || atha yatprathamodite sa prastāvastadasya manuṣyā anvāyattāstasmātte prastutikāmāḥ praśaṃsākāmāḥ prastāvabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ || 2.9.3 || atha yatsaṃgavavelāyāṃ sa ādistadasya vayāṃsyanvāyattāni tasmāttānyantarikṣe'nārambaṇānyādāyātmānaṃ paripatantyādibhājīni hyetasya sāmnaḥ || 2.9.4 || atha yatsampratimadhyaṃdine sa udgīthastadasya devā anvāyattāstasmātte sattamāḥ prājāpatyānāmudgīthabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ || 2.9.5 || atha yadūrdhvaṃ madhyaṃdinātprāgaparāhṇātsa pratihārastadasya garbhā anvāyattāstasmātte pratihṛtānāvapadyante pratihārabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ || 2.9.6 || atha yadūrdhvamaparāhṇātprāgastamayātsa upadravastadasyāraṇyā anvāyattāstasmātte puruṣaṃ dṛṣṭvā kakṣaṃśvabhramityupadravantyupadravabhājino hyetasya sāmnaḥ || 2.9.7 || atha yatprathamāstamite tannidhanaṃ tadasya pitaro'nvāyattāstasmāttānnidadhati nidhanabhājino hyetasya sāmna evaṃ khalvamumādityaṃ saptavidhaṃ sāmopāste || 2.9.8 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.10 atha khalvātmasaṃmitamatimṛtyu saptavidhaṃ sāmopāsīta hiṃkāra iti tryakṣaraṃ prastāva iti tryakṣaraṃ tatsamam || 2.10.1 || ādiriti dvyakṣaraṃ pratihāra iti caturakṣaraṃ tata ihaikaṃ tatsamam || 2.10.2 || udgītha iti tryakṣaramupadrava iti caturakṣaraṃ tribhistribhiḥ samaṃ bhavatyakṣaramatiśiṣyate tryakṣaraṃ tatsamam || 2.10.3 || nidhanamiti tryakṣaraṃ tatsamameva bhavati tāni ha vā etāni dvāviṃśatirakṣarāṇi || 2.10.4 || ekaviṃśatyādityamāpnotyekaviṃśo vā ito'sāvādityo dvāviṃśena paramādityājjayati tannākaṃ tadviśokam || 2.10.5 || āpnotī hādityasya jayaṃ paro hāsyādityajayājjayo bhavati ya etadevaṃ vidvānātmasaṃmitamatimṛtyu saptavidhaṃ sāmopāste sāmopāste || 2.10.6 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.11 mano hiṃkāro vākprastāvaścakṣurudgīthaḥ śrotraṃ pratihāraḥ prāṇo nidhanametadgāyatraṃ prāṇeṣu protam || 2.11.1 || sa evametadgāyatraṃ prāṇeṣu protaṃ veda prāṇī bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā mahāmanāḥ syāttadvratam || 2.11.2 || || iti ekadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.12 abhimanthati sa hiṃkāro dhūmo jāyate sa prastāvo jvalati sa udgītho'ṅgārā bhavanti sa pratihāra upaśāmyati tannidhanaṃ saṃśāmyati tannidhanametadrathaṃtaramagnau protam || 2.12.1 || sa ya evametadrathaṃtaramagnau protaṃ veda brahmavarcasyannādo bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā na pratyaṅṅagnimācāmenna niṣṭhīvettadvratam || 2.12.2 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.13 upamantrayate sa hiṃkāro jñapayate sa prastāvaḥ striyā saha śete sa udgīthaḥ prati strīṃ saha śete sa pratihāraḥ kālaṃ gacchati tannidhanaṃ pāraṃ gacchati tannidhanametadvāmadevyaṃ mithune protam || 2.13.1 || sa ya evametadvāmadevyaṃ mithune protaṃ veda mithunī bhavati mithunānmithunātprajāyate sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā na kāṃcana pariharettadvratam || 2.13.2 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.14 udyanhiṃkāra uditaḥ prastāvo madhyaṃdina udgītho'parāhṇaḥ pratihāro'staṃ yannidhanametadbṛhadāditye protam || 2.14.1 || sa ya evametadbṛhadāditye protaṃ veda tejasvyannādo bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā tapantaṃ na nindettadvratam || 2.14.2 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.15 abhrāṇi samplavante sa hiṃkāro megho jāyate sa prastāvo varṣati sa udgītho vidyotate stanayati sa pratihāra udgṛhṇāti tannidhanametadvairūpaṃ parjanye protam || 2.15.1 || sa ya evametadvairūpaṃ parjanye protaṃ veda virūpāṃśca surūpaṃśca paśūnavarundhe sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā varṣantaṃ na nindettadvratam || 2.15.2 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.16 vasanto hiṃkāro grīṣmaḥ prastāvo varṣā udgīthaḥ śaratpratihāro hemanto nidhanametadvairājamṛtuṣu protam || 2.16.1 || sa ya evametadvairājamṛtuṣu protaṃ veda virājati prajayā paśubhirbrahmavarcasena sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyartūnna nindettadvratam || 2.16.2 || || iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || pṛthivī hiṃkāro'ntarikṣaṃ prastāvo dyaurudgītho diśaḥ pratihāraḥ samudro nidhanametāḥ śakvaryo lokeṣu protāḥ || 2.17.1 || sa ya evametāḥ śakvaryo lokeṣu protā veda lokī bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā lokānna nindettadvratam || 2.17.2 || || iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.18 ajā hiṃkāro'vayaḥ prastāvo gāva udgītho'śvāḥ pratihāraḥ puruṣo nidhanametā revatyaḥ paśuṣu protāḥ || 2.18.1 || sa ya evametā revatyaḥ paśuṣu protā veda paśumānbhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā paśūnna nindettadvratam || 2.18.2 || || iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.19 loma hiṃkārastvakprastāvo māṃsamudgīthosthi pratihāro majjā nidhanametadyajñāyajñīyamaṅgeṣu protam || 2.19.1 || sa ya evametadyajñāyajñīyamaṅgeṣu protaṃ vedāṅgī bhavati nāṅgena vihūrchati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā saṃvatsaraṃ majjño nāśnīyāttadvrataṃ majjño nāśnīyāditi vā || 2.19.2 || || iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.20 agnirhiṃkāro vāyuḥ prastāva āditya udgītho nakṣatrāṇi pratihāraścandramā nidhanametadrājanaṃ devatāsu protam || 2.20.1 || sa ya evametadrājanaṃ devatāsu protaṃ vedaitāsāmeva devatānāṃsalokatāṃsarṣṭitāṃsāyujyaṃ gacchati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati mahānprajayā paśubhirbhavati mahānkīrtyā brāhmaṇānna nindettadvratam || 2.20.2 || || iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.21 trayī vidyā hiṃkārastraya ime lokāḥ sa prastāvo'gnirvāyurādityaḥ sa udgītho nakṣatrāṇi vayāṃsi marīcayaḥ sa pratihāraḥ sarpā gandharvāḥ pitarastannidhanametatsāma sarvasminprotam || 2.21.1 || sa ya evametatsāma sarvasminprotaṃ veda sarvaṃ ha bhavati || 2.21.2 || tadeṣa śloko yāni pañcadhā trīṇī trīṇi tebhyo na jyāyaḥ paramanyadasti || 2.21.3 || yastadveda sa veda sarvaṃ sarvā diśo balimasmai haranti sarvamasmītyupāsita tadvrataṃ tadvratam || 2.21.4 || || iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.22 vinardi sāmno vṛṇe paśavyamityagnerudgītho'niruktaḥ prajāpaterniruktaḥ somasya mṛdu ślakṣṇaṃ vāyoḥ ślakṣṇaṃ balavadindrasya krauñcaṃ bṛhaspaterapadhvāntaṃ varuṇasya tānsarvānevopaseveta vāruṇaṃ tveva varjayet || 2.22.1 || amṛtatvaṃ devebhya āgāyānītyāgāyetsvadhāṃ pitṛbhya āśāṃ manuṣyebhyastṛṇodakaṃ paśubhyaḥ svargaṃ lokaṃ yajamānāyānnamātmana āgāyānītyetāni manasā dhyāyannapramattaḥ stuvīta || 2.22.2 || sarve svarā indrasyātmānaḥ sarva ūṣmāṇaḥ prajāpaterātmānaḥ sarve sparśā mṛtyorātmānastaṃ yadi svareṣūpālabhetendraṃśaraṇaṃ prapanno'bhūvaṃ sa tvā prati vakṣyatītyenaṃ brūyāt || 2.22.3 || atha yadyenamūṣmasūpālabheta prajāpatiṃśaraṇaṃ prapanno'bhūvaṃ sa tvā prati pekṣyatītyenaṃ brūyādatha yadyenaṃ sparśeṣūpālabheta mṛtyuṃ śaraṇaṃ prapanno'bhūvaṃ sa tvā prati dhakṣyatītyenaṃ brūyāt || 2.22.4 || sarve svarā ghoṣavanto balavanto vaktavyā indre balaṃ dadānīti sarva ūṣmāṇo'grastā anirastā vivṛtā vaktavyāḥ prajāpaterātmānaṃ paridadānīti sarve sparśā leśenānabhinihitā vaktavyā mṛtyorātmānaṃ pariharāṇīti || 2.22.5 || || iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.23 trayo dharmaskandhā yajño'dhyayanaṃ dānamiti prathamastapa eva dvitīyo brahmacāryācāryakulavāsī tṛtīyo'tyantamātmānamācāryakule'vasādayansarva ete puṇyalokā bhavanti brahmasaṃstho'mṛtatvameti || 2.23.1 || prajāpatirlokānabhyatapattebhyo'bhitaptebhyastrayī vidyā samprāsravattāmabhyatapattasyā abhitaptāyā etānyakṣarāṇi samprāsrvanta bhūrbhuvaḥ svariti || 2.23.2 || tānyabhyatapattebhyo'bhitaptebhya ॐkāraḥ samprāsravattadyathā śaṅkunā sarvāṇi parṇāni saṃtṛṇṇānyevamoṃkāreṇa sarvā vāksaṃtṛṇṇoṃkāra evedaṃ sarvamoṃkāra evedaṃ sarvam || 2.23.3 || || iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 2 Section 2.24 brahmavādino vadanti yadvasūnāṃ prātaḥ savanaṃ rudrāṇāṃ mādhyaṃdinaṃ savanamādityānāṃ ca viśveṣāṃ ca devānāṃ tṛtīyasavanam || 2.24.1 || kva tarhi yajamānasya loka iti sa yastaṃ na vidyātkathaṃ kuryādatha vidvānkuryāt || 2.24.2 || purā prātaranuvākasyopākaraṇājjaghanena gārhapatyasyodāṅmukha upaviśya sa vāsavaṃ sāmābhigāyati || 2.24.3 || lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū 33 paśyema tvā vayaṃ rā 33333 hu 3 m ā 33 jyā 3 yo 3 ā 32111 iti || 2.24.4 || atha juhoti namo'gnaye pṛthivīkṣite lokakṣite lokaṃ me yajamānāya vindaiṣa vai yajamānasya loka etāsmi || 2.24.5 || atra yajamānaḥ parastādāyuṣaḥ svāhāpajahi parighamityuktvottiṣṭhati tasmai vasavaḥ prātaḥsavanaṃ samprayacchanti || 2.24.6 || purā mādhyaṃdinasya savanasyopākaraṇājjaghanenāgnīdhrīyasyodaṅmukha upaviśya sa raudraṃsāmābhigāyati || 2.24.7 || lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū33 paśyema tvā vayaṃ vairā33333 hu3m ā33jyā 3yo3ā32111iti || 2.24.8 || atha juhoti namo vāyave'ntarikṣakṣite lokakṣite lokaṃ me yajamānāya vindaiṣa vai yajamānasya loka etāsmi || 2.24.9 || atra yajamānaḥ parastādāyuṣaḥ svāhāpajahi parighamityuktvottiṣṭhati tasmai rudrā mādhyaṃdinaṃsavanaṃsamprayacchanti || 2.24.10 || purā tṛtīyasavanasyopākaraṇājjaghanenāhavanīyasyodaṅmukha upaviśya sa ādityaṃsa vaiśvadevaṃ sāmābhigāyati || 2.24.11 || lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū33paśyema tvā vayaṃ svārā 33333 hu3m ā33 jyā3 yo3ā 32111 iti || 2.24.12 || ādityamatha vaiśvadevaṃ lo3kadvāramapāvā3rṇū33 paśyema tvā vayaṃsāmrā33333 hu3m ā33 jyā3yo3ā 32111 iti || 2.24.13 || atha juhoti nama ādityebhyaśca viśvebhyaśca devebhyo divikṣidbhyo lokakṣidbhyo lokaṃ me yajamānāya vindata || 2.24.14 || eṣa vai yajamānasya loka etāsmyatra yajamānaḥ parastādāyuṣaḥ svāhāpahata parighamityuktvottiṣṭhati || 2.24.15 || tasmā ādityāśca viśve ca devāstṛtīyasavanaṃ samprayacchantyeṣa ha vai yajñasya mātrāṃ veda ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda || 2.24.16 || || iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || || iti dvitīyo'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.1 || tṛtīyo'dhyāyaḥ || asau vā ādityo devamadhu tasya dyaureva tiraścīnavaṃśo'ntarikṣamapūpo marīcayaḥ putrāḥ || 3.1.1 || tasya ye prāñco raśmayastā evāsya prācyo madhunāḍyaḥ | ṛca eva madhukṛta ṛgveda eva puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā āpastā vā etā ṛcaḥ || 3.1.2 || etamṛgvedamabhyatapaṃstasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ vīryamannādyaṃraso'jāyata || 3.1.3 || tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā etadyadetadādityasya rohitaṃrūpam || 3.1.4 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Section 3.2 atha ye'sya dakṣiṇā raśmayastā evāsya dakṣiṇā madhunāḍyo yajūṃṣyeva madhukṛto yajurveda eva puṣpaṃ tā amṛta āpaḥ || 3.2.1 || tāni vā etāni yajūṃṣyetaṃ yajurvedamabhyatapaṃstasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ vīryamannādyaṃrasojāyata || 3.2.2 || tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā etadyadetadādityasya śuklaṃ rūpam || 3.2.3 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.3 atha ye'sya pratyañco raśmayastā evāsya pratīcyo madhunāḍyaḥ sāmānyeva madhukṛtaḥ sāmaveda eva puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā āpaḥ || 3.3.1 || tāni vā etāni sāmānyetaṃ sāmavedamabhyatapaṃstasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ vīryamannādyaṃraso'jāyata || 3.3.2 || tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā etadyadetadādityasya kṛṣṇaṃrūpam || 3.3.3 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.4 atha ye'syodañco raśmayastā evāsyodīcyo madhunāḍyo'tharvāṅgirasa eva madhukṛta itihāsapurāṇaṃ puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā āpaḥ || 3.4.1 || te vā ete'tharvāṅgirasa etaditihāsapūrāṇamabhyatapaṃ stasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyāṃ vīryamannādyaṃraso'jāyata || 3.4.2 || tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā etadyadetadādityasya paraṃ kṛṣṇaṃrūpam || 3.4.3 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.5 atha ye'syordhvā raśmayastā evāsyordhvā madhunāḍyo guhyā evādeśā madhukṛto brahmaiva puṣpaṃ tā amṛtā āpaḥ || 3.5.1 || te vā ete guhyā ādeśā etadbrahmābhyatapaṃ stasyābhitaptasya yaśasteja indriyaṃ vīryamannādyaṃraso'jāyata || 3.5.2 || tadvyakṣarattadādityamabhito'śrayattadvā etadyadetadādityasya madhye kṣobhata iva || 3.5.3 || te vā ete rasānāṃrasā vedā hi rasāsteṣāmete rasāstāni vā etānyamṛtānāmamṛtāni vedā hyamṛtāsteṣāmetānyamṛtāni || 3.5.4 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.6 tadyatprathamamamṛtaṃ tadvasava upajīvantyagninā mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti || 3.6.1 || ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti || 3.6.2 || sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda vasūnāmevaiko bhūtvāgninaiva mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa ya etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti || 3.6.3 || sa yāvadādityaḥ purastādudetā paścādastametā vasūnāmeva tāvadādhipatyaṃsvārājyaṃ paryetā || 3.6.4 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.7 atha yaddvitīyamamṛtaṃ tadrudrā upajīvantīndreṇa mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti || 3.7.1 || ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti || 3.7.2 || sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda rudrāṇāmevaiko bhūtvendreṇaiva mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti || 3.7.3 || sa yāvadādityaḥ purastādudetā paścādastametā dvistāvaddakṣiṇata udetottarato'stametā rudrāṇāmeva tāvadādhipatyaṃsvārājyaṃ paryetā || 3.7.4 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.8 atha yattṛtīyamamṛtaṃ tadādityā upajīvanti varuṇena mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti || 3.8.1 || ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti || 3.8.2 || sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ vedādityānāmevaiko bhūtvā varuṇenaiva mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti || 3.8.3 || sa yāvadādityo dakṣiṇata udetottarato'stametā dvistāvatpaścādudetā purastādastametādityānāmeva tāvadādhipatyaṃsvārājyaṃ paryetā || 3.8.4 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.9 atha yaccaturthamamṛtaṃ tanmaruta upajīvanti somena mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti || 3.9.1 || ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti || 3.9.2 || sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda marutāmevaiko bhūtvā somenaiva mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti || 3.9.3 || sa yāvadādityaḥ paścādudetā purastādastametā dvistāvaduttarata udetā dakṣiṇato'stametā marutāmeva tāvadādhipatyṃsvārājyaṃ paryetā || 3.9.4 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.10 atha yatpañcamamamṛtaṃ tatsādhyā upajīvanti brahmaṇā mukhena na vai devā aśnanti na pibantyetadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyanti || 3.10.1 || ta etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśantyetasmādrūpādudyanti || 3.10.2 || sa ya etadevamamṛtaṃ veda sādhyānāmevaiko bhūtvā brahmaṇaiva mukhenaitadevāmṛtaṃ dṛṣṭvā tṛpyati sa etadeva rūpamabhisaṃviśatyetasmādrūpādudeti || 3.10.3 || sa yāvadāditya uttarata udetā dakṣiṇato'stametā dvistāvadūrdhvaṃ udetārvāgastametā sādhyānāmeva tāvadādhipatyaṃsvārājyaṃ paryetā || 3.10.4 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.11 atha tata ūrdhva udetya naivodetā nāstametaikala eva madhye sthātā tadeṣa ślokaḥ || 3.11.1 || na vai tatra na nimloca nodiyāya kadācana | devāstenāhaṃsatyena mā virādhiṣi brahmaṇeti || 3.11.2 || na ha vā asmā udeti na nimlocati sakṛddivā haivāsmai bhavati ya etāmevaṃ brahmopaniṣadaṃ veda || 3.11.3 || taddhaitadbrahmā prajāpataya uvāca prajāpatirmanave manuḥ prajābhyastaddhaitaduddālakāyāruṇaye jyeṣṭhāya putrāya pitā brahma provāca || 3.11.4 || idaṃ vāva tajjyeṣṭhāya putrāya pitā brahma prabrūyātpraṇāyyāya vāntevāsine || 3.11.5 || nānyasmai kasmaicana yadyapyasmā imāmadbhiḥ parigṛhītāṃ dhanasya pūrṇāṃ dadyādetadeva tato bhūya ityetadeva tato bhūya iti || 3.11.6 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.12 gāyatrī vā īdaṃ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ yadidaṃ kiṃ ca vāgvai gāyatrī vāgvā idaṃ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ gāyati ca trāyate ca || 3.12.1 || yā vai sā gāyatrīyaṃ vāva sā yeyaṃ pṛthivyasyāṃ hīdaṃ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ pratiṣṭhitametāmeva nātiśīyate || 3.12.2 || yā vai sā pṛthivīyaṃ vāva sā yadidamasminpuruṣe śarīramasminhīme prāṇāḥ pratiṣṭhitā etadeva nātiśīyante || 3.12.3 || yadvai tatpuruṣe śarīramidaṃ vāva tadyadidamasminnantaḥ puruṣe hṛdayamasminhīme prāṇāḥ pratiṣṭhitā etadeva nātiśīyante || 3.12.4 || saiṣā catuṣpadā ṣaḍvidhā gāyatrī tadetadṛcābhyanūktam || 3.12.5 || tāvānasya mahimā tato jyāyāṃśca pūruṣaḥ | pādo'sya sarvā bhūtāni tripādasyāmṛtaṃ divīti || 3.12.6 || yadvai tadbrahmetīdaṃ vāva tadyoyaṃ bahirdhā puruṣādākāśo yo vai sa bahirdhā puruṣādākāśaḥ || 3.12.7 || ayaṃ vāva sa yo'yamantaḥ puruṣa akāśo yo vai so'ntaḥ puruṣa ākāśaḥ || 3.12.8 || ayaṃ vāva sa yo'yamantarhṛdaya ākāśastadetatpūrṇamapravarti pūrṇamapravartinīṃśriyaṃ labhate ya evaṃ veda || 3.12.9 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.13 tasya ha vā etasya hṛdayasya pañca devasuṣayaḥ sa yo'sya prāṅsuṣiḥ sa prāṇastaccakṣuḥ sa ādityastadetattejo'nnādyamityupāsīta tejasvyannādo bhavati ya evaṃ veda || 3.13.1 || atha yo'sya dakṣiṇaḥ suṣiḥ sa vyānastacchrotraṃ sa candramāstadetacchrīśca yaśaścetyupāsīta śrīmānyaśasvī bhavati ya evaṃ veda || 3.13.2 || atha yo'sya pratyaṅsuṣiḥ so'pānaḥ sā vākso'gnistadetadbrahmavarcasamannādyamityupāsīta brahmavarcasyannādo bhavati ya evaṃ veda || 3.13.3 || atha yo'syodaṅsuṣiḥ sa samānastanmanaḥ sa parjanyastadetatkīrtiśca vyuṣṭiścetyupāsīta kīrtimānvyuṣṭimānbhavati ya evaṃ veda || 3.13.4 || atha yo'syordhvaḥ suṣiḥ sa udānaḥ sa vāyuḥ sa ākāśastadetadojaśca mahaścetyupāsītaujasvī mahasvānbhavati ya evaṃ veda || 3.13.5 || te vā ete pañca brahmapuruṣāḥ svargasya lokasya dvārapāḥ sa ya etānevaṃ pañca brahmapuruṣānsvargasya lokasya dvārapānvedāsya kule vīro jāyate pratipadyate svargaṃ lokaṃ ya etānevaṃ pañca brahmapuruṣānsvargasya lokasya dvārapānveda || 3.13.6 || atha yadataḥ paro divo jyotirdīpyate viśvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣu sarvataḥ pṛṣṭheṣvanuttameṣūttameṣu lokeṣvidaṃ vāva tadyadidamasminnantaḥ puruṣe jyotiḥ || 3.13.7 || tasyaiṣā dṛṣṭiryatritadasmiñcharīre saṃsparśenoṣṇimānaṃ vijānāti tasyaiṣā śrutiryatraitatkarṇāvapigṛhya ninadamiva nadathurivāgneriva jvalata upaśṛṇoti tadetaddṛṣṭaṃ ca śrutaṃ cetyupāsīta cakṣuṣyaḥ śruto bhavati ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda || 3.13.8 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.14 sarvaṃ khalvidaṃ brahma tajjalāniti śānta upāsīta | atha khalu kratumayaḥ puruṣo yathākraturasmim̐lloke puruṣo bhavati tathetaḥ pretya bhavati sa kratuṃ kurvīta || 3.14.1 || manomayaḥ prāṇaśarīro bhārūpaḥ satyasaṃkalpa ākāśātmā sarvakarmā sarvakāmaḥ sarvagandhaḥ sarvarasaḥ sarvamidamabhyatto'vākyanādaraḥ || 3.14.2 || eṣa ma ātmāntarhṛdaye'ṇīyānvrīhervā yavādvā sarṣapādvā śyāmākādvā śyāmākataṇḍulādvaiṣa ma ātmāntarhṛdaye jyāyānpṛthivyā jyāyānantarikṣājjyāyāndivo jyāyānebhyo lokebhyaḥ || 3.14.3 || sarvakarmā sarvakāmaḥ sarvagandhaḥ sarvarasaḥ sarvamidamabhyātto'vākyanādara eṣa ma ātmāntarhṛdaya etadbrahmaitamitaḥ pretyābhisaṃbhavitāsmīti yasya syādaddhā na vicikitsāstīti ha smāha śāṇḍilyaḥ śāṇḍilyaḥ || 3.14.4 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.15 antarikṣodaraḥ kośo bhūmibudhno na jīryati diśo hyasya sraktayo dyaurasyottaraṃ bilaṃ sa eṣa kośo vasudhānastasminviśvamidaṃ śritam || 3.15.1 || tasya prācī digjuhūrnāma sahamānā nāma dakṣiṇā rājñī nāma pratīcī subhūtā nāmodīcī tāsāṃ vāyurvatsaḥ sa ya etamevaṃ vāyuṃ diśāṃ vatsaṃ veda na putrarodaṃ roditi so'hametamevaṃ vāyuṃ diśāṃ vatsaṃ veda mā putrarodaṃrudam || 3.15.2 || ariṣṭaṃ kośaṃ prapadye'munāmunāmunā prāṇaṃ prapadye'munāmunāmunā bhūḥ prapadye'munāmunāmunā bhuvaḥ prapadye'munāmunāmunā svaḥ prapadye'munāmunāmunā || 3.15.3 || sa yadavocaṃ prāṇaṃ prapadya iti prāṇo vā idaṃ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ yadidaṃ kiṃca tameva tatprāpatsi || 3.15.4 || atha yadavocaṃ bhūḥ prapadya iti pṛthivīṃ prapadye'ntarikṣaṃ prapadye divaṃ prapadya ityeva tadavocam || 3.15.5 || atha yadavocaṃ bhuvaḥ prapadya ityagniṃ prapadye vāyuṃ prapadya ādityaṃ prapadya ityeva tadavocam || 3.15.6 || atha yadavocaṃsvaḥ prapadya ityṛgvedaṃ prapadye yajurvedaṃ prapadye sāmavedaṃ prapadya ityeva tadavocaṃ tadavocam || 3.15.7 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.16 puruṣo vāva yajñastasya yāni caturviṃśati varṣāṇi tatprātaḥsavanaṃ caturviṃśatyakṣarā gāyatrī gāyatraṃ prātaḥsavanaṃ tadasya vasavo'nvāyattāḥ prāṇā vāva vasava ete hīdaṃsarvaṃ vāsayanti || 3.16.1 || taṃ cedetasminvayasi kiṃcidupatapetsa brūyātprāṇā vasava idaṃ me prātaḥsavanaṃ mādhyaṃdinaṃsavanamanusaṃtanuteti māhaṃ prāṇānāṃ vasūnāṃ madhye yajño vilopsīyetyuddhaiva tata etyagado ha bhavati || 3.16.2 || atha yāni catuścatvāriṃśadvarṣāṇi tanmādhyaṃdinaṃ savanaṃ catuścatvāriṃśadakṣarā triṣṭuptraiṣṭubhaṃ mādhyaṃdinaṃsavanaṃ tadasya rudrā anvāyattāḥ prāṇā vāva rudrā ete hīdaṃsarvaṃrodayanti || 3.16.3 || taṃ cedetasminvayasi kiṃcidupatapetsa brūyātprāṇā rudrā idaṃ me mādhyaṃdinaṃsavanaṃ tṛtīyasavanamanusaṃtanuteti māhaṃ prāṇānāṃrudrāṇāṃ madhye yajño vilopsīyetyuddhaiva tata etyagado ha bhavati || 3.16.4 || atha yānyaṣṭācatvāriṃśadvarṣāṇi tattṛtīyasavanamaṣṭācatvāriṃśadakṣarā jagatī jāgataṃ tṛtīyasavanaṃ tadasyādityā anvāyattāḥ prāṇā vāvādityā ete hīdaṃsarvamādadate || 3.16.5 || taṃ cedetasminvayasi kiṃcidupatapetsa brūyātprāṇā adityā idaṃ me tṛtīyasavanamāyuranusaṃtanuteti māhaṃ prāṇānāmādityānāṃ madhye yajño vilopsīyetyuddhaiva tata etyagado haiva bhavati || 3.16.6 || etaddha sma vai tadvidvānāha mahidāsa aitareyaḥ sa kiṃ ma etadupatapasi yo'hamanena na preṣyāmīti sa ha ṣoḍaśaṃ varṣaśatamajīvatpra ha ṣoḍaśaṃ varṣaśataṃ jīvati ya evaṃ veda || 3.16.7 || || iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.17 sa yadaśiśiṣati yatpipāsati yanna ramate tā asya dīkṣāḥ || 3.17.1 || atha yadaśnāti yatpibati yadramate tadupasadaireti || 3.17.2 || atha yaddhasati yajjakṣati yanmaithunaṃ carati stutaśastraireva tadeti || 3.17.3 || atha yattapo dānamārjavamahiṃsā satyavacanamiti tā asya dakṣiṇāḥ || 3.17.4 || tasmādāhuḥ soṣyatyasoṣṭeti punarutpādanamevāsya tanmaraṇamevāvabhṛthaḥ || 3.17.5 || taddhaitadghor āṅgirasaḥ kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāyoktvovācāpipāsa eva sa babhūva so'ntavelāyāmetattrayaṃ pratipadyetākṣitamasyacyutamasi prāṇasaṃśitamasīti tatraite dve ṛcau bhavataḥ || 3.17.6 || āditpratnasya retasaḥ jyotiḥ paśyanti vāsaram; Paro yadidhyate divi || 3.17.7 || udvayaṃ tamasaspari jyotiḥ paśyanta uttaraṃsvaḥ paśyanta uttaraṃ devaṃ devatrā sūryamaganma jyotiruttamamiti jyotiruttamamiti || 3.17.8 || || iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.18 mano brahmetyupāsītetyadhyātmamathādhidaivatamākāśo brahmetyubhayamādiṣṭaṃ bhavatyadhyātmaṃ cādhidaivataṃ ca || 3.18.1 || tadetaccatuṣpādbrahma vākpādaḥ prāṇaḥ pādaścakṣuḥ pādaḥ śrotraṃ pāda ityadhyātmamathādhidaivatamagniḥ pādo vāyuḥ pādā adityaḥ pādo diśaḥ pāda ityubhayamevādiṣṭaṃ bhavatyadhyātmaṃ caivādhidaivataṃ ca || 3.18.2 || vāgeva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ so'gninā jyotiṣā bhāti ca tapati ca bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda || 3.18.3 || prāṇa eva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ sa vāyunā jyotiṣā bhāti ca tapati c bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda || 3.18.4 || cakṣureva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ sa ādityena jyotiṣā bhāti ca tapati ca bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda || 3.18.5 || śrotrameva brahmaṇaścaturthaḥ pādaḥ sa digbhirjyotiṣā bhāti ca tapati ca bhāti ca tapati ca kīrtyā yaśasā brahmavarcasena ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda || 3.18.6 || || iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 3 Section 3.19 ādityo brahmetyādeśastasyopavyākhyānamasadevedamagra āsīt | tatsadāsīttatsamabhavattadāṇḍaṃ niravartata tatsaṃvatsarasya mātrāmaśayata tannirabhidyata te āṇḍakapāle rajataṃ ca suvarṇaṃ cābhavatām || 3.19.1 || tadyadrajataṃ seyaṃ pṛthivī yatsuvarṇaṃ sā dyauryajjarāyu te parvatā yadulbaṃ samegho nīhāro yā dhamanayastā nadyo yadvāsteyamudakaṃ sa samudraḥ || 3.19.2 || atha yattadajāyata so'sāvādityastaṃ jāyamānaṃ ghoṣā ulūlavo'nūdatiṣṭhantsarvāṇi ca bhūtāni sarve ca kāmāstasmāttasyodayaṃ prati pratyāyanaṃ prati ghoṣā ulūlavo'nūttiṣṭhanti sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni sarve ca kāmāḥ || 3.19.3 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānādityaṃ brahmetyupāste'bhyāśo ha yadenaṃ sādhavo ghoṣā ā ca gaccheyurupa ca nimreḍerannimreḍeran || 3.19.4 || || iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || || iti tṛtīyo'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.1 || caturtho'dhyāyaḥ || jānaśrutirha pautrāyaṇaḥ śraddhādeyo bahudāyī bahupākya āsa sa ha sarvata āvasathānmāpayāṃcakre sarvata eva me'nnamatsyantīti || 4.1.1 || atha haṃsā niśāyāmatipetustaddhaivaṃ haṃ sohaṃ samabhyuvāda ho ho'yi bhallākṣa bhallākṣa jānaśruteḥ pautrāyaṇasya samaṃ divā jyotirātataṃ tanmā prasāṅkṣī stattvā mā pradhākṣīriti || 4.1.2 || tamu ha paraḥ pratyuvāca kamvara enametatsantaṃ sayugvānamiva raikvamāttheti yo nu kathaṃ sayugvā raikva iti || 4.1.3 || yathā kṛtāyavijitāyādhareyāḥ saṃyantyevamenaṃ sarvaṃ tadabhisamaiti yatkiṃca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti yastadveda yatsa veda sa mayaitadukta iti || 4.1.4 || tadu ha jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇa upaśuśrāva sa ha saṃjihāna eva kṣattāramuvācāṅgāre ha sayugvānamiva raikvamāttheti yo nu kathaṃ sayugvā raikva iti || 4.1.5 || yathā kṛtāyavijitāyādhareyāḥ saṃyantyevamenaṃ sarvaṃ tadabhisamaiti yatkiṃca prajāḥ sādhu kurvanti yastadveda yatsa veda sa mayaitadukta iti || 4.1.6 || sa ha kṣattānviṣya nāvidamiti pratyeyāya taṃ hovāca yatrāre brāhmaṇasyānveṣaṇā tadenamarccheti || 4.1.7 || so'dhastācchakaṭasya pāmānaṃ kaṣamāṇamupopaviveśa taṃ hābhyuvāda tvaṃ nu bhagavaḥ sayugvā raikva ityahaṃ hyarā3 iti ha pratijajñe sa ha kṣattāvidamiti pratyeyāya || 4.1.8 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.2 tadu ha jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ ṣaṭśatāni gavāṃ niṣkamaśvatarīrathaṃ tadādāya praticakrame taṃ hābhyuvāda || 4.2.1 || raikvemāni ṣaṭśatāni gavāmayaṃ niṣko'yamaśvatarīratho'nu ma etāṃ bhagavo devatāṃ śādhi yāṃ devatāmupāssa iti || 4.2.2 || tamu ha paraḥ pratyuvācāha hāretvā śūdra tavaiva saha gobhirastviti tadu ha punareva jānaśrutiḥ pautrāyaṇaḥ sahasraṃ gavāṃ niṣkamaśvatarīrathaṃ duhitaraṃ tadādāya praticakrame || 4.2.3 || taṃ hābhyuvāda raikvedaṃ sahasraṃ gavāmayaṃ niṣko'yamaśvatarīratha iyaṃ jāyāyaṃ grāmo yasminnāsse'nveva mā bhagavaḥ śādhīti || 4.2.4 || tasyā ha mukhamupodgṛhṇannuvācājahāremāḥ śūdrānenaiva mukhenālāpayiṣyathā iti te haite raikvaparṇā nāma mahāvṛṣeṣu yatrāsmā uvāsa sa tasmai hovāca || 4.2.5 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.3 vāyurvāva saṃvargo yadā vā agnirudvāyati vāyumevāpyeti yadā sūryo'stameti vāyumevāpyeti yadā candro'stameti vāyumevāpyeti || 4.3.1 || yadāpa ucchuṣyanti vāyumevāpiyanti vāyurhyevaitānsarvānsaṃvṛṅkta ityadhidaivatam || 4.3.2 || athādhyātmaṃ prāṇo vāva saṃvargaḥ sa yadā svapiti prāṇameva vāgapyeti prāṇaṃ cakṣuḥ prāṇaṃ śrotraṃ prāṇaṃ manaḥ prāṇo hyevaitānsarvānsaṃvṛṅkta iti || 4.3.3 || tau vā etau dvau saṃvargau vāyureva deveṣu prāṇaḥ prāṇeṣu || 4.3.4 || atha ha śaunakaṃ ca kāpeyamabhipratāriṇaṃ ca kākṣaseniṃ pariviṣyamāṇau brahmacārī bibhikṣe tasmā u ha na dadatuḥ || 4.3.5 || sa hovāca mahātmanaścaturo deva ekaḥ kaḥ sa jagāra bhuvanasya gopāstaṃ kāpeya nābhipaśyanti martyā abhipratārinbahudhā vasantaṃ yasmai vā etadannaṃ tasmā etanna dattamiti || 4.3.6 || tadu ha śaunakaḥ kāpeyaḥ pratimanvānaḥ pratyeyāyātmā devānāṃ janitā prajānāṃ hiraṇyadaṃṣṭro babhaso'nasūrirmahāntamasya mahimānamāhuranadyamāno yadanannamattīti vai vayaṃ brahmacārinnedamupāsmahe dattāsmai bhikṣāmiti || 4.3.7 || tasma u ha daduste vā ete pañcānye pañcānye daśa santastatkṛtaṃ tasmātsarvāsu dikṣvannameva daśa kṛtaṃ saiṣā virāḍannādī tayedaṃ sarvaṃ dṛṣṭaṃ sarvamasyedaṃ dṛṣṭaṃ bhavatyannādo bhavati ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda || 4.3.8 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.4 satyakāmo ha jābālo jabālāṃ mātaramāmantrayāṃcakre brahmacaryaṃ bhavati vivatsyāmi kiṃgotro nvahamasmīti || 4.4.1 || sā hainamuvāca nāhametadveda tāta yadgotrastvamasi bahvahaṃ carantī paricāriṇī yauvane tvāmalabhe sāhametanna veda yadgotrastvamasi jabālā tu nāmāhamasmi satyakāmo nāma tvamasi sa satyakāma eva jābālo bravīthā iti || 4.4.2 || sa ha hāridrumataṃ gautamametyovāca brahmacaryaṃ bhagavati vatsyāmyupeyāṃ bhagavantamiti || 4.4.3 || taṃ hovāca kiṃgotro nu somyāsīti sa hovāca nāhametadveda bho yadgotro'hamasmyapṛcchaṃ mātaraṃ sā mā pratyabravīdbahvahaṃ carantī paricariṇī yauvane tvāmalabhe sāhametanna veda yadgotrastvamasi jabālā tu nāmāhamasmi satyakāmo nāma tvamasīti so'haṃ satyakāmo jābālo'smi bho iti || 4.4.4 || taṃ hovāca naitadabrāhmaṇo vivaktumarhati samidhaṃ somyāharopa tvā neṣye na satyādagā iti tamupanīya kṛśānāmabalānāṃ catuḥśatā gā nirākṛtyovācemāḥ somyānusaṃvrajeti tā abhiprasthāpayannuvāca nāsahasreṇāvarteyeti sa ha varṣagaṇaṃ provāsa tā yadā sahasraṃ sampeduḥ || 4.4.5 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.5 atha hainamṛṣabho'bhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva prāptāḥ somya sahasraṃ smaḥ prāpaya na ācāryakulam || 4.5.1 || brahmaṇaśca te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti tasmai hovāca prācī dikkalā pratīcī dikkalā dakṣiṇā dikkalodīcī dikkalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo brahmaṇaḥ prakāśavānnāma || 4.5.2 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇaḥ prakāśavānityupāste prakāśavānasmim̐lloke bhavati prakāśavato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇaḥ prakāśavānityupāste || 4.5.3 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.6 agniṣṭe pādaṃ vakteti sa ha śvobhūte ga ābhiprasthāpayāṃcakāra tā yatrābhi sāyaṃ babhūvustatrāgnimupasamādhāya gā uparudhya samidhamādhāya paścādagneḥ prāṅupopaviveśa || 4.6.1 || tamagnirabhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva || 4.6.2 || brahmaṇaḥ somya te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti tasmai hovāca pṛthivī kalāntarikṣaṃ kalā dyauḥ kalā samudraḥ kalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo brahmaṇo'nantavānnāma || 4.6.3 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇo'nantavānityupāste'nantavānasmim̐lloke bhavatyanantavato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇo'nantavānityupāste || 4.6.4 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.7 haṃsaste pādaṃ vakteti sa ha śvobhūte gā abhiprasthāpayāṃcakāra tā yatrābhi sāyaṃ babhūvustatrāgnimupasamādhāya gā uparudhya samidhamādhāya paścādagneḥ prāṅupopaviveśa || 4.7.1 || taṃhaṃsa upanipatyābhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva || 4.7.2 || brahmaṇaḥ somya te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti tasmai hovācāgniḥ kalā sūryaḥ kalā candraḥ kalā vidyutkalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo brahmaṇo jyotiṣmānnāma || 4.7.3 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇo jyotiṣmānityupāste jyotiṣmānasmim̐lloke bhavati jyotiṣmato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇo jyotiṣmānityupāste || 4.7.4 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.8 madguṣṭe pādaṃ vakteti sa ha śvobhūte gā abhiprasthāpayāṃcakāra tā yatrābhi sāyaṃ babhūvustatrāgnimupasamādhāya gā uparudhya samidhamādhāya paścādagneḥ prāṅupopaviveśa || 4.8.1 || taṃ madgurupanipatyābhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva || 4.8.2 || brahmaṇaḥ somya te pādaṃ bravāṇīti bravītu me bhagavāniti tasmai hovāca prāṇaḥ kalā cakṣuḥ kalā śrotraṃ kalā manaḥ kalaiṣa vai somya catuṣkalaḥ pādo brahmaṇa āyatanavānnāma || 4.8.3 || sa yai etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇa āyatanavānityupāsta āyatanavānasmim̐lloke bhavatyāyatanavato ha lokāñjayati ya etamevaṃ vidvāṃścatuṣkalaṃ pādaṃ brahmaṇa āyatanavānityupāste || 4.8.4 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.9 prāpa hācaryakulaṃ tamācaryo'bhyuvāda satyakāma3 iti bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva || 4.9.1 || brahmavidiva vai somya bhāsi ko nu tvānuśaśāsetyanye manuṣyebhya iti ha pratijajñe bhagavāṃstveva me kāme brūyāt || 4.9.2 || śrutaṃhyeva me bhagavaddṛśebhya ācāryāddhaiva vidyā viditā sādhiṣṭhaṃ prāpatīti tasmai haitadevovācātra ha na kiṃcana vīyāyeti vīyāyeti || 4.9.3 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.10 upakosalo ha vai kāmalāyanaḥ satyakāme jābāle brahmacāryamuvāsa tasya ha dvādaśa vārṣāṇyagnīnparicacāra sa ha smānyānantevāsinaḥ samāvartayaṃstaṃ ha smaiva na samāvartayati || 4.10.1 || taṃ jāyovāca tapto brahmacārī kuśalamagnīnparicacārīnmā tvāgnayaḥ paripravocanprabrūhyasmā iti tasmai hāprocyaiva pravāsāṃcakre || 4.10.2 || sa ha vyādhinānaśituṃ dadhre tamācāryajāyovāca brahmacārinnaśāna kiṃ nu nāśnāsīti sa hovāca bahava ime'sminpuruṣe kāmā nānātyayā vyādhībhiḥ pratipūrṇo'smi nāśiṣyāmīti || 4.10.3 || atha hāgnayaḥ samūdire tapto brahmacārī kuśalaṃ naḥ paryacārīddhantāsmai prabravāmeti tasmai hocuḥ prāṇo brahma kaṃ brahma khaṃ brahmeti || 4.10.4 || sa hovāca vijānāmyahaṃ yatprāṇo brahma kaṃ ca tu khaṃ ca na vijānāmīti te hocuryadvāva kaṃ tadeva khaṃ yadeva khaṃ tadeva kamiti prāṇaṃ ca hāsmai tadākāśaṃ cocuḥ || 4.10.5 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.11 atha hainaṃ gārhapatyo'nuśaśāsa pṛthivyagnirannamāditya iti ya eṣa āditye puruṣo dṛśyate so'hamasmi sa evāhamasmīti || 4.11.1 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste'pahate pāpakṛtyāṃ lokī bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati nāsyāvarapuruṣāḥ kṣīyanta upa vayaṃ taṃ bhuñjāmo'smiṃśca loke'muṣmiṃśca ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste || 4.11.2 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.12 atha hainamanvāhāryapacano'nuśaśāsāpo diśo nakṣatrāṇi candramā iti ya eṣa candramasi puruṣo dṛśyate so'hamasmi sa evāhamasmīti || 4.12.1 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste'pahate pāpakṛtyāṃ lokī bhavati sarvamāyureti jyogjīvati nāsyāvarapuruṣāḥ kṣīyanta upa vayaṃ taṃ bhuñjāmo'smiṃśca loke'muṣmiṃśca ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste || 4.12.2 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.13 atha hainamāhavanīyo'nuśaśāsa prāṇa ākāśo dyaurvidyuditi ya eṣa vidyuti puruṣo dṛśyate so'hamasmi sa evāhamasmīti || 4.13.1 || sa ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste'pahate pāpakṛtyāṃ lokī bhavati sarvamayureti jyogjīvati nāsyāvarapuruṣāḥ kṣīyanta upa vayaṃ taṃ bhuñjāmo'smiṃśca loke'muṣmiṃśca ya etamevaṃ vidvānupāste || 4.13.2 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.14 te hocurupakosalaiṣā somya te'smadvidyātmavidyā cācāryastu te gatiṃ vaktetyājagāma hāsyācāryastamācāryo'bhyuvādopakosala3 iti || 4.14.1 || bhagava iti ha pratiśuśrāva brahmavida iva somya te mukhaṃ bhāti ko nu tvānuśaśāseti ko nu mānuśiṣyādbho itīhāpeva nihnuta ime nūnamīdṛśā anyādṛśā itīhāgnīnabhyūde kiṃ nu somya kila te'vocanniti || 4.14.2 || idamiti ha pratijajñe lokānvāva kila somya te'vocannahaṃ tu te tadvakṣyāmi yathā puṣkarapalāśa āpo na śliṣyanta evamevaṃvidi pāpaṃ karma na śliṣyata iti bravītu me bhagavāniti tasmai hovāca || 4.14.3 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.15 ya eṣo'kṣiṇi puruṣo dṛśyata eṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti tadyadyapyasminsarpirvodakaṃ vā siñcati vartmanī eva gacchati || 4.15.1 || etaṃ saṃyadvāma ityācakṣata etaṃ hi sarvāṇi vāmānyabhisaṃyanti sarvāṇyenaṃ vāmānyabhisaṃyanti ya evaṃ veda || 4.15.2 || eṣa u eva vāmanīreṣa hi sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati sarvāṇi vāmāni nayati ya evaṃ veda || 4.15.3 || eṣa u eva bhāmanīreṣa hi sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti sarveṣu lokeṣu bhāti ya evaṃ veda || 4.15.4 || atha yadu caivāsmiñchavyaṃ kurvanti yadi ca nārciṣamevābhisaṃbhavantyarciṣo'harahna āpūryamāṇapakṣamāpūryamāṇapakṣādyānṣaḍudaṅṅeti māsāṃstānmāsebhyaḥ saṃvatsaraṃ saṃvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasaṃ candramaso vidyutaṃ tat puruṣo'mānavaḥ sa enānbrahma gamayatyeṣa devapatho brahmapatha etena pratipadyamānā imaṃ mānavamāvartaṃ nāvartante nāvartante || 4.15.5 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.16 eṣa ha vai yajño yo'yaṃ pavate eṣa ha yannidaṃ sarvaṃ punāti yadeṣa yannidaṃ sarvaṃ punāti tasmādeṣa eva yajñastasya manaśca vākca vartanī || 4.16.1 || tayoranyatarāṃ manasā saṃskaroti brahmā vācā hotādhvaryurudgātānyatarāṃsa yatraupākṛte prātaranuvāke purā paridhānīyāyā brahmā vyavadati || 4.16.2 || anyatarāmeva vartanīṃ saṃskaroti hīyate'nyatarā sa yathaikapādvrajanratho vaikena cakreṇa vartamāno riṣyatyevamasya yajñoriṣyati yajñaṃ riṣyantaṃ yajamāno'nuriṣyati sa iṣṭvā pāpīyānbhavati || 4.16.3 || atha yatropākṛte prātaranuvāke na purā paridhānīyāyā brahmā vyavadatyubhe eva vartanī saṃskurvanti na hīyate'nyatarā || 4.16.4 || sa yathobhayapādvrajanratho vobhābhyāṃ cakrābhyāṃ vartamānaḥ pratitiṣṭhatyevamasya yajñaḥ pratitiṣṭhati yajñaṃ pratitiṣṭhantaṃ yajamāno'nupratitiṣṭhati sa iṣṭvā śreyānbhavati || 4.16.5 || || iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 4 Section 4.17 prajāpatirlokānabhyatapatteṣāṃ tapyamānānāṃ rasānprāvṛhadagniṃ pṛthivyā vāyumantarikṣātādityaṃ divaḥ || 4.17.1 || sa etāstisro devatā abhyatapattāsāṃ tapyamānānāṃ rasānprāvṛhadagnerṛco vāyoryajūṃṣi sāmānyādityāt || 4.17.2 || sa etāṃ trayīṃ vidyāmabhyatapattasyāstapyamānāyā rasānprāvṛhadbhūrityṛgbhyo bhuvariti yajurbhyaḥ svariti sāmabhyaḥ || 4.17.3 || tadyadṛkto riṣyedbhūḥ svāheti gārhapatye juhuyādṛcāmeva tadrasenarcāṃ vīryeṇarcāṃ yajñasya viriṣṭaṃ saṃdadhāti || 4.17.4 || sa yadi yajuṣṭo riṣyedbhuvaḥ svāheti dakṣiṇāgnau juhuyādyajuṣāmeva tadrasena yajuṣāṃ vīryeṇa yajuṣāṃ yajñasya viriṣṭaṃ saṃdadhāti || 4.17.5 || atha yadi sāmato riṣyetsvaḥ svāhetyāhavanīye juhuyātsāmnāmeva tadrasena sāmnāṃ vīryeṇa sāmnāṃ yajñasya viriṣṭaṃ saṃdadhāti || 4.17.6 || tadyathā lavaṇena suvarṇaṃ saṃdadhyātsuvarṇena rajataṃ rajatena trapu trapuṇā sīsaṃ sīsena lohaṃ lohena dāru dāru carmaṇā || 4.17.7 || evameṣāṃ lokānāmāsāṃ devatānāmasyāstrayyā vidyāyā vīryeṇa yajñasya viriṣṭaṃ saṃdadhāti bheṣajakṛto ha vā eṣa yajño yatraivaṃvidbrahmā bhavati || 4.17.8 || eṣa ha vā udakpravaṇo yajño yatraivaṃvidbrahmā bhavatyevaṃvidaṃ ha vā eṣā brahmāṇamanugāthā yato yata āvartate tattadgacchati || 4.17.9 || mānavo brahmaivaika ṛtvikkurūnaśvābhirakṣatyevaṃviddha vai brahmā yajñaṃ yajamānaṃ sarvāṃścartvijo'bhirakṣati tasmādevaṃvidameva brahmāṇaṃ kurvīta nānevaṃvidaṃ nānevaṃvidam || 4.17.10 || || iti caturtho'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.1 || pañcamo'dhyāyaḥ || yo ha vai jyeṣṭhaṃ ca śreṣṭhaṃ ca veda jyeṣṭhaśca ha vai śreṣṭhaśca bhavati prāṇo vāva jyeṣṭhaśca śreṣṭhaśca || 5.1.1 || yo ha vai vasiṣṭhaṃ veda vasiṣṭho ha svānāṃ bhavati vāgvāva vasiṣṭhaḥ || 5.1.2 || yo ha vai pratiṣṭhāṃ veda prati ha tiṣṭhatyasmiṃśca loke'muṣmiṃśca cakṣurvāva pratiṣṭhā || 5.1.3 || yo ha vai sampadaṃ veda saṃhāsmai kāmāḥ padyante daivāśca mānuṣāśca śrotraṃ vāva sampat || 5.1.4 || yo ha vā āyatanaṃ vedāyatanaṃ ha svānāṃ bhavati mano ha vā āyatanam || 5.1.5 || atha ha prāṇā ahaṃśreyasi vyūdire'haṃśreyānasmyahaṃ śreyānasmīti || 5.1.6 || te ha prāṇāḥ prajāpatiṃ pitarametyocurbhagavanko naḥ śreṣṭha iti tānhovāca yasminva utkrānte śarīraṃ pāpiṣṭhataramiva dṛśyeta sa vaḥ śreṣṭha iti || 5.1.7 || sā ha vāguccakrāma sā saṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathā kalā avadantaḥ prāṇantaḥ prāṇena paśyantaścakṣuṣā śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa dhyāyanto manasaivamiti praviveśa ha vāk || 5.1.8 || cakṣurhoccakrāma tatsaṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathāndhā apaśyantaḥ prāṇantaḥ prāṇena vadanto vācā śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇa dhyāyanto manasaivamiti praviveśa ha cakṣuḥ || 5.1.9 || śrotraṃ hoccakrāma tatsaṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathā badhirā aśṛṇvantaḥ prāṇantaḥ prāṇena vadanto vācā paśyantaścakṣuṣā dhyāyanto manasaivamiti praviveśa ha śrotram || 5.1.10 || mano hoccakrāma tatsaṃvatsaraṃ proṣya paryetyovāca kathamaśakatarte majjīvitumiti yathā bālā amanasaḥ prāṇantaḥ prāṇena vadanto vācā paśyantaścakṣuṣā śṛṇvantaḥ śrotreṇaivamiti praviveśa ha manaḥ || 5.1.11 || atha ha prāṇa uccikramiṣansa yathā suhayaḥ paḍvīśaśaṅkūnsaṃkhidedevamitarānprāṇānsamakhidattaṃ hābhisametyocurbhagavannedhi tvaṃ naḥ śreṣṭho'si motkramīriti || 5.1.12 || atha hainaṃ vāguvāca yadahaṃ vasiṣṭho'smi tvaṃ tadvasiṣṭho'sītyatha hainaṃ cakṣuruvāca yadahaṃ pratiṣṭhāsmi tvaṃ tatpratiṣṭhāsīti || 5.1.13 || atha hainaṃśrotramuvāca yadahaṃ sampadasmi tvaṃ tatsampadasītyatha hainaṃ mana uvāca yadahamāyatanamasmi tvaṃ tadāyatanamasīti || 5.1.14 || na vai vāco na cakṣūṃṣi na śrotrāṇi na manāṃsītyācakṣate prāṇā ityevācakṣate prāṇo hyevaitāni sarvāṇi bhavati || 5.1.15 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.2 sa hovāca kiṃ me'nnaṃ bhaviṣyatīti yatkiṃcididamā śvabhya ā śakunibhya iti hocustadvā etadanasyānnamano ha vai nāma pratyakṣaṃ na ha vā evaṃvidi kiṃcanānannaṃ bhavatīti || 5.2.1 || sa hovāca kiṃ me vāso bhaviṣyatītyāpa iti hocustasmādvā etadaśiṣyantaḥ purastāccopariṣṭāccādbhiḥ paridadhati lambhuko ha vāso bhavatyanagno ha bhavati || 5.2.2 || taddhaitatsatyakāmo jābālo gośrutaye vaiyāghrapadyāyoktvovāca yadyapyenacchuṣkāya sthāṇave brūyājjāyerannevāsmiñchākhāḥ praroheyuḥ palāśānīti || 5.2.3 || atha yadi mahajjigamiṣedamāvāsyāyāṃ dīkṣitvā paurṇamāsyāṃ rātrau sarvauṣadhasya manthaṃ dadhimadhunorupamathya jyeṣṭhāya śreṣṭhāya svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe sampātamavanayet || 5.2.4 || vasiṣṭhāya svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe sampātamavanayetpratiṣṭhāyai svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe sampātamavanayetsampade svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe sampātamavanayedāyatanāya svāhetyagnāvājyasya hutvā manthe sampātamavanayet || 5.2.5 || atha pratisṛpyāñjalau manthamādhāya japatyamo nāmāsyamā hi te sarvamidaṃ sa hi jyeṣṭhaḥ śreṣṭho rājādhipatiḥ sa mā jyaiṣṭhyaṃ śraiṣṭhyaṃ rājyamādhipatyaṃ gamayatvahamevedaṃ sarvamasānīti || 5.2.6 || atha khalvetayarcā paccha ācāmati tatsaviturvṛṇīmaha ityācāmati vayaṃ devasya bhojanamityācāmati śreṣṭhaṃ sarvadhātamamityācāmati turaṃ bhagasya dhīmahīti sarvaṃ pibati nirṇijya kaṃsaṃ camasaṃ vā paścādagneḥ saṃviśati carmaṇi vā sthaṇḍile vā vācaṃyamo'prasāhaḥ sa yadi striyaṃ paśyetsamṛddhaṃ karmeti vidyāt || 5.2.7 || tadeṣa śloko yadā karmasu kāmyeṣu striyaṃ svapneṣu paśyanti samṛddhiṃ tatra jānīyāttasminsvapnanidarśane tasminsvapnanidarśane || 5.2.8 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.3 śvetaketurhāruṇeyaḥ pañcālānāṃ samitimeyāya taṃ ha pravāhaṇo jaivaliruvāca kumārānu tvāśiṣatpitetyanu hi bhagava iti || 5.3.1 || vettha yadito'dhi prajāḥ prayantīti na bhagava iti vettha yathā punarāvartanta3 iti na bhagava iti vettha pathordevayānasya pitṛyāṇasya ca vyāvartanā3 iti na bhagava iti || 5.3.2 || vettha yathāsau loko na sampūryata3 iti na bhagava iti vettha yathā pañcamyāmāhutāvāpaḥ puruṣavacaso bhavantīti naiva bhagava iti || 5.3.3 || athānu kimanuśiṣṭho'vocathā yo hīmāni na vidyātkathaṃ so'nuśiṣṭo bruvīteti sa hāyastaḥ piturardhameyāya taṃ hovācānanuśiṣya vāva kila mā bhagavānabravīdanu tvāśiṣamiti || 5.3.4 || pañca mā rājanyabandhuḥ praśnānaprākṣītteṣāṃ naikaṃcanāśakaṃ vivaktumiti sa hovāca yathā mā tvaṃ tadaitānavado yathāhameṣāṃ naikaṃcana veda yadyahamimānavediṣyaṃ kathaṃ te nāvakṣyamiti || 5.3.5 || sa ha gautamo rājño'rdhameyāya tasmai ha prāptāyārhāṃ cakāra sa ha prātaḥ sabhāga udeyāya taṃ hovāca mānuṣasya bhagavangautama vittasya varaṃ vṛṇīthā iti sa hovāca tavaiva rājanmānuṣaṃ vittaṃ yāmeva kumārasyānte vācamabhāṣathāstāmeva me brūhīti sa ha kṛcchrī babhūva || 5.3.6 || taṃ ha ciraṃ vasetyājñāpayāṃcakāra taṃ hovāca yathā mā tvaṃ gautamāvado yatheyaṃ na prāktvattaḥ purā vidyā brāhmaṇāngacchati tasmādu sarveṣu lokeṣu kṣatrasyaiva praśāsanamabhūditi tasmai hovāca || 5.3.7 || Chapter 5 Section 5.4 iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || asau vāva loko gautamāgnistasyāditya eva samidraśmayo dhūmo'hararciścandramā aṅgārā nakṣatrāṇi visphuliṅgāḥ || 5.4.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devāḥ śraddhāṃ juhvati tasyā ahuteḥ somo rājā saṃbhavati || 5.4.2 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.5 parjanyo vāva gautamāgnistasya vāyureva samidabhraṃ dhūmo vidyudarciraśaniraṅgārāhrādanayo visphuliṅgāḥ || 5.5.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devāḥ somaṃ rājānaṃ juhvati tasyā āhutervarṣaṃ saṃbhavati || 5.5.2 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.6 pṛthivī vāva gautamāgnistasyāḥ saṃvatsara eva samidākāśo dhūmo rātrirarcirdiśo'ṅgārā avāntaradiśo visphuliṅgāḥ || 5.6.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devā varṣaṃ juhvati tasyā āhuterannaṃ saṃbhavati || 5.6.2 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.7 puruṣo vāva gautamāgnistasya vāgeva samitprāṇo dhūmo jihvārciścakṣuraṅgārāḥ śrotraṃ visphuliṅgāḥ || 5.7.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devā annaṃ juhvati tasyā āhute retaḥ sambhavati || 5.7.2 || || iti sapatamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.8 yoṣā vāva gautamāgnistasyā upastha eva samidyadupamantrayate sa dhūmo yonirarciryadantaḥ karoti te'ṅgārā abhinandā visphuliṅgāḥ || 5.8.1 || tasminnetasminnagnau devā reto juhvati tasyā āhutergarbhaḥ saṃbhavati || 5.8.2 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.9 iti tu pañcamyāmāhutāvāpaḥ puruṣavacaso bhavantīti sa ulbāvṛto garbho daśa vā nava vā māsānantaḥ śayitvā yāvadvātha jāyate || 5.9.1 || sa jāto yāvadāyuṣaṃ jīvati taṃ pretaṃ diṣṭamito'gnaya eva haranti yata eveto yataḥ saṃbhūto bhavati || 5.9.2 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.10 tadya itthaṃ viduḥ| ye ceme'raṇye śraddhā tapa ityupāsate te'rciṣamabhisaṃbhavantyarciṣo'harahna āpūryamāṇapakṣamāpūryamāṇapakṣādyānṣaḍudaṅṅeti māsāṃstān || 5.10.1 || māsebhyaḥ saṃvatsaraṃ saṃvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasaṃ candramaso vidyutaṃ tatpuruṣo'mānavaḥ sa enānbrahma gamayatyeṣa devayānaḥ panthā iti || 5.10.2 || atha ya ime grāma iṣṭāpūrte dattamityupāsate te dhūmamabhisaṃbhavanti dhūmādrātriṃ rātreraparapakṣamaparapakṣādyānṣaḍdakṣiṇaiti māsāṃstānnaite saṃvatsaramabhiprāpnuvanti || 5.10.3 || māsebhyaḥ pitṛlokaṃ pitṛlokādākāśamākāśāccandramasameṣa somo rājā taddevānāmannaṃ taṃ devā bhakṣayanti || 5.10.4 || tasminyavātsampātamuṣitvāthaitamevādhvānaṃ punarnivartante yathetamākāśamākāśādvāyuṃ vāyurbhūtvā dhūmo bhavati dhūmo bhūtvābhraṃ bhavati || 5.10.5 || abhraṃ bhūtvā megho bhavati megho bhūtvā pravarṣati ta iha vrīhiyavā oṣadhivanaspatayastilamāṣā iti jāyante'to vai khalu durniṣprapataraṃ yo yo hyannamatti yo retaḥ siñcati tadbhūya eva bhavati || 5.10.6 || tadya iha ramaṇīyacaraṇā abhyāśo ha yatte ramaṇīyāṃ yonimāpadyeranbrāhmaṇayoniṃ vā kṣatriyayoniṃ vā vaiśyayoniṃ vātha ya iha kapūyacaraṇā abhyāśo ha yatte kapūyāṃ yonimāpadyerañśvayoniṃ vā sūkarayoniṃ vā caṇḍālayoniṃ vā || 5.10.7 || athaitayoḥ pathorna katareṇacana tānīmāni kṣudrāṇyasakṛdāvartīni bhūtāni bhavanti jāyasva mriyasvetyetattṛtīyaṃsthānaṃ tenāsau loko na sampūryate tasmājjugupseta tadeṣa ślokaḥ || 5.10.8 || steno hiraṇyasya surāṃ pibaṃśca gurostalpamāvasanbrahmahā caite patanti catvāraḥ pañcamaścācaraṃstairiti || 5.10.9 || atha ha ya etānevaṃ pañcāgnīnveda na saha tairapyācaranpāpmanā lipyate śuddhaḥ pūtaḥ puṇyaloko bhavati ya evaṃ veda ya evaṃ veda || 5.10.10 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.11 prācīnaśāla aupamanyavaḥ satyayajñaḥ pauluṣirindradyumno bhāllaveyo janaḥ śārkarākṣyo buḍila āśvatarāśviste haite mahāśālā mahāśrotriyāḥ sametya mīmāṃsāṃ cakruḥ ko na ātmā kiṃ brahmeti || 5.11.1 || te ha sampādayāṃcakruruddālako vai bhagavanto'yamāruṇiḥ sampratīmamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramadhyeti taṃ hantābhyāgacchāmeti taṃ hābhyājagmuḥ || 5.11.2 || sa ha sampādayāṃcakāra prakṣyanti māmime mahāśālā mahāśrotriyāstebhyo na sarvamiva pratipatsye hantāhamanyamabhyanuśāsānīti || 5.11.3 || tānhovācāśvapatirvai bhagavanto'yaṃ kaikeyaḥ sampratīmamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramadhyeti taṃhantābhyāgacchāmeti taṃhābhyājagmuḥ || 5.11.4 || tebhyo ha prāptebhyaḥ pṛthagarhāṇi kārayāṃcakāra sa ha prātaḥ saṃjihāna uvāca na me steno janapade na kardaryo na madyapo nānāhitāgnirnāvidvānna svairī svairiṇī kuto yakṣyamāṇo vai bhagavanto'hamasmi yāvadekaikasmā ṛtvije dhanaṃ dāsyāmi tāvadbhagavadbhyo dāsyāmi vasantu bhagavanta iti || 5.11.5 || te hocuryena haivārthena puruṣaścarettaṃhaiva vadedātmānamevemaṃ vaiśvānaraṃ sampratyadhyeṣi tameva no brūhīti || 5.11.6 || tānhovāca prātarvaḥ prativaktāsmīti te ha samitpāṇayaḥ pūrvāhṇe praticakramire tānhānupanīyaivaitaduvāca || 5.11.7 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.12 aupamanyava kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa iti divameva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai sutejā ātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttava sutaṃ prasutamāsutaṃ kule dṛśyate || 5.12.1 || atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste mūdhā tveṣa ātmana iti hovāca mūrdhā te vyapatiṣyadyanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti || 5.12.2 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.13 atha hovāca satyayajñaṃ pauluṣiṃ prācīnayogya kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa ityādityameva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai viśvarūpa ātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttava bahu viśvarūpaṃ kule dṛśyate || 5.13.1 || pravṛtto'śvatarīratho dāsīniṣko'tsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste cakṣuṣetadātmana iti hovācāndho'bhaviṣyo yanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti || 5.13.2 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.14 atha hovācendradyumnaṃ bhāllaveyaṃ vaiyāghrapadya kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa iti vāyumeva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai pṛthagvartmātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttvāṃ pṛthagbalaya āyanti pṛthagrathaśreṇayo'nuyanti || 5.14.1 || atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste prāṇastveṣa ātmana iti hovāca prāṇasta udakramiṣyadyanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti || 5.14.2 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.15 atha hovāca janaṃśārkarākṣya kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa ityākāśameva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai bahula ātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupasse tasmāttvaṃ bahulo'si prajayā ca dhanena ca || 5.15.1 || atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste saṃdehastveṣa ātmana iti hovāca saṃdehaste vyaśīryadyanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti || 5.15.2 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.16 atha hovāca buḍilamāśvatarāśviṃ vaiyāghrapadya kaṃ tvamātmānamupāssa ityapa eva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai rayirātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttvaṃrayimānpuṣṭimānasi || 5.16.1 || atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste bastistveṣa ātmana iti hovāca bastiste vyabhetsyadyanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti || 5.16.2 || || iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.17 atha hovācoddālakamāruṇiṃ gautama kaṃ tvamātmānamupassa iti pṛthivīmeva bhagavo rājanniti hovācaiṣa vai pratiṣṭhātmā vaiśvānaro yaṃ tvamātmānamupāsse tasmāttvaṃ pratiṣṭhito'si prajayā ca paśubhiśca || 5.17.1 || atsyannaṃ paśyasi priyamattyannaṃ paśyati priyaṃ bhavatyasya brahmavarcasaṃ kule ya etamevamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste pādau tvetāvātmana iti hovāca pādau te vyamlāsyetāṃ yanmāṃ nāgamiṣya iti || 5.17.2 || || iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.18 tānhovācaite vai khalu yūyaṃ pṛthagivemamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaraṃ vidvāṃso'nnamattha yastvetamevaṃ prādeśamātramabhivimānamātmānaṃ vaiśvānaramupāste sa sarveṣu lokeṣu sarveṣu bhūteṣu sarveṣvātmasvannamatti || 5.18.1 || tasya ha vā etasyātmano vaiśvānarasya mūrdhaiva sutejāścakṣurviśvarūpaḥ prāṇaḥ pṛthagvartmātmā saṃdeho bahulo bastireva rayiḥ pṛthivyeva pādāvura eva vedirlomāni barhirhṛdayaṃ gārhapatyo mano'nvāhāryapacana āsyamāhavanīyaḥ || 5.18.2 || || iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.19 tadyadbhaktaṃ prathamamāgacchettaddhomīyaṃ sa yāṃ prathamāmāhutiṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyātprāṇāya svāheti prāṇastṛpyati || 5.19.1 || prāṇe tṛpyati cakṣustṛpyati cakṣuṣi tṛpyatyādityastṛpyatyāditye tṛpyati dyaustṛpyati divi tṛpyantyāṃ yatkiṃca dyauścādityaścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati tasyānutṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcaseneti || 5.19.2 || || iti ekonaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.20 atha yāṃ dvitīyāṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyādvyānāya svāheti vyānastṛpyati || 5.20.1 || vyāne tṛpyati śrotraṃ tṛpyati śrotre tṛpyati candramāstṛpyati candramasi tṛpyati diśastṛpyanti dikṣu tṛpyantīṣu yatkiṃca diśaśca candramāścādhitiṣṭhanti tattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcaseneti || 5.20.2 || || iti viṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.21 atha yāṃ tṛtīyāṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyādapānāya svāhetyapānastṛpyati || 5.21.1 || apāne tṛpyati vāktṛpyati vāci tṛpyantyāmagnistṛpyatyagnau tṛpyati pṛthivī tṛpyati pṛthivyāṃ tṛpyantyāṃ yatkiṃca pṛthivī cāgniścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcaseneti || 5.21.2 || || iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.22 atha yāṃ caturthīṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyātsamānāya svāheti samānastṛpyati || 5.22.1 || samāne tṛpyati manastṛpyati manasi tṛpyati parjanyastṛpyati parjanye tṛpyati vidyuttṛpyati vidyuti tṛpyantyāṃ yatkiṃca vidyucca parjanyaścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcaseneti || 5.22.2 || || iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.23 atha yāṃ pañcamīṃ juhuyāttāṃ juhuyādudānāya svāhetyudānastṛpyati || 5.23.1 || udāne tṛpyati tvaktṛpyati tvaci tṛpyantyāṃ vāyustṛpyati vāyau tṛpyatyākāśastṛpyatyākāśe tṛpyati yatkiṃca vāyuścākāśaścādhitiṣṭhatastattṛpyati tasyānu tṛptiṃ tṛpyati prajayā paśubhirannādyena tejasā brahmavarcasena || 5.23.2 || || iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 5 Section 5.24 sa ya idamavidvāgnihotraṃ juhoti yathāṅgārānapohya bhasmani juhuyāttādṛktatsyāt || 5.24.1 || atha ya etadevaṃ vidvānagnihotraṃ juhoti tasya sarveṣu lokeṣu sarveṣu bhūteṣu sarveṣvātmasu hutaṃ bhavati || 5.24.2 || tadyatheṣīkātūlamagnau protaṃ pradūyetaivaṃhāsya sarve pāpmānaḥ pradūyante ya etadevaṃ vidvānagnihotraṃ juhoti || 5.24.3 || tasmādu haivaṃvidyadyapi caṇḍālāyocchiṣṭaṃ prayacchedātmani haivāsya tadvaiśvānare hutaṃ syāditi tadeṣa ślokaḥ || 5.24.4 || yatheha kṣudhitā bālā mātaraṃ paryupāsata evaṃ sarvāṇi bhūtānyagnihotramupāsata ityagnihotramupāsata iti || 5.24.5 || || iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || || iti pañcamo'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.1 || ṣaṣṭho'dhyāyaḥ || śvetaketurhāruṇeya āsa taṃ ha pitovāca śvetaketo vasa brahmacaryaṃ na vai somyāsmatkulīno'nanūcya brahmabandhuriva bhavatīti || 6.1.1 || sa ha dvādaśavarṣa upetya caturviṃśativarṣaḥ sarvānvedānadhītya mahāmanā anūcānamānī stabdha eyāya taṃha pitovāca || 6.1.2 || śvetaketo yannu somyedaṃ mahāmanā anūcānamānī stabdho'syuta tamādeśamaprākṣyaḥ yenāśrutaṃ śrutaṃ bhavatyamataṃ matamavijñātaṃ vijñātamiti kathaṃ nu bhagavaḥ sa ādeśo bhavatīti || 6.1.3 || yathā somyaikena mṛtpiṇḍena sarvaṃ mṛnmayaṃ vijñātaṃ syādvācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ mṛttiketyeva satyam || 6.1.4 || yathā somyaikena lohamaṇinā sarvaṃ lohamayaṃ vijñātaṃ syādvācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ lohamityeva satyam || 6.1.5 || yathā somyikena nakhanikṛntanena sarvaṃ kārṣṇāyasaṃ vijñātaṃ syādvācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ kṛṣṇāyasamityeva satyamevaṃsomya sa ādeśo bhavatīti || 6.1.6 || na vai nūnaṃ bhagavantasta etadavediṣuryaddhyetadavediṣyankathaṃ me nāvakṣyanniti bhagavāṃstveva me tadbravītviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.1.7 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.2 sadeva somyedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyam | taddhaika āhurasadevedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyaṃ tasmādasataḥ sajjāyata || 6.2.1 || kutastu khalu somyaivaṃsyāditi hovāca kathamasataḥ sajjāyeteti| sattveva somyedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyam || 6.2.2 || tadaikṣata bahu syāṃ prajāyeyeti tattejo'sṛjata tatteja aikṣata bahu syāṃ prajāyeyeti tadapo'sṛjata | tasmādyatra kvaca śocati svedate vā puruṣastejasa eva tadadhyāpo jāyante || 6.2.3 || tā āpa aikṣanta bahvyaḥ syāma prajāyemahīti tā annamasṛjanta tasmādyatra kva ca varṣati tadeva bhūyiṣṭhamannaṃ bhavatyadbhya eva tadadhyannādyaṃ jāyate || 6.2.4 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.3 teṣāṃ khalveṣāṃ bhūtānāṃ trīṇyeva bījāni bhavantyāṇḍajaṃ jīvajamudbhijjamiti || 6.3.1 || seyaṃ devataikṣata hantāhamimāstisro devatā anena jīvenātmanānupraviśya nāmarūpe vyākaravāṇīti || 6.3.2 || tāsāṃ trivṛtaṃ trivṛtamekaikāṃ karavāṇīti seyaṃ devatemāstisro devatā anenaiva jīvenātmanānupraviśya nāmarūpe vyākarot || 6.3.3 || tāsāṃ trivṛtaṃ trivṛtamekaikāmakarodyathā tu khalu somyemāstisro devatāstrivṛttrivṛdekaikā bhavati tanme vijānīhīti || 6.3.4 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.4 yadagne rohitaṃrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgādagneragnitvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam || 6.4.1 || yadādityasya rohitaṃrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgādādityādādityatvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam || 6.4.2 || yacchandramaso rohitaṃrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgāccandrāccandratvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam || 6.4.3 || yadvidyuto rohitaṃrūpaṃ tejasastadrūpaṃ yacchuklaṃ tadapāṃ yatkṛṣṇaṃ tadannasyāpāgādvidyuto vidyuttvaṃ vācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ trīṇi rūpāṇītyeva satyam || 6.4.4 || etaddha sma vai tadvidvāṃsa āhuḥ pūrve mahāśālā mahāśrotriyā na no'dya kaścanāśrutamamatamavijñātamudāhariṣyatīti hyebhyo vidāṃcakruḥ || 6.4.5 || yadu rohitamivābhūditi tejasastadrūpamiti tadvidāṃcakruryadu śuklamivābhūdityapāṃrūpamiti tadvidāṃcakruryadu kṛṣṇamivābhūdityannasya rūpamiti tadvidāṃcakruḥ || 6.4.6 || yadvavijñātamivābhūdityetāsāmeva devatānāṃsamāsa iti tadvidāṃcakruryathā tu khalu somyemāstisro devatāḥ puruṣaṃ prāpya trivṛttrivṛdekaikā bhavati tanme vijānīhīti || 6.4.7 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.5 annamaśitaṃ tredhā vidhīyate tasya yaḥ sthaviṣṭho dhātustatpurīṣaṃ bhavati yo madhyamastanmāṃsaṃ yo'ṇiṣṭhastanmanaḥ || 6.5.1 || āpaḥ pītāstredhā vidhīyante tāsāṃ yaḥ sthaviṣṭho dhātustanmūtraṃ bhavati yo madhyamastallohitaṃ yo'ṇiṣṭhaḥ sa prāṇaḥ || 6.5.2 || tejo'śitaṃ tredhā vidhīyate tasya yaḥ sthaviṣṭho dhātustadasthi bhavati yo madhyamaḥ sa majjā yo'ṇiṣṭhaḥ sā vāk || 6.5.3 || annamayaṃhi somya manaḥ āpomayaḥ prāṇastejomayī vāgiti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.5.4 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.6 dadhnaḥ somya mathyamānasya yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati tatsarpirbhavati || 6.6.1 || evameva khalu somyānnasyāśyamānasya yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati tanmano bhavati || 6.6.2 || apāṃsomya pīyamānānāṃ yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati sā prāṇo bhavati || 6.6.3 || tejasaḥ somyāśyamānasya yo'ṇimā sa urdhvaḥ samudīṣati sā vāgbhavati || 6.6.4 || annamayaṃ hi somya mana āpomayaḥ prāṇastejomayī vāgiti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.6.6 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.7 ṣoḍaśakalaḥ somya puruṣaḥ pañcadaśāhāni māśīḥ kāmamapaḥ pibāpomayaḥ prāṇo napibato vicchetsyata iti || 6.7.1 || sa ha pañcadaśāhāni naśātha hainamupasasāda kiṃ bravīmi bho ityṛcaḥ somya yajūṃṣi sāmānīti sa hovāca na vai mā pratibhānti bho iti || 6.7.2 || taṃ hovāca yathā somya mahato'bhyā hitasyaiko'ṅgāraḥ khadyotamātraḥ pariśiṣṭaḥ syāttena tato'pi na bahu dahedevaṃsomya te ṣoḍaśānāṃ kalānāmekā kalātiśiṣṭā syāttayaitarhi vedānnānubhavasyaśānātha me vijñāsyasīti || 6.7.3 || sa haśātha hainamupasasāda taṃ ha yatkiṃca papraccha sarvaṃha pratipede || 6.7.4 || taṃ hovāca yathā somya mahato'bhyāhitasyaikamaṅgāraṃ khadyotamātraṃ pariśiṣṭaṃ taṃ tṛṇairupasamādhāya prājvalayettena tato'pi bahu dahet || 6.7.5 || evaṃ somya te ṣoḍaśānāṃ kalānāmekā kalātiśiṣṭābhūtsānnenopasamāhitā prājvālī tayaitarhi vedānanubhavasyannamayaṃhi somya mana āpomayaḥ prāṇastejomayī vāgiti taddhāsya vijajñāviti vijajñāviti || 6.7.6 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.8 uddālako hāruṇiḥ śvetaketuṃ putramuvāca svapnāntaṃ me somya vijānīhīti yatraitatpuruṣaḥ svapiti nāma satā somya tadā sampanno bhavati svamapīto bhavati tasmādenaṃ svapitītyācakṣate svaṃhyapīto bhavati || 6.8.1 || sa yathā śakuniḥ sūtreṇa prabaddho diśaṃ diśaṃ patitvānyatrāyatanamalabdhvā bandhanamevopaśrayata evameva khalu somya tanmano diśaṃ diśaṃ patitvānyatrāyatanamalabdhvā prāṇamevopaśrayate prāṇabandhanaṃ hi somya mana iti || 6.8.2 || aśanāpipāse me somya vijānīhīti yatraitatpuruṣo'śiśiṣati nāmāpa eva tadaśitaṃ nayante tadyathā gonāyo'śvanāyaḥ puruṣanāya ityevaṃ tadapa ācakṣate'śanāyeti tatritacchuṅgamutpatitaṃ somya vijānīhi nedamamūlaṃ bhaviṣyatīti || 6.8.3 || tasya kva mūlaṃ syādanyatrānnādevameva khalu somyānnena śuṅgenāpo mūlamanvicchādbhiḥ somya śuṅgena tejo mūlamanviccha tejasā somya śuṅgena sanmūlamanviccha sanmūlāḥ somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sadāyatanāḥ satpratiṣṭhāḥ || 6.8.4 || atha yatraitatpuruṣaḥ pipāsati nāma teja eva tatpītaṃ nayate tadyathā gonāyo'śvanāyaḥ puruṣanāya ityevaṃ tatteja ācaṣṭa udanyeti tatraitadeva śuṅgamutpatitaṃ somya vijānīhi nedamamūlaṃ bhaviṣyatīti || 6.8.5 || tasya kva mūlaṃ syādanyatrādbhy'dbhiḥ somya śuṅgena tejo mūlamanviccha tejasā somya śuṅgena sanmūlamanviccha sanmūlāḥ somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sadāyatanāḥ satpratiṣṭhā yathā tu khalu somyemāstisro devatāḥ puruṣaṃ prāpya trivṛttrivṛdekaikā bhavati taduktaṃ purastādeva bhavatyasya somya puruṣasya prayato vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyām || 6.8.6 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.8.7 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.9 yathā somya madhu madhukṛto nistiṣṭhanti nānātyayānāṃ vṛkṣāṇāṃrasānsamavahāramekatāṃrasaṃ gamayanti || 6.9.1 || te yathā tatra na vivekaṃ labhante'muṣyāhaṃ vṛkṣasya raso'smyamuṣyāhaṃ vṛkṣasya raso'smītyevameva khalu somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sati sampadya na viduḥ sati sampadyāmaha iti || 6.9.2 || ta iha vyaghro vā siṃho vā vṛko vā varāho vā kīṭo vā pataṅgo vā daṃśo vā maśako vā yadyadbhavanti tadābhavanti || 6.9.3 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.9.4 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.10 imāḥ somya nadyaḥ purastātprācyaḥ syandante paścātpratīcyastāḥ samudrātsamudramevāpiyanti sa samudra eva bhavati tā yathā tatra na viduriyamahamasmīyamahamasmīti || 6.10.1 || evameva khalu somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sata āgamya na viduḥ sata āgacchāmaha iti ta iha vyāghro vā siṃho vā vṛko vā varāho vā kīṭo vā pataṅgo vā daṃśo vā maśako vā yadyadbhavanti tadābhavanti || 6.10.2 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.10.3 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || asya somya mahato vṛkṣasya yo mūle'bhyāhanyājjīvansravedyo madhye'bhyāhanyājjīvansravedyo'gre'bhyāhanyājjīvansravetsa eṣa jīvenātmanānuprabhūtaḥ pepīyamāno modamānastiṣṭhati || 6.11.1 || asya yadekāṃ śākhāṃ jīvo jahātyatha sā śuṣyati dvitīyāṃ jahātyatha sā śuṣyati tṛtīyāṃ jahātyatha sā śuṣyati sarvaṃ jahāti sarvaḥ śuṣyati || 6.11.2 || evameva khalu somya viddhīti hovāca jīvāpetaṃ vāva kiledaṃ mriyate na jīvo mriyate iti sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.11.3 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.12 nyagrodhaphalamata āharetīdaṃ bhagava iti bhinddhīti bhinnaṃ bhagava iti kimatra paśyasītyaṇvya ivemā dhānā bhagava ityāsāmaṅgaikāṃ bhinddhīti bhinnā bhagava iti kimatra paśyasīti na kiṃcana bhagava iti || 6.12.1 || taṃ hovāca yaṃ vai somyaitamaṇimānaṃ na nibhālayasa etasya vai somyaiṣo'ṇimna evaṃ mahānyagrodhastiṣṭhati śraddhatsva somyeti || 6.12.2 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidadṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.12.3 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.13 lavaṇametadudake'vadhāyātha mā prātarupasīdathā iti sa ha tathā cakāra taṃ hovāca yaddoṣā lavaṇamudake'vādhā aṅga tadāhareti taddhāvamṛśya na viveda || 6.13.1 || yathā vilīnamevāṅgāsyāntādācāmeti kathamiti lavaṇamiti madhyādācāmeti kathamiti lavaṇamityantādācāmeti kathamiti lavaṇamityabhiprāsyaitadatha mopasīdathā iti taddha tathā cakāra tacchaśvatsaṃvartate taṃ hovācātra vāva kila tatsomya na nibhālayase'traiva kileti || 6.13.2 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.13.3 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.14 yathā somya puruṣaṃ gandhārebhyo'bhinaddhākṣamānīya taṃ tato'tijane visṛjetsa yathā tatra prāṅvodaṅvādharāṅvā pratyaṅvā pradhmāyītābhinaddhākṣa ānīto'bhinaddhākṣo visṛṣṭaḥ || 6.14.1 || tasya yathābhinahanaṃ pramucya prabrūyādetāṃ diśaṃ gandhārā etāṃ diśaṃ vrajeti sa grāmādgrāmaṃ pṛcchanpaṇḍito medhāvī gandhārānevopasampadyetaivamevehācāryavānpuruṣo veda tasya tāvadeva ciraṃ yāvanna vimokṣye'tha sampatsya iti || 6.14.2 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.14.3 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.15 puruṣaṃ somyotopatāpinaṃ jñātayaḥ paryupāsate jānāsi māṃ jānāsi māmiti tasya yāvanna vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyāṃ tāvajjānāti || 6.15.1 || atha yadāsya vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyāmatha na jānāti || 6.15.2 || sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tat satyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti bhūya eva mā bhagavānvijñāpayatviti tathā somyeti hovāca || 6.15.3 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 6 Section 6.16 puruṣaṃ somyota hastagṛhītamānayantyapahārṣītsteyamakārṣītparaśumasmai tapateti sa yadi tasya kartā bhavati tata evānṛtamātmānaṃ kurute so'nṛtābhisaṃdho'nṛtenātmānamantardhāya paraśuṃ taptaṃ pratigṛhṇāti sa dahyate'tha hanyate || 6.16.1 || Similarly, if we do not have Self-knowledge, we will continue to bum in this world. We will be born again and again. But if we have attained Self-knowledge, we will be liberated. Truth will set us free. atha yadi tasyākartā bhavati tateva satyamātmānaṃ kurute sa satyābhisandhaḥ satyenātmānamantardhāya paraśuṃ taptaṃ pratigṛhṇāti sana dahyate'tha mucyate || 6.16.2 || sa yathā tatra nādāhyetaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti taddhāsya vijajñāviti vijajñāviti || 6.16.3 || || iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || || iti ṣaṣṭho'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.1 || saptamo'dhyāyaḥ || adhīhi bhagava iti hopasasāda sanatkumāraṃ nāradastaṃ hovāca yadvettha tena mopasīda tatasta ūrdhvaṃ vakṣyāmīti sa hovāca || 7.1.1 || ṛgvedaṃ bhagavo'dhyemi yajurvedaṃ sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ caturthamitihāsapurāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ pitryaṃ rāśiṃ daivaṃ nidhiṃ vākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ brahmavidyāṃ bhūtavidyāṃ kṣatravidyāṃ nakṣatravidyāṃ sarpadevajanavidyāmetadbhagavo'dhyemi || 7.1.2 || so'haṃ bhagavo mantravidevāsmi nātmavicchrutaṃ hyeva me bhagavaddṛśebhyastarati śokamātmaviditi so'haṃ bhagavaḥ śocāmi taṃ mā bhagavāñchokasya pāraṃ tārayatviti taṃ hovāca yadvai kiṃcaitadadhyagīṣṭhā nāmaivaitat || 7.1.3 || nāma vā ṛgvedo yajurvedaḥ sāmaveda ātharvaṇaścaturtha itihāsapurāṇaḥ pañcamo vedānāṃ vedaḥ pitryo rāśirdaivo nidhirvākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyā brahmavidyā bhūtavidyā kṣatravidyā nakṣatravidyā sarpadevajanavidyā nāmaivaitannāmopāssveti || 7.1.4 || sa yo nāma brahmetyupāste yāvannāmno gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo nāma brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo nāmno bhūya iti nāmno vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.1.5 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.2 vāgvāva nāmno bhūyasī vāgvā ṛgvedaṃ vijñāpayati yajurvedaṃ sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ caturthamitihāsapurāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ pitryaṃrāśiṃ daivaṃ nidhiṃ vākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ brahmavidyāṃ bhūtavidyāṃ kṣatravidyāṃ sarpadevajanavidyāṃ divaṃ ca pṛthivīṃ ca vāyuṃ cākāśaṃ cāpaśca tejaśca devāṃśca manuṣyāṃśca paśūṃśca vayāṃsi ca tṛṇavanaspatīñśvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakaṃ dharmaṃ cādharmaṃ ca satyaṃ cānṛtaṃ ca sādhu cāsādhu ca hṛdayajñaṃ cāhṛdayajñaṃ ca yadvai vāṅnābhaviṣyanna dharmo nādharmo vyajñāpayiṣyanna satyaṃ nānṛtaṃ na sādhu nāsādhu na hṛdayajño nāhṛdayajño vāgevaitatsarvaṃ vijñāpayati vācamupāssveti || 7.2.1 || sa yo vācaṃ brahmetyupāste yāvadvāco gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo vācaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo vāco bhūya iti vāco vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.2.2 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.3 mano vāva vāco bhūyo yathā vai dve vāmalake dve vā kole dvau vākṣau muṣṭiranubhavatyevaṃ vācaṃ ca nāma ca mano'nubhavati sa yadā manasā manasyati mantrānadhīyīyetyathādhīte karmāṇi kurvīyetyatha kurute putrāṃśca paśūṃśceccheyetyathecchata imaṃ ca lokamamuṃ ceccheyetyathecchate mano hyātmā mano hi loko mano hi brahma mana upāssveti || 7.3.1 || sa yo mano brahmetyupāste yāvanmanaso gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo mano brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo manaso bhūya iti manaso vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.3.2 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.4 saṃkalpo vāva manaso bhūyānyadā vai saṃkalpayate'tha manasyatyatha vācamīrayati tāmu nāmnīrayati nāmni mantrā ekaṃ bhavanti mantreṣu karmāṇi || 7.4.1 || tāni ha vā etāni saṃkalpaikāyanāni saṃkalpātmakāni saṃkalpe pratiṣṭhitāni samakḷpatāṃ dyāvāpṛthivī samakalpetāṃ vāyuścākāśaṃ ca samakalpantāpaśca tejaśca teṣāṃ saṃ kḷptyai varṣaṃ saṃkalpate varṣasya saṃkḷptyā annaṃ saṃkalpate'nnasya saṃ kḷptyai prāṇāḥ saṃkalpante prāṇānāṃ saṃ kḷptyai mantrāḥ saṃkalpante mantrāṇāṃ saṃ kḷptyai karmāṇi saṃkalpante karmaṇāṃ saṃkḷptyai lokaḥ saṃkalpate lokasya saṃ kḷptyai sarvaṃ saṃkalpate sa eṣa saṃkalpaḥ saṃkalpamupāssveti || 7.4.2 || sa yaḥ saṃkalpaṃ brahmetyupāste saṃkḷptānvai sa lokāndhruvāndhruvaḥ pratiṣṭhitān pratiṣṭhito'vyathamānānavyathamāno'bhisidhyati yāvatsaṃkalpasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yaḥ saṃkalpaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavaḥ saṃkalpādbhūya iti saṃkalpādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.4.3 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.5 cittaṃ vāva saṃ kalpādbhūyo yadā vai cetayate'tha saṃkalpayate'tha manasyatyatha vācamīrayati tāmu nāmnīrayati nāmni mantrā ekaṃ bhavanti mantreṣu karmāṇi || 7.5.1 || tāni ha vā etāni cittaikāyanāni cittātmāni citte pratiṣṭhitāni tasmādyadyapi bahuvidacitto bhavati nāyamastītyevainamāhuryadayaṃ veda yadvā ayaṃ vidvānnetthamacittaḥ syādityatha yadyalpaviccittavānbhavati tasmā evota śuśrūṣante cittaṃhyevaiṣāmekāyanaṃ cittamātmā cittaṃ pratiṣṭhā cittamupāssveti || 7.5.2 || sa yaścittaṃ brahmetyupāste cittānvai sa lokāndhruvāndhruvaḥ pratiṣṭhitānpratiṣṭhito'vyathamānānavyathamāno'bhisidhyati yāvaccittasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yaścittaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavaścittādbhūya iti cittādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.5.3 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.6 dhyānaṃ vāva cittādbhūyo dhyāyatīva pṛthivī dhyāyatīvāntarikṣaṃ dhyāyatīva dyaurdhyāyantīvāpo dhyāyantīva parvatā devamanuṣyāstasmādya iha manuṣyāṇāṃ mahattāṃ prāpnuvanti dhyānāpādāṃśā ivaiva te bhavantyatha ye'lpāḥ kalahinaḥ piśunā upavādinaste'tha ye prabhavo dhyānāpādāṃśā ivaiva te bhavanti dhyānamupāssveti || 7.6.1 || sa yo dhyānaṃ brahmetyupāste yāvaddhyānasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo dhyānaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo dhyānādbhūya iti dhyānādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.6.2 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.7 vijñānaṃ vāva dhyānādbhūyaḥ vijñānena vā ṛgvedaṃ vijānāti yajurvedaṃ sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ caturthamitihāsapurāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ pitryaṃrāśiṃ daivaṃ nidhiṃ vākovākyamekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ brahmavidyāṃ bhūtavidyāṃ kṣatravidyāṃ nakṣatravidyāṃsarpadevajanavidyāṃ divaṃ ca pṛthivīṃ ca vāyuṃ cākāśaṃ cāpaśca tejaśca devāṃśca manuṣyāṃśca paśūṃśca vayāṃsi ca tṛṇavanaspatīñchvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakaṃ dharmaṃ cādharmaṃ ca satyaṃ cānṛtaṃ ca sādhu cāsādhu ca hṛdayajñaṃ cāhṛdayajñaṃ cānnaṃ ca rasaṃ cemaṃ ca lokamamuṃ ca vijñānenaiva vijānāti vijñānamupāssveti || 7.7.1 || sa yo vijñānaṃ brahmetyupāste vijñānavato vai sa lokāñjñānavato'bhisidhyati yāvadvijñānasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo vijñānaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo vijñānādbhūya iti vijñānādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.7.2 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.8 balaṃ vāva vijñānādbhūyo'pi ha śataṃ vijñānavatāmeko balavānākampayate sa yadā balī bhavatyathotthātā bhavatyuttiṣṭhanparicaritā bhavati paricarannupasattā bhavatyupasīdandraṣṭā bhavati śrotā bhavati mantā bhavati boddhā bhavati kartā bhavati vijñātā bhavati balena vai pṛthivī tiṣṭhati balenāntarikṣaṃ balena dyaurbalena parvatā balena devamanuṣyā balena paśavaśca vayāṃsi ca tṛṇavanaspatayaḥ śvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakaṃ balena lokastiṣṭhati balamupāssveti || 7.8.1 || sa yo balaṃ brahmetyupāste yāvadbalasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo balaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo balādbhūya iti balādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.8.2 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.9 annaṃ vāva balādbhūyastasmādyadyapi daśa rātrīrnāśnīyādyadyu ha jīvedathavādraṣṭāśrotāmantāboddhākartāvijñātā bhavatyathānnasyāyai draṣṭā bhavati śrotā bhavati mantā bhavati boddhā bhavati kartā bhavati vijñātā bhavatyannamupāssveti || 7.9.1 || sa yo'nnaṃ brahmetyupāste'nnavato vai sa lokānpānavato'bhisidhyati yāvadannasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo'nnaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo'nnādbhūya ityannādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.9.2 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.10 āpo vāvānnādbhūyastasmādyadā suvṛṣṭirna bhavati vyādhīyante prāṇā annaṃ kanīyo bhaviṣyatītyatha yadā suvṛṣṭirbhavatyānandinaḥ prāṇā bhavantyannaṃ bahu bhaviṣyatītyāpa evemā mūrtā yeyaṃ pṛthivī yadantarikṣaṃ yaddyauryatparvatā yaddevamanuṣyāyatpaśavaśca vayāṃsi ca tṛṇavanaspatayaḥ śvāpadānyākīṭapataṅgapipīlakamāpa evemā mūrtā apa upāssveti || 7.10.1 || sa yo'po brahmetyupāsta āpnoti sarvānkāmāṃstṛptimānbhavati yāvadapāṃ gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yo'po brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavo'dbhyo bhūya ityadbhyo vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.10.2 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.11 tejo vāvādbhyo bhūyastadvā etadvāyumāgṛhyākāśamabhitapati tadāhurniśocati nitapati varṣiṣyati vā iti teja eva tatpūrvaṃ darśayitvāthāpaḥ sṛjate tadetadūrdhvābhiśca tiraścībhiśca vidyudbhirāhrādāścaranti tasmādāhurvidyotate stanayati varṣiṣyati vā iti teja eva tatpūrvaṃ darśayitvāthāpaḥ sṛjate teja upāssveti || 7.11.1 || sa yastejo brahmetyupāste tejasvī vai sa tejasvato lokānbhāsvato'pahatatamaskānabhisidhyati yāvattejaso gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yastejo brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavastejaso bhūya iti tejaso vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.11.2 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.12 ākāśo vāva tejaso bhūyānākāśe vai sūryācandramasāvubhau vidyunnakṣatrāṇyagnirākāśenāhvayatyākāśena śṛṇotyākāśena pratiśṛṇotyākāśe ramata ākāśe na ramata ākāśe jāyata ākāśamabhijāyata ākāśamupāssveti || 7.12.1 || sa ya ākāśaṃ brahmetyupāsta ākāśavato vai sa lokānprakāśavato'saṃbādhānurugāyavato'bhisidhyati yāvadākāśasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati ya ākāśaṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagava ākāśādbhūya iti ākāśādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.12.2 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.13 smaro vāvākāśādbhūyastasmādyadyapi bahava āsīranna smaranto naiva te kaṃcana śṛṇuyurna manvīranna vijānīranyadā vāva te smareyuratha śṛṇuyuratha manvīrannatha vijānīransmareṇa vai putrānvijānāti smareṇa paśūnsmaramupāssveti || 7.13.1 || sa yaḥ smaraṃ brahmetyupāste yāvatsmarasya gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati yaḥ smaraṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagavaḥ smarādbhūya iti smarādvāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.13.2 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.14 āśā vāva smarādbhūyasyāśeddho vai smaro mantrānadhīte karmāṇi kurute putrāṃśca paśūṃścecchata imaṃ ca lokamamuṃ cecchata āśāmupāssveti || 7.14.1 || sa ya āśāṃ brahmetyupāsta āśayāsya sarve kāmāḥ samṛdhyantyamoghā hāsyāśiṣo bhavanti yāvadāśāyā gataṃ tatrāsya yathākāmacāro bhavati ya āśāṃ brahmetyupāste'sti bhagava āśāyā bhūya ityāśāyā vāva bhūyo'stīti tanme bhagavānbravītviti || 7.14.2 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.15 prāṇo vā āśāyā bhūyānyathā vā arā nābhau samarpitā evamasminprāṇe sarvaṃsamarpitaṃ prāṇaḥ prāṇena yāti prāṇaḥ prāṇaṃ dadāti prāṇāya dadāti prāṇo ha pitā prāṇo mātā prāṇo bhrātā prāṇaḥ svasā prāṇa ācāryaḥ prāṇo brāhmaṇaḥ || 7.15.1 || sa yadi pitaraṃ vā mātaraṃ vā bhrātaraṃ vā svasāraṃ vācāryaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā kiṃcidbhṛśamiva pratyāha dhiktvāstvityevainamāhuḥ pitṛhā vai tvamasi mātṛhā vai tvamasi bhrātṛhā vai tvamasi svasṛhā vai tvamasyācāryahā vai tvamasi brāhmaṇahā vai tvamasīti || 7.15.2 || atha yadyapyenānutkrāntaprāṇāñchūlena samāsaṃ vyatiṣaṃdahennaivainaṃ brūyuḥ pitṛhāsīti na mātṛhāsīti na bhrātṛhāsīti na svasṛhāsīti nācāryahāsīti na brāhmaṇahāsīti || 7.15.3 || prāṇo hyevaitāni sarvāṇi bhavati sa vā eṣa evaṃ paśyannevaṃ manvāna evaṃ vijānannativādī bhavati taṃ cedbrūyurativādyasītyativādyasmīti brūyānnāpahnuvīta || 7.15.4 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Section 7.16 eṣa tu vā ativadati yaḥ satyenātivadati so'haṃ bhagavaḥ satyenātivadānīti satyaṃ tveva vijijñāsitavyamiti satyaṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.16.1 || || iti ṣoḍaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.17 yadā vai vijānātyatha satyaṃ vadati nāvijānansatyaṃ vadati vijānanneva satyaṃ vadati vijñānaṃ tveva vijijñāsitavyamiti vijñānaṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.17.1 || || iti saptadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.18 yadā vai manute'tha vijānāti nāmatvā vijānāti matvaiva vijānāti matistveva vijijñāsitavyeti matiṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.18.1 || || iti aṣṭādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.19 yadā vai śraddadhātyatha manute nāśraddadhanmanute śraddadhadeva manute śraddhā tveva vijijñāsitavyeti śraddhāṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.19.1 || || iti ekonaviṃśatitamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || yadā vai nistiṣṭhatyatha śraddadhāti nānistiṣṭhañchraddadhāti nistiṣṭhanneva śraddadhāti niṣṭhā tveva vijijñāsitavyeti niṣṭhāṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.20.1 || || iti viṃśatitamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.21 yadā vai karotyatha nistiṣṭhati nākṛtvā nistiṣṭhati kṛtvaiva nistiṣṭhati kṛtistveva vijijñāsitavyeti kṛtiṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.21.1 || || iti ekaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || yadā vai sukhaṃ labhate'tha karoti nāsukhaṃ labdhvā karoti sukhameva labdhvā karoti sukhaṃ tveva vijijñāsitavyamiti sukhaṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.22.1 || || iti dvāviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.23 yo vai bhūmā tatsukhaṃ nālpe sukhamasti bhūmaiva sukhaṃ bhūmā tveva vijijñāsitavya iti bhūmānaṃ bhagavo vijijñāsa iti || 7.23.1 || || iti trayoviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.24 yatra nānyatpaśyati nānyacchṛṇoti nānyadvijānāti sa bhūmātha yatrānyatpaśyatyanyacchṛṇotyanyadvijānāti tadalpaṃ yo vai bhūmā tadamṛtamatha yadalpaṃ tanmartyṃ sa bhagavaḥ kasminpratiṣṭhita iti sve mahimni yadi vā na mahimnīti || 7.24.1 || goaśvamiha mahimetyācakṣate hastihiraṇyaṃ dāsabhāryaṃ kṣetrāṇyāyatanānīti nāhamevaṃ bravīmi bravīmīti hovācānyohyanyasminpratiṣṭhita iti || 7.24.2 || || iti caturviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.25 sa evādhastātsa upariṣṭātsa paścātsa purastātsa dakṣiṇataḥ sa uttarataḥ sa evedaṃ sarvamityathāto'haṃkārādeśa evāhamevādhastādahamupariṣṭādahaṃ paścādahaṃ purastādahaṃ dakṣiṇato'hamuttarato'hamevedaṃ sarvamiti || 7.25.1 || athāta ātmādeśa evātmaivādhastādātmopariṣṭādātmā paścādātmā purastādātmā dakṣiṇata ātmottarata ātmaivedaṃ sarvamiti sa vā eṣa evaṃ paśyannevaṃ manvāna evaṃ vijānannātmaratirātmakrīḍa ātmamithuna ātmānandaḥ sa svarāḍbhavati tasya sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati atha ye'nyathāto viduranyarājānaste kṣayyalokā bhavanti teṣāṃ sarveṣu lokeṣvakāmacāro bhavati || 7.25.2 || || iti pañcaviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 7 Section 7.26 tasya ha vā etasyaivaṃ paśyata evaṃ manvānasyaivaṃ vijānata ātmataḥ prāṇa ātmata āśātmataḥ smara ātmata ākāśa ātmatasteja ātmata āpa ātmata āvirbhāvatirobhāvāvātmato'nnamātmato balamātmato vijñānamātmato dhyānamātmataścittamātmataḥ saṃkalpa ātmato mana ātmato vāgātmato nāmātmato mantrā ātmataḥ karmāṇyātmata evedaṃsarvamiti || 7.26.1 || tadeṣa śloko na paśyo mṛtyuṃ paśyati na rogaṃ nota duḥkhatāṃ sarvaṃ ha paśyaḥ paśyati sarvamāpnoti sarvaśa iti sa ekadhā bhavati tridhā bhavati pañcadhā saptadhā navadhā caiva punaścaikādaśaḥ smṛtaḥ śataṃ ca daśa caikaśca sahasrāṇi ca viṃśatirāhāraśuddhau sattvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ smṛtilambhe sarvagranthīnāṃ vipramokṣastasmai mṛditakaṣāyāya tamasaspāraṃ darśayati bhagavānsanatkumārastaṃ skanda ityācakṣate taṃ skanda ityācakṣate || 7.26.2 || || iti ṣaḍviṃśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || || iti saptamo'dhyāyaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.1 || aṣṭamo'dhyāyaḥ || atha yadidamasminbrahmapure daharaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ veśma daharo'sminnantarākāśastasminyadantastadanveṣṭavyaṃ tadvāva vijijñāsitavyamiti || 8.1.1 || taṃ cedbrūyuryadidamasminbrahmapure daharaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ veśma daharo'sminnantarākāśaḥ kiṃ tadatra vidyate yadanveṣṭavyaṃ yadvāva vijijñāsitavyamiti sa brūyāt || 8.1.2 || yāvānvā ayamākāśastāvāneṣo'ntarhṛdaya akāśa ubhe asmindyāvāpṛthivī antareva samāhite ubhāvagniśca vāyuśca sūryācandramasāvubhau vidyunnakṣatrāṇi yaccāsyehāsti yacca nāsti sarvaṃ tadasminsamāhitamiti || 8.1.3 || taṃ cedbrūyurasmiṃścedidaṃ brahmapure sarvaṃ samāhitaṃ sarvāṇi ca bhūtāni sarve ca kāmā yadaitajjarā vāpnoti pradhvaṃsate vā kiṃ tato'tiśiṣyata iti || 8.1.4 || sa brūyātnāsya jarayaitajjīryati na vadhenāsya hanyata etatsatyaṃ brahmapuramasmikāmāḥ samāhitāḥ eṣa ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpo yathā hyeveha prajā anvāviśanti yathānuśāsanam yaṃ yamantamabhikāmā bhavanti yaṃ janapadaṃ yaṃ kṣetrabhāgaṃ taṃ tamevopajīvanti || tadyatheha karmajito lokaḥ kṣīyata evamevāmutra puṇyajito lokaḥ kṣīyate tadya ihātmānamanuvidya vrajantyetāṃśca satyānkāmāṃsteṣāṃ sarveṣu lokeṣvakāmacāro bhavatyatha ya ihātmānamanivudya vrajantyetaṃśca satyānkāmāṃsteṣāṃ sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati || 8.1.6 || || iti prathamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.2 sa yadi pitṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya pitaraḥ samuttiṣṭhanti tena pitṛlokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.1 || atha yadi mātṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya mātaraḥ samuttiṣṭhanti tena mātṛlokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.2 || atha yadi bhrātṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya bhrātaraḥ samuttiṣṭhanti tena bhrātṛlokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.3 || atha yadi svasṛlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya svasāraḥ samuttiṣṭhanti tena svasṛlokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.4 || atha yadi sakhilokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya sakhāyaḥ samuttiṣṭhanti tena sakhilokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.5 || atha yadi gandhamālyalokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya gandhamālye samuttiṣṭhatastena gandhamālyalokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.6 || atha yadyannapānalokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsyānnapāne samuttiṣṭhatastenānnapānalokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.7 || atha yadi gītavāditralokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya gītavāditre samuttiṣṭhatastena gītavāditralokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.8 || atha yadi strīlokakāmo bhavati saṃkalpādevāsya striyaḥ samuttiṣṭhanti tena strīlokena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.9 || yaṃ yamantamabhikāmo bhavati yaṃ kāmaṃ kāmayate so'sya saṃkalpādeva samuttiṣṭhati tena sampanno mahīyate || 8.2.10 || || iti dvitīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.3 ta ime satyāḥ kāmā anṛtāpidhānāsteṣāṃ satyānāṃ satāmanṛtamapidhānaṃ yo yo hyasyetaḥ praiti na tamiha darśanāya labhate || 8.3.1 || atha ye cāsyeha jīvā ye ca pretā yaccānyadicchanna labhate sarvaṃ tadatra gatvā vindate'tra hyasyaite satyāḥ kāmā anṛtāpidhānāstadyathāpi hiraṇyanidhiṃ nihitamakṣetrajñā uparyupari sañcaranto na vindeyurevamevemāḥ sarvāḥ prajā aharahargacchantya etaṃ brahmalokaṃ na vindantyanṛtena hi pratyūḍhāḥ || 8.3.2 || sa vā eṣa ātmā hṛdi tasyaitadeva niruktaṃ hṛdyayamiti tasmāddhṛdayamaharaharvā evaṃvitsvargaṃ lokameti || 8.3.3 || atha ya eṣa samprasādo'smāccharīrātsamutthāya paraṃ jyotirupasampadya svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyata eṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti tasya ha vā etasya brahmaṇo nāma satyamiti || 8.3.4 || tāni ha vā etāni trīṇyakṣarāṇi satīyamiti tadyatsattadamṛtamatha yatti tanmartyamatha yadyaṃ tenobhe yacchati yadanenobhe yacchati tasmādyamaharaharvā evaṃvitsvargaṃ lokameti || 8.3.5 || || iti tṛtīyaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.4 atha ya ātmā sa seturdhṛtireṣāṃ lokānāmasaṃbhedāya naitaṃ setumahorātre tarato na jarā na mṛtyurna śoko na sukṛtaṃ na duṣkṛtaṃ sarve pāpmāno'to nivartante'pahatapāpmā hyeṣa brahmalokaḥ || 8.4.1 || tasmādvā etaṃ setuṃ tīrtvāndhaḥ sannanandho bhavati viddhaḥ sannaviddho bhavatyupatāpī sannanupatāpī bhavati tasmādvā etaṃ setuṃ tīrtvāpi naktamaharevābhiniṣpadyate sakṛdvibhāto hyevaiṣa brahmalokaḥ || 8.4.2 || tadya evaitaṃ brahmalokaṃ brahmacaryeṇānuvindanti teṣāmevaiṣa brahmalokasteṣāṃ sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati || 8.4.3 || || iti caturthaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.5 atha yadyajña ityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryeṇa hyeva yo jñātā taṃ vindate'tha yadiṣṭamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadbrahmacaryeṇa hyeveṣṭvātmānamanuvindate || 8.5.1 || atha yadanāśakāyanamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadeṣa hyātmā na naśyati yaṃ brahmacaryeṇānuvindate'tha yadaraṇyāyanamityācakṣate brahmacaryameva tadaraśca ha vai ṇyaścārṇavau brahmaloke tṛtīyasyāmito divi tadairaṃ madīyaṃ sarastadaśvatthaḥ somasavanastadaparājitā pūrbrahmaṇaḥ prabhuvimitaṃ hiraṇmayam || 8.5.3 || tadya evaitavaraṃ ca ṇyaṃ cārṇavau brahmaloke brahmacaryeṇānuvindanti teṣāmevaiṣa brahmalokasteṣāṃ sarveṣu lokeṣu kāmacāro bhavati || 8.5.4 || || iti pañcamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.6 atha yā etā hṛdayasya nāḍyastāḥ piṅgalasyāṇimnastiṣṭhanti śuklasya nīlasya pītasya lohitasyetyasau vā ādityaḥ piṅgala eṣa śukla eṣa nīla eṣa pīta eṣa lohitaḥ || 8.6.1 || tadyathā mahāpatha ātata ubhau grāmau gacchatīmaṃ cāmuṃ caivamevaitā ādityasya raśmaya ubhau lokau gacchantīmaṃ cāmuṃ cāmuṣmādādityātpratāyante tā āsu nāḍīṣu sṛptā ābhyo nāḍībhyaḥ pratāyante te'muṣminnāditye sṛptāḥ || 8.6.2 || tadyatraitatsuptaḥ samastḥ samprasannaḥ svapnaṃ na vijānātyāsu tadā nāḍīṣu sṛpto bhavati taṃ na kaścana pāpmā spṛśati tejasā hi tadā sampanno bhavati || 8.6.3 || atha yatraitadabalimānaṃ nīto bhavati tamabhita āsīnā āhurjānāsi māṃ jānāsi māmiti sa yāvadasmāccharīrādanutkrānto bhavati tāvajjānāti || 8.6.4 || atha yatraitadasmāccharīrādutkrāmatyathaitaireva raśmibhirūrdhvamākramate sa omiti vā hodvā mīyate sa yāvatkṣipyenmanastāvadādityaṃ gacchatyetadvai khalu lokadvāraṃ viduṣāṃ prapadanaṃ nirodho'viduṣām || 8.6.5 || tadeṣa ślokaḥ | śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyastāsāṃ mūrdhānamabhiniḥsṛtaikā | tayordhvamāyannamṛtatvameti viṣvaṅṅanyā utkramaṇe bhavantyutkramaṇe bhavanti || 8.6.6 || || iti ṣaṣṭhaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.7 ya ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpaḥ so'nveṣṭavyaḥ sa vijijñāsitavyaḥ sa sarvāṃśca lokānāpnoti sarvāṃśca kāmānyastamātmānamanuvidya vijānātīti ha prajāpatiruvāca || 8.7.1 || taddhobhaye devāsurā anububudhire te hocurhanta tamātmānamanvecchāmo yamātmānamanviṣya sarvāṃśca lokānāpnoti sarvāṃśca kāmānitīndro haiva devānāmabhipravavrāja virocano'surāṇāṃ tau hāsaṃvidānāveva samitpāṇī prajāpatisakāśamājagmatuḥ || 8.7.2 || tau ha dvātriṃśataṃ varṣāṇi brahmacaryamūṣatustau ha prajāpatiruvāca kimicchantāvāstamiti tau hocaturya ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpaḥ so'nveṣṭavyaḥ sa vijijñāsitavyaḥ sa sarvāṃśca lokānāpnoti sarvāṃśca kāmānyastamātmānamanuvidya vijānātīti bhagavato vaco vedayante tamicchantāvavāstamiti || 8.7.3 || tau ha prajāpatiruvāca ya eṣo'kṣiṇi puruṣo dṛśyata eṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmetyatha yo'yaṃ bhagavo'psu parikhyāyate yaścāyamādarśe katama eṣa ityeṣa u evaiṣu sarveṣvanteṣu parikhyāyata iti hovāca || 8.7.4 || || iti saptamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.8 udaśarāva ātmānamavekṣya yadātmano na vijānīthastanme prabrūtamiti tau hodaśarāve'vekṣāṃcakrāte tau ha prajāpatiruvāca kiṃ paśyatha iti tau hocatuḥ sarvamevedamāvāṃ bhagava ātmānaṃ paśyāva ā lomabhyaḥ ā nakhebhyaḥ pratirūpamiti || 8.8.1 || tau ha prajāpatiruvāca sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau pariṣkṛtau bhūtvodaśarāve'vekṣethāmiti tau ha sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau pariṣkṛtau bhūtvodaśarāve'vekṣāṃcakrāte tau ha prajāpatiruvāca kiṃ paśyatha iti || 8.8.2 || tau hocaturyathaivedamāvāṃ bhagavaḥ sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau pariṣkṛtau sva evamevemau bhagavaḥ sādhvalaṃkṛtau suvasanau pariṣkṛtāvityeṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti tau ha śāntahṛdayau pravavrajatuḥ || 8.8.3 || tau hānvīkṣya prajāpatiruvācānupalabhyātmānamananuvidya vrajato yatara etadupaniṣado bhaviṣyanti devā vāsurā vā te parābhaviṣyantīti sa ha śāntahṛdaya eva virocano'surāñjagāma tebhyo haitāmupaniṣadaṃ provācātmaiveha mahayya ātmā paricarya ātmānameveha mahayannātmānaṃ paricarannubhau lokāvavāpnotīmaṃ cāmuṃ ceti || 8.8.4 || tasmādapyadyehādadānamaśraddadhānamayajamānamāhurāsuro batetyasurāṇāṃ hyeṣopaniṣatpretasya śarīraṃ bhikṣayā vasanenālaṃkāreṇeti saṃskurvantyetena hyamuṃ lokaṃ jeṣyanto manyante || 8.8.5 || || iti aṣṭamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.9 atha hendro'prāpyaiva devānetadbhayaṃ dadarśa yathaiva khalvayamasmiñcharīre sādhvalaṃkṛte sādhvalaṃkṛto bhavati suvasane suvasanaḥ pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛta evamevāyamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srāme srāmaḥ parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇo'syaiva śarīrasya nāśamanveṣa naśyati nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti || 8.9.1 || sa samitpāṇiḥ punareyāya taṃ ha prajāpatiruvāca maghavanyacchāntahṛdayaḥ prāvrājīḥ sārdhaṃ virocanena kimicchanpunarāgama iti sa hovāca yathaiva khalvayaṃ bhagavo'smiñcharīre sādhvalaṃkṛte sādhvalaṃkṛto bhavati suvasane suvasanaḥ pariṣkṛte pariṣkṛta evamevāyamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srāme srāmaḥ parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇo'syaiva śarīrasya nāśamanveṣa naśyati nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti || 8.9.2 || evamevaiṣa maghavanniti hovācaitaṃ tveva te bhūyo'nuvyākhyāsyāmi vasāparāṇi dvātriṃśataṃ varṣāṇīti sa hāparāṇi dvātriṃśataṃ varṣāṇyuvāsa tasmai hovāca || 8.9.3 || || iti navamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.10 ya eṣa svapne mahīyamānaścaratyeṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti sa ha śāntahṛdayaḥ pravavrāja sa hāprāpyaiva devānetadbhayaṃ dadarśa tadyadyapīdaṃ śarīramandhaṃ bhavatyanandhaḥ sa bhavati yadi srāmamasrāmo naivaiṣo'sya doṣeṇa duṣyati || 8.10.1 || na vadhenāsya hanyate nāsya srāmyeṇa srāmo ghnanti tvevainaṃ vicchādayantīvāpriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditīva nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti || 8.10.2 || sa samitpāṇiḥ punareyāya taṃ ha prajāpatiruvāca maghavanyacchāntahṛdayaḥ prāvrājīḥ kimicchanpunarāgama iti sa hovāca tadyadyapīdaṃ bhagavaḥ śarīramandhaṃ bhavatyanandhaḥ sa bhavati yadi srāmamasrāmo naivaiṣo'sya doṣeṇa duṣyati || 8.10.3 || na vadhenāsya hanyate nāsya srāmyeṇa srāmo ghnanti tvevainaṃ vicchādayantīvāpriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditīva nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmītyevamevaiṣa maghavanniti hovācaitaṃ tveva te bhūyo'nuvyākhyāsyāmi vasāparāṇi dvātriṃśataṃ varṣāṇīti sa hāparāṇi dvātriṃśataṃ varṣāṇyuvāsa tasmai hovāca || 8.10.4 || || iti daśamaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.11 tadyatraitatsuptaḥ samastaḥ samprasannaḥ svapnaṃ na vijānātyeṣa ātmeti hovācaitadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti sa ha śāntahṛdayaḥ pravavrāja sa hāprāpyaiva devānetadbhayaṃ dadarśa nāha khalvayamevaṃ sampratyātmānaṃ jānātyayamahamasmīti no evemāni bhūtāni vināśamevāpīto bhavati nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti || 8.11.1 || sa samitpāṇiḥ punareyāya taṃ ha prajāpatiruvāca maghavanyacchāntahṛdayaḥ prāvrājīḥ kimicchanpunarāgama iti sa hovāca nāha khalvayaṃ bhagava evaṃ sampratyātmānaṃ jānātyayamahamasmīti no evemāni bhūtāni vināśamevāpīto bhavati nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti || 8.11.2 || evamevaiṣa maghavanniti hovācaitaṃ tveva te bhūyo'nuvyākhyāsyāmi no evānyatraitasmādvasāparāṇi pañca varṣāṇīti sa hāparāṇi pañca varṣāṇyuvāsa tānyekaśataṃ sampeduretattadyadāhurekaśataṃ ha vai varṣāṇi maghavānprajāpatau brahmacaryamuvāsa tasmai hovāca || 8.11.3 || || iti ekādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.12 maghavanmartyaṃ vā idaṃ śarīramāttaṃ mṛtyunā tadasyāmṛtasyāśarīrasyātmano'dhiṣṭhānamātto vai saśarīraḥ priyāpriyābhyāṃ na vai saśarīrasya sataḥ priyāpriyayorapahatirastyaśarīraṃ vāva santaṃ na priyāpriye spṛśataḥ || 8.12.1 || aśarīro vāyurabhraṃ vidyutstanayitnuraśarīrāṇyetāni tadyathaitānyamuṣmādākāśātsamutthāya paraṃ jyotirupasampadya svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyante || 8.12.2 || evamevaiṣa samprasādo'smāccharīrātsamutthāya paraṃ jyotirupasampadya svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyate sa uttamapuruṣaḥ sa tatra paryeti jakṣatkrīḍanramamāṇaḥ strībhirvā yānairvā jñātibhirvā nopajanaṃ smarannidaṃ śarīraṃ sa yathā prayogya ācaraṇe yukta evamevāyamasmiñcharīre prāṇo yuktaḥ || 8.12.3 || atha yatraitadākāśamanuviṣaṇṇaṃ cakṣuḥ sa cākṣuṣaḥ puruṣo darśanāya cakṣuratha yo vededaṃ jighrāṇīti sa ātmā gandhāya ghrāṇamatha yo vededamabhivyāharāṇīti sa ātmābhivyāhārāya vāgatha yo vededaṃ śṛṇavānīti sa ātmā śravaṇāya śrotram || 8.12.4 || atha yo vededaṃ manvānīti sātmā mano'sya daivaṃ cakṣuḥ sa vā eṣa etena daivena cakṣuṣā manasaitānkāmānpaśyanramate ya ete brahmaloke || 8.12.5 || taṃ vā etaṃ devā ātmānamupāsate tasmātteṣāṃ sarve ca lokā āttāḥ sarve ca kāmāḥ sa sarvāṃśca lokānāpnoti sarvāṃśca kāmānyastamātmānamanuvidya vijānātīti ha prjāpatiruvāca prajāpatiruvāca || 8.12.6 || || iti dvādaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.13 śyāmācchabalaṃ prapadye śabalācchyāmaṃ prapadye'śva iva romāṇi vidhūya pāpaṃ candra iva rāhormukhātpramucya dhūtvā śarīramakṛtaṃ kṛtātmā brahmalokamabhisaṃbhavāmītyabhisaṃbhavāmīti || 8.13.1 || || iti trayodaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || Chapter 8 Section 8.14 ākāśo vai nāma nāmarūpayornirvahitā te yadantarā tadbrahma tadamṛtaṃ sa ātmā prajāpateḥ sabhāṃ veśma prapadye yaśo'haṃ bhavāmi brāhmaṇānāṃ yaśo rājñāṃ yaśoviśāṃ yaśo'hamanuprāpatsi sa hāhaṃ yaśasāṃ yaśaḥ śyetamadatkamadatkaṃ śyetaṃ lindu mābhigāṃ lindu mābhigām || 8.14.1 || || iti caturdaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ || tadhaitadbrahmā prajāpatayai uvāca prajāpatirmanave manuḥ prajābhyaḥ ācāryakulādvedamadhītya yathāvidhānaṃ guroḥ karmātiśeṣeṇābhisamāvṛtya kuṭumbe śucau deśe svādhyāyamadhīyāno dharmikānvidadhadātmani sarvaindriyāṇi sampratiṣṭhāpyāhiṃsansarva bhūtānyanyatra tīrthebhyaḥ sa khalvevaṃ vartayanyāvadāyuṣaṃ brahmalokamabhisampadyate na ca punarāvartate na ca punarāvartate || 8.15.1 || || iti pañcadaśaḥ khaṇḍaḥ ||